Home

Instruction Manual - Industrial Electric Systems

1. Terminal R1 T1 Screw size M3 5 Tightening torque 1 2 N m for 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and for 400 V class series with 75 kW or above Figure A amp Charging lamp Figure B X Charging lamp e e elo LAR LZS Larr viw RO TO 2 lelelee g EHan ele elelelele ele Terminal block width os Terminal block width 6 6 JLim vesiis os Pt Pono o v w e RO TO 6 6 ec 8G Others 9 5 Figure C Xf Charging lamp Figure D 3 Charging lamp 22 22 22 16 5 13 5 13 5 13 6 12 12 12 T eee o 9 9O 9 P1 P N U V wW U Vv w re 16 16 16 6 6 12 ari 6 eS i 22 22 22 6 6 16 5 3 22 i 22 2 22 DB o LUR Las L3 T uolo olo TO 12 LR Las Lat DB P1 P NG 66 o ITO 7 eG 16 6 6 H x Grounding terminal for input line provided eG e only on the EMC filter built in type Figure E x Figure F aly oS ee 66 Charging lamp Aa 6 6 Re ROTO ROTOJ x Charging 23 23 23 23 23 23 a H i a CPD OIDO nsn ia Akai OOO CARENA M etal QO O O LUR Las L3 T ze x O O O O 25 25 25 t Po NO ec eG aS 23 37 37 37 eG es 23 23 2 Arrangement of control circuit terminals com
2. Drive S control 52 sE Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range 2s A amp setting wo w page E 8 vi Pa pa C07 _ Multi frequency 3 0 00 to 500 00 Hz Y Y 0 00 Y Y Y c08 4 ba Y 0 00 Y Y Y cog 5 Y Y 0 00 Y Y Y C10 6 Y Y 0 00 Y Y Y C11 ri Y Y 0 00 Y Y Y C12 8 Y Y 0 00 YIY Y C13 9 ns x 0 00 Y Y Y C14 10 Y Y 0 00 Y Y Y C15 11 Y Y 0 00 Y Y Y C16 12 Y Y o0 Y Y Y C17 13 Y Y 0 00 Y Y Y C18 14 Y Y 0 00 Y Y Y C19 15 Y Y oo Y YJ Y C20 Jogging Frequency 0 00 to 500 00 Hz nd Y 0 00 Y Y Y C30 Frequency Command 2 0 Enable keys on the keypad N Y 2 Y Y Y 5 25 1 Voltage input to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC 2 Current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC 3 Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 5 Voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC 7 Terminal command UP DOWN control 8 keys on the keypad balanceless bumpless switching available 11 Digital input interface card option 12 PG interface card C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset 5 0 to 5 0 y Y oo Y YI Y C32 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 Yy 1000 Y Y Y 5 40 C33 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 s Y Y 005 Y Y Y C34 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 Ne Y__ 100 00 Y Y Y 5 40 C35 Polarity 0 Bipolar 1 Unipolar N Y L LYLY 5 40 C36 Analog Input Adjustm
3. Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 Selection 1 or 3 Nominal applied motor kW Thermal time constant t Factory default 0 2 to 22 30 to 45 55 to 90 110 or above Reference current for setting the thermal time constant Imax Allowable continuous current x 150 Output frequency for motor characteristic factor Characteristic factor f2 f3 Base frequency Base x 33 a2 frequency x 33 Base frequency x 83 If F10 is set to 2 changes of the output frequency do not affect the cooling effect Therefore the overload detection level F11 remains constant 5 33 m Overload detection level F11 F11 specifies the level at which the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated In general set the F11 data to the allowable continuous current of motor when driven at the base frequency i e 1 0 to 1 1 multiple of the rated current of the motor To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set the F11 data to 0 00 E Thermal time constant F12 F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor If the current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12 the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated to detect the motor overload The thermal time constant for general purpose motors including Fuji motors is approx 5 minu
4. Capacitance measuring procedure 1 To ensure validity in the comparative measurement put the condition of the inverter back to the state at factory shipment e Remove the option card if already in use from the inverter e Incase another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P and N terminals of the main circuit disconnect the wires You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor optional if any e Disconnect power wires for the auxiliary input to the control circuit RO TO e Mount the remote keypad on the inverter e Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals FWD REV and X1 through X7 of the control circuit e f a potentiometer is connected to terminal 13 disconnect it e If an external apparatus is attached to terminal PLC disconnect it Ensure that transistor output signals Y1 to Y4 and relay output signals Y5A Y5C and 30A B C will not be turned ON Disable the RS 485 communications link Gip It is recommended that terminal EN be short circuited for the measurement of the capacitance C Note f negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals they are considered ON when the inverter is not running Specify positive logic for them e Keep the surrounding temperature within 25 10 C amp Turn ON the main circuit power g Confirm that the cooling fan
5. Check prior to powering on Power ON and check Switch between HD and LD modes F80 Which motor F42 See Chapter 2 See Section 4 1 2 See Section 4 1 3 See Section 4 1 4 6 Vector control with speed sensor Fuji VG motor drive control Which motor F42 5 Vector control without speed sensor drive control See Section 4 1 5 Which motor type What output wiring condition Shorter output lines F42 0 1 2 V f control Dynamic torque vector control Non Fuji motor non standard motor Fuji general purpose motor Longer output lines Reactor connected Function code basic settings lt 1 gt Function code basic settings lt 2 gt Function code basic settings lt 3 gt Function code basic settings lt 4 gt See Section 4 1 6 See Section 4 1 7 See Section 4 1 8 See Section 4 1 9 Tuning Tuning le See Section 4 1 7 See Section 4 1 8 pi y Run the inverter for operation check Gradually accelerating from low to high speed Adjust motor control function code data Set up application related function codes Check interfacing operations with peripherals End Proceed to practical operation See Section 4 1 10 See Section 4 1 11 Figure 4 1 Test Run Procedure 4 1 4 1 2 Checking prior t
6. During deceleration Braking time s x Motor rated capacity kW 2 Discharging capability kWs Expression 1 During running at a constant speed Discharging capability kWs Braking time s x Motor rated capacity kW Expression 2 Ti When the F50 data is set to 0 To be applied to the braking resistor built in type no specification P of the discharging capability is required E Allowable average loss F51 The allowable average loss refers to a tolerance for motor continuous operation which is obtained based on the ED and motor rated capacity kW Data for F51 Function 0 001 to 99 99 0 001 to 99 99 kW During deceleration ED Y eae x Motor rated capacity kW Allowable average loss kWs 3 Expression 3 During constant speed operation ED Allowable average loss kWs mete x Motor rated capacity kW Expression 4 Em Resistance F52 F52 specifies the resistance of the braking resistor F80 Switching between HD and LD drive modes F80 specifies whether to drive the inverter in the high duty HD or low duty LD mode To change the F80 data it is necessary to press the 6o N keys or o O keys simultaneous keying Data for i een Overload Maximum F80 Drive mode Application Continuous current rating level capability frequency Capable of driving a motor 3 i 0 HD High Duty mode Heavy load whose capacity is the same
7. A A04 Maximum Output Voltage 2 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series 160 to 500 Ya M A05 Torque Boost 2 0 0 to 20 0 percentage with respect to A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 3 A06 A07 A08 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2 Select motor characteristics Overload detection level Thermal time constant 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan 0 00 Disable 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor Y1 Y2 4 0 5 to 75 0 min lt lt 5 lt lt A09 A10 A11 DC Braking 2 Braking starting frequency Braking level Braking time 0 0 to 60 0 Hz 0 0 0 to 100 HD mode 0 to 80 LD mode 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s 0 00 A12 Starting Frequency 2 0 0 to 60 0 Hz 0 5 A13 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 0 Variable torque load 1 Constant torque load 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC 5 Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during A
8. gt Implement noise control measures 21 er 4 Option communications error Problem A communications error occurred between the option card and the inverter Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 There was a problem with Check whether the connector on the option card is properly engaged with the connection between that of the inverter the option card and the F inverter gt Reload the option card into the inverter 2 Strong electrical noise Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires communications cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures 22 er5 Option error An error detected by the option card Refer to the instruction manual of the option card for details 23 er6 Operation protection Problem An incorrect operation was attempted Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The Gr08 key was pressed Check that the key was pressed when a run command had been entered when H96 1 or 3 from the input terminal or through the communications port gt If this was not intended check the setting of H96 2 The start check function Check that any of the following operations has been performed with a run was activated when H96 command being entered 2 or 3 Turning the power ON Releasing the alarm Switching the enable communications link LE operation
9. Check that the inverter serves as a terminating device in the network gt Configure the terminating resistor switch es SW2 SW3 for RS 485 communication correctly That is turn the switch es to ON 26 erf Data saving error during undervoltage Problem The inverter failed to save data such as the frequency commands and PID commands which are specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands when the power was turned OFF Possible Causes 1 During data saving performed when the power was turned OFF the voltage fed to the control PCB dropped in an abnormally short period due to the rapid discharge of the DC link bus What to Check and Suggested Measures Check how long it takes for the DC link bus voltage to drop to the preset voltage when the power is turned OFF gt Remove whatever is causing the rapid discharge of the DC link bus voltage After pressing the key and releasing the alarm return the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands and PID commands specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands back to the original values and then restart the operation 2 Inverter operation affected by strong electrical noise when the power was turned OFF 3 The control circuit failed 27 erh Hardware error Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e
10. e 3 FRNO 4G1 40 FRNO 75G1 40 1 5 FRN1 5G1 40 HD 10 10 2 2 FRN2 2G1 40 15 15 15 9 3 7 FRN3 7G1m 4A 20 S 1 8 4 0 FRN4 0G1m 4E 5 5 HD 30 30 FRN5 5G1 40 LD 7 5 HD 40 40 gt 30 9 FRN7 5G1 40 LD 3 5 11 60 50 es HD FRN11G18 40 LD gt 15 70 60 f HD g FRN15G1m 40 T 2 18 5 mo oe 75 10 6 5 FRN18 5G1m 40 wa 1 2 D LD 5 8 22 100 100 E a HD FRN22G1 40 30 me 125 E HD FRN30G1 40 125 LD 37 175 z HD FRN37G1m 40 iD 119 4 45 200 150 HD 13 5 FRN45G1m 40 LD 55 200 z HD FRN55G1Wm 40 i 250 H FRN75G1 40 LD 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1 4E Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination xii Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada addition ACAUTION Wire size AWG mm Main terminal L1 R L2 S L3 T U V W Inverter type HD LD mode Remarks Remarks Power supply voltage Control circuit Nominal applied motor Aux Fan Power Supply Aux Control Power Supply FRNO 4G1 40 FRNO 75G1 40 FRN1 5G1 40 FRN2 2G1 40 FRN3 7G1 4A FRN4 0G1 4E FRN5 5G1m 40 FRN7 5G1m 40 FRN11G1m 40 FRN15G1m 40 FRN18 5G1m 40 Three phase 400 V FRN22G1 m 40 4
11. Auditory visual and olfactory inspection No abnormalities Magnetic contactor and relay 1 Check for chatters during operation 2 Check that contact surface is not rough 1 Auditory inspection 2 Visual inspection 1 2 No abnormalities Printed circuit board Control circuit 1 Check for loose screws and connectors 2 Check for odor and discoloration 3 Check for cracks breakage deformation and remarkable rust 4 Check the capacitors for electrolyte leaks and deformation 1 Retighten 2 Olfactory and visual inspection 3 4 Visual inspection 1 2 3 4 No abnormalities Cooling fan 1 Check for abnormal noise and excessive vibration 2 Check for loose bolts 3 Check for discoloration caused by overheat 1 Auditory and visual inspection or turn manually be sure to turn the power OFF 2 Retighten 3 Visual inspection 1 Smooth rotation 2 3 No abnormalities Cooling system Ventilation path Check the heat sink intake and exhaust ports for clogging and foreign materials Visual inspection No abnormalities Remove dust accumulating on the inverter with a vacuum cleaner If the inverter is stained wipe it off with a chemically neutral cloth 7 2 7 3 List of Periodic Replacement Parts Each part of the inverter has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating conditions I
12. Check the machinery mounting accuracy or check whether there is resonance with the mounting base gt Disconnect the motor from the machinery and run it alone then find where the resonance comes from Upon locating the cause improve the characteristics of the source of the resonance gt Adjust the settings of C01 Jump frequency 1 to C04 Jump frequency Hysteresis width so as to avoid continuous running in the frequency range causing resonance gt Enable the speed control notch filter d07 d08 and the observer d18 to d20 to suppress vibration Depending on the characteristics of the load this may take no effect 6 The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time Possible Causes 1 The inverter runs the motor with S curve or curvilinear pattern What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern gt Select the linear pattern H07 0 gt Shorten the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 The current limiting operation prevented the output frequency from increasing during acceleration Make sure that F43 Current limiter Mode selection is set to 2 Enable during acceleration and at constant speed then check that the setting of F44 Current limiter Level is reasonable gt Readjust the setting of F44 to appropriate value or disable the function of current limiter with F43
13. Enable Data protection Enables the Data protection of data stored in the keypad s memory In this state you cannot read any data stored in the inverter s memory but can write data into the memory and verify data in the memory Upon pressing the key the inverter immediately displays err Read inverter running information Reads out inverter s current running status information that can be checked by FRENIC Loader such as information of I O system alarm and running status excluding function code data Use this command when the function code data saved in the PC should not be overwritten and it is necessary to keep the previous data Pressing the key during a read operation chec blinking immediately aborts the operation and displays err blinking Cip To get out of the error state indicated by a blinking err or cper press the key E Data protection You can protect data saved in the keypad from unexpected modifications Enabling the data protection that was disabled changes the display read on the Data Copying function list to or o7 and disables to read data from the inverter To enable or disable the data protection follow the next steps 1 Select the Data Copying cpy on the function selection menu in Programming mode 2 Holding the key down for 5 seconds or more alternates data protection status between enabled or disabled e Disabling the enabled data protection for 5
14. reference frequency before the light alarm factor is removed e g when it takes a long time to remove the light alarm factor follow the steps below 1 Press the key to return the LED monitor to the light alarm indication a 2 With a being displayed press the key The LED monitor returns to the normal display state while the KEYPAD CONTROL LED continues blinking m Releasing the light alarm 1 Remove the light alarm factor that has been checked in 5_ 36 Light alarm factor latest under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode in accordance with the troubleshooting procedure The reference page for the troubleshooting corresponding to each light alarm factor is shown in Ref page column in Table 6 1 2 Once the light alarm factor is removed the light alarm indication a on the LED monitor disappears and the KEYPAD CONTROLLED stops blinking If the KEYPAD CONTROL LED continues blinking it means that any light alarm factor has not completely been removed and the inverter is still in the light alarm status Proceed to other troubleshooting procedures When all of the light alarm factors have been removed the digital output L ALM is also turned OFF automatically 6 6 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while Neither an Alarm Code nor Light Alarm Indication a is Displayed 1 center bar appears Problem A center bar appeared on the LED monitor Po
15. 0 1 to 200 0 times y Y 10 0 N YJ Y A46 Integral time 0 001 to 1 000 s y Y 0 10 N YJ Y A48 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y 0 020 N YJ Y A51 Cumulative Motor Run Time 2 0 to 9999 The cumulative run time can be modified or reset N N YoYo PY in units of 10 hours A52 Startup Counter for Motor 2 Indication of cumulative startup count Y N 7 Y Y Y 0000 to FFFF hex A53 Motor 2 X correction factor 1 0 to 300 Y J 1Y2 100 Yi YoY A54 X correction factor 2 0 to 300 Y J 1Y2 100 Y Y Y A55_ Torque current under vector control 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 Mer YY A56 Induced voltage factor under 50 to 100 N Y1Y2 85 N Y Y vector control A57 Reserved 9 0 000 to 20 000 s N yi y2 o 082 7 The motor constant is automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table 5 3 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 5 14 b codes Motor 3 Parameters Drive S control 22 g Defaut Ref oe gt Default efer to Code Name Data setting range Be 8 setting P w o w page 5 PG PG b01 Maximum Frequency 3 25 0 to 500 0 Hz N Y M Y Y Y b02 Base Frequency 3 25 0 to 500 0 Hz N Y 50 0 Y Y Y b03 Rat
16. 1 Incorrect setting of function code data What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the following function code data P01 Motor No of poles d15 Feedback encoder pulse count rev and d16 and d17 Feedback pulse correction factor 1 and 2 gt Specify data of function codes P01 d15 d16 and d17 in accordance with the motor and PG 2 Overload Measure the inverter output current gt Reduce the load Check whether any mechanical brake is working gt Release the mechanical brake Possible Causes 3 The motor speed does not rise due to the current limiter operation What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code F44 Current limiter Level gt Change the F44 data correctly Or set the F43 data to 0 Disable if the current limiter operation is not needed Check the data of function codes F04 F05 and P01 through P12 to ensure that the V f pattern setting is right gt Match the V f pattern setting with the motor ratings gt Change the function code data in accordance with the motor parameters 4 Function code settings do not match the motor characteristics Check whether the data of P01 P02 P03 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 and P12 match the parameters of the motor gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter using the function code P04 5 Wrong wiring between the pulse generator PG and the inverter Check the wiring b
17. 20 FRNO 75G1 20 FRN1 5G1 20 FRN2 2G1m 20 FRN3 7G1 20 FRN5 5G1m 20 FRN7 5G1m 20 FRN11G1m 20 FRN15G1 20 w eg K sard De 23 E md Ee EA E aa Ke 53 E mt E a o 9 9 090 9 09 09 9 5 FRN18 5G1m 20 Three phase 200 V FRN22G1 20 FRN30G1 20 FRN37G1 20 FRN45G1 20 ETIE TTE VEET E o o 9 o oj o ojojo FRN55G1m 20 Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at a surrounding temperature of 40 C vii Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued ACAUTION Recommended wire size Main terminal MCCB or Main power RCD ELCB 1 input 2 Rated current L1 R L2 S L3 T Inverter s grounding BG W W o DCR DCR Inverter type HD LD mode U V W DC reactor P1 P 2 P DB 2 Control circuit supply RO TO Aux fan power supply R1 T1 Power supply voltage Nominal applied motor
18. 71 This output signal comes ON when the deviation of the detected speed from the speed command output of acceleration deceleration processor is within the allowable range specified by d21 It goes OFF when the deviation is outside the range for longer than the period specified by d22 This feature allows you to check whether the speed controller externally installed is working correctly Refer to the descriptions of d21 and d22 m PG error detected PG ERR Function code data 76 This output signal comes ON when the inverter detects a PG error with the d23 PG error processing data being set to 0 Continue to run in which the inverter does not enter the alarm state Refer to the descriptions of d21 through d23 m Positioning completion signal PSET Function code data 82 This output signal comes ON when the inverter has been servo locked so that the motor is held within the positioning completion range specified by J99 Servo lock Completion width for the period specified by J98 Servo lock Completion timer Refer to the descriptions of J97 to J99 Maintenance timer MNT Function code data 84 Once the inverter s cumulative run time or the startup times for the motor 1 exceeds the previously specified count this output signal comes ON Refer to the descriptions of H78 and H79 m Light alarm L ALM Function code data 98 This output signal comes ON when a light alarm occurs Refer to the descri
19. Do not connect terminal CM of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC Digital input Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions K Programmable ogam rable n i logic controller lt Control circuit gt iaria lt Control circuit gt PLC PLC 1 SOURCE SOURCE X1 tol X7 X1 tol X7 FWD REV Photocoupler A FWD REV Photocoupler CM CM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 15 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC CH For details about the slide switch setting refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches K Note m For inputting a pulse train through the digital input terminal X7 Inputting from a pulse generator with an open collector transistor output Stray capacity on the wiring between the pulse generator and the inverter may disable transmission of the pulse train As a countermeasure against this problem insert a pull up resistor between the open collector output signal terminal X7 and the power source terminal terminal PLC if the switch selects the SINK mode input insert a pull down resistor between the output signal and the digital common terminal terminal CM if the switch selects the SOURCE mode input A recommended pull up down resistor
20. Gip g y by m Run reverse REV Function code data 99 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop Gip This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 E20 to E23 Terminal Y1 to Y4 Function E24 E27 Terminal Y5A C and 30A B C Function Relay output E20 through E23 E24 and E27 assign output signals listed on the next page to general purpose programmable output terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5A C and 30A B C These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as active The factory default settings are Active ON Terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 and Y4 are transistor outputs and terminals Y5A C and 30A B C are relay contact outputs In normal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be energized so that 30A and 30C will be closed and 30B and 30C opened In negative logic the relay will be deenergized so that 30A and 30C will be opened and 30B and 30C closed This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems note e When a negative logic is employed all output signals are active e g an alarm would be recognized while the inverter is powered OFF To avoid causing system malfunctions by this interlock these signals to keep them ON
21. Phe ae es Initialize motor 3 Data initialization parameters H03 2 H03 3 H03 4 H03 5 If Data 0 1 3 or 4 P01 P03 A15 A17 b15 b17 r15 r17 in Step 1 PO6 to P23 A20 to A37 b20 to b37 r20 to r37 P53 to P56 A53 to A56 b53 tob56 r53 to r56 Function code data to H46 be initialized pn pg If Data 2 in Step 1 function codes listed at the right are also initialized Upon completion of the initialization the HO3 data reverts to 0 factory default If P02 A16 b16 or r16 data is set to a value other than the nominal applied motor rating data initialization with HO3 internally converts the specified value forcibly to the standard nominal applied motor rating e Motor parameters to be initialized are for motors listed below under V f control When the base frequency rated voltage and the number of poles are different from those of the listed motors or when non Fuji motors or non standard motors are used change the rated current data to that printed on the motor nameplate Motor selection V f control data 4poles 220 V 60 Hz 415 V 50 Hz 400 V 50 Hz Data 0 or 4 Fuji standard motors 8 series Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector Bala 2 control 4poles 50 Hz 50 Hz 4poles 220 V 60 Hz 415 V 50 Hz 400 V 50 Hz Data 1 HP rating motors 4poles 230 V 60 Hz 460 V 60 Hz 400 V 50 Hz for the FRN__ _G1 I 4E Data 3 Fuji
22. The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using consumables etc specified in the operation manual or catalog etc The breakdown was caused by a science or technical problem that was not foreseen when making practical application of the product at the time it was purchased or delivered The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used 7 9 The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company s responsibility such as lightning or other disaster 2 Furthermore the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered product alone 3 The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item 1 above and any damages damage to or loss of machinery or equipment or lost profits from the same etc consequent to or resulting from breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be excluded from coverage by this warranty 3 Trouble diagnosis As a rule the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis However at the customer s request this company or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a chargeable basis In this case the customer is asked to assume the burden for charges levied in accordance with this company s fee schedule 2 Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity etc Regardless of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period this com
23. Y5A 0 to 10 VDC Current input for C1 el Y4 frequency setting ZLPTENTC K Y3 4 to 20 mA DC 4 Ter sws 11 ova 624 VDC _0V lt temy PLC Y Enable input 12 EN ie Safety switch oo Sa 4 to20 _ mA DC 0t010_ VDC 4 to20 _ Digital input mADG Run forward command Run reverse command ct T Select multi frequency 0 to 1 step t swe Select multi frequency 0 to 3 step RS 485 COM port 2 Select multi frequency 0 to 7 step t TB Select multi frequency 0 to 15 step t Select ACC DEC time 2 staps f Select ACC DEC time 4 steps t Reset alarm RS 485 COM port 1 RJ 45 connector for keypad DBR Dynamic Braking Resistor DCR DC Reactor i RCD Residual current operated i protective device 4 ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker MC Magnetic Contactor I MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker USB connector 1 9 Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection function in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Install a magnetic contactor MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply apart from the MCCB or RCD ELCB when necessary Connect a surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid ne
24. 0 01 to 600 00s Y Y 10 00 Y Y Y 1_ The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table 5 1 4 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table 5 3 function code P03 5 6 Code E36 Name Frequency Detection 2 Level Data setting range Change when 0 0 to 500 0 Hz lt running Data copying Default setting vl Drive control Vif lt w o PG lt w PG lt Refer to page E37 E38 Current Detection 2 Low Current Detection Level Timer 0 00 Disable Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter rated current lt Y1 Y2 4 lt lt lt 0 01 to 600 00 s 10 00 E40 PID Display Coefficient A 999 to 0 00 to 9990 100 E41 PID Display Coefficient B 999 to 0 00 to 9990 0 00 E42 LED Display Filter 0 0 to 5 0 s 0 5 E43 E44 LED Monitor Item selection Display when stopped lt lt lt lt lt 0 Speed monitor select by E48 3 Output current 4 Output voltage 8 Calculated torque 9 Input power PID command PID feedback amount PID output Load factor Motor output Analog input Torque current Magnetic flux command _Input watt hour lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 0 Specified value 1 O
25. 0 to 10 VDC to terminal V2 requires setting function code C45 to 0 a D 2 c lt Analog Common for analog input output signals 13 12 C1 V2 FM1 and FM2 common Isolated from terminals CM and CMY Since low level analog signals are handled these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 20 m and use shielded wires In principle ground the shielded sheath of wires if effects of external inductive noises are considerable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 2 11 be sure to ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shield effect Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal the external device may malfunction due to electric noise generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or equivalent to the device outputting the analog signal or connect a capacitor having the good cut off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in Figure 2 12 Do not apply a voltage of 7 5 VDC or higher to terminal C1 Doing so could damage the internal control circuit a a Table 2 7 Symbols
26. 10 to 50 C Control Control method V f control Dynamic torque vector control Vector control without speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor with an optional PG interface card mounted V f characteristics e Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and at maximum frequency AVR control ON OFF selectable Non linear V f pattern with three arbitrary points Torque boost Auto torque boost for constant torque load Manual torque boost Desired torque boost 0 0 to 20 0 can be set Select application load with function code F37 Variable torque load or constant torque load Starting torque 22 kW or below 200 or over 30 KW or above 180 or over Reference frequency 0 3 Hz with slip compensation and auto torque boost Start stop operation Keypad ee and 9 keys external signals run forward run reverse command etc Communications link RS 485 fieldbus option e Remote local operation 8 5 Control Item Explanation Enable input Opening the circuit between terminals EN and PLC stops the inverter s output transistor Safety stop function coast to stop Compliant with EN954 1 Cat 3 Frequency command Keypad N and Q keys e Analog input Analog input can be set with external voltage current input 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 terminals 12 V2 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 terminal C1 UP DOWN operation Multi frequency 16 st
27. Aux control power Inverter outputs 2 Braking resistor FRNO 4G1 40 FRNO 75G1 40 FRN1 5G1 40 FRN2 2G1m 40 FRN3 7G1 4A FRN4 0G1 4E FRNS 5G1 40 FRN7 5G1 40 FRN11G1 40 FRN15G1 40 FRN18 5G1 40 Three phase 400 V FRN22G1 40 FRN30G1 40 FRN37G1 40 FRN45G1 40 FRNS55G1 40 FRN75G1 40 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1 4E Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at a surrounding temperature of 40 C viii Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada UL cUL listed inverters are subject to the regulations set forth by the UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada by installation within precautions listed below ACAUTION Solid state motor overload protection motor protection by electronic thermal overload relay is
28. Base frequency 1 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series 0 Motor characteristics 0 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 8 series Fuji standard motors 6 series Motor 1 selection Motor 1 Rated capacity Capacity of motor connected Nominal applied motor capacity x 200 V cl jes 200 V cl ies Machinery design values o9 60 0 Hz OO class series Maximum fri ncy 1 ea f anmi equency Note For a test driving of the motor 400 V class series 400 V class series increase values so that they are 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz Acceleration time 1 longer than your machinery design Note values If the specified time is short 6 00 8 Deceleration time 1 the inverter may not run the motor Note properly 6 00 s After the above configuration initialize motor 1 with the function code H03 2 It automatically updates the motor parameters P01 P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 Note When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically updates the data of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 The motor rating should be specified properly when performing auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving torque limiting automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector control droop contr
29. Be sure to observe those precautions E Installation environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2 1 in Chapter 2 Fuji Electric strongly recommends installing inverters in a panel for safety reasons in particular when installing the ones whose enclosure rating is IPOO When installing the inverter in a place out of the specified environmental requirements it is necessary to derate the inverter or consider the panel engineering suitable for the special environment or the panel installation location For details refer to the Fuji Electric technical information Engineering Design of Panels or consult your Fuji Electric representative The special environments listed below require using the specially designed panel or considering the panel installation location Environments Possible problems Sample measures Applications Highly concentrated sulfidizing gas or other corrosive gases A lot of conductive dust or foreign material e g metal powders or shavings carbon fibers or carbon dust Corrosive gases cause parts inside the inverter to corrode resulting in an inverter malfunction Entry of conductive dust into the inverter causes a short circuit Any of the following measures may be necessary Mount the inverter in a sealed panel with IP6X or air purge mechanism Place the panel in a room free from influence of the gases Any of the foll
30. Calibrating the FM output Calibrate the full scale of the analog meter connected to the terminals FM1 and FM2 using the reference voltage equivalent to 10 VDC To output the reference voltage it is necessary to select the analog output test with the function code F31 F35 14 Clearing the alarm history Clear the alarm history saved during the system setup with the function code H97 1 Depending upon the situation of the practical operation it may become necessary to modify the settings of the torque boost F09 acceleration deceleration times F07 F08 and the PI controller for speed control under the vector control Confirm the function code data and modify them properly 4 2 Special Operations 4 2 1 Jogging operation This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor 1 Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below The LED monitor should display og e Switch the inverter to Running mode see page 3 3 e Press the o keys simultaneously The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for approximately one second and then returns to og again Tip Function code C20 specifies the jogging frequency H54 and H55 specify the acceleration and deceleration times respectively These three function codes are exclusive to jogging operation e Using the input terminal command Ready for jogging JOG switches between the normal operation state and ready to jog state e Switching between the normal o
31. Control process Operation mode Features voltage control frequency to lower the DC link bus voltage if the voltage exceeds the deceleration Disabled during running at the constant speed Torque limit Controls the output Enabled during Quick response control frequency to keep the acceleration running at Causes less overvoltage braking torque at approx the constant speed and trips even with a heavy 0 deceleration impact load DC link bus Control the output Enabled during Shorter deceleration time by making good use of the inverter s regenerative capability limiting level Since increasing the output frequency too much in the torque limit control mode is dangerous the inverter has a torque limiter Frequency increment limit for braking that can be specified by H76 The torque limiter imits the inverter s output frequency to less than Reference frequency H76 setting Note that the torque limiter activated restrains the anti regenerative control resulting in a trip with an overvoltage alarm in some cases Increasing the H76 data 0 0 to 400 0 Hz makes the anti regenerative control capability high In addition during deceleration triggered by turning the run command OFF the anti regenerative control increases the output frequency so that the inverter may not stop the load depending on the load state huge moment of inertia for example To avoid that H69 provides a choice of cancellation of
32. Cumulative run time of motor 1 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of motor 1 Counter range 0 to 99 990 hours Display range Oto 9999 The x10 LED turns ON Actual cumulative motor run time hours Displayed value x 10 When the count exceeds 99 990 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again Temperature inside the inverter real time value Shows the current temperature inside the inverter Unit C Temperature of heat sink real time value Shows the current temperature of the heat sink inside the inverter Unit C Lifetime of DC link bus capacitor elapsed hours Shows the cumulative time during which a voltage is applied to the DC link bus capacitor When the main power is shut down the inverter automatically measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and corrects the elapsed time The display method is the same as for 5 06 above Lifetime of DC link bus capacitor remaining hours Shows the remaining lifetime of the DC link bus capacitor which is estimated by subtracting the elapsed time from the lifetime 10 years The display method is the same as for 5 06 above Cumulative run time of motor 2 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of motor 2 The display method is the same as for 5 23 above Cumulative run time of motor 3 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of motor 3
33. E01 through E07 or the overload early warning E34 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated In winter the load tends to increase gt Lower the temperature around the motor gt Increase the motor sound Carrier frequency F26 The activation level H27 of the PTC thermistor for motor overheat protection was set inadequately Check the PTC thermistor specifications and recalculate the detection voltage gt Modify the data of function code H27 Settings for the PTC NTC thermistor are improper Check the setting of the thermistor mode selection H26 and the slider position of terminal C1 property switch SW5 gt Change the H26 data in accordance with the thermistor used and set the SW5 to the PTC NTC position Excessive torque boost specified F09 Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 does not stall the motor gt If no stall occurs decrease the F09 data The V f pattern did not match the motor Check if the base frequency F04 and the rated voltage at base frequency F05 match the values on the motor s nameplate gt Match the function code data with the values on the motor s nameplate Incorrect setting of function code data Although no PTC NTC thermistor is used the thermistor mode is enabled H26 gt Set the H26 data to 0 Disable 11 dbh Braking resistor overheated Problem The electronic thermal protection for
34. F16 F15 gt F23 and F15 gt F25 F03 gt F16 where F23 and F25 specify the starting and stop frequencies respectively If you specify any wrong data for these function codes the inverter may not run the motor at the desired speed or cannot start it normally F18 Bias Frequency command 1 C50 Bias for Frequency 1 Bias base point C32 C34 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Gain Gain base point C37 C39 Analog Input Adjustment C1 Gain Gain base point C42 C44 Analog Input Adjustment V2 Gain Gain base point C35 C45 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 and V2 Polarity When any analog input for frequency command 1 F01 is used it is possible to define the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and adding the bias specified by F18 Terminals 12 and V2 can be used for bipolar input 10 V to 10 V by polarity setting Gain and bias for frequency command 1 Bias Bias base point Gain Gain base point Polarity Terminal Bi 100 00 to 0 Bipolar 100 00 0 00 to 200 00 0 00 to 200 00 0 00 to 100 00 1 Unipolar 12 C32 C34 C35 C1 F18 C50 C37 C39 v2 C42 C44 C45 Reference frequency Gain C32 C37 or C42 Bias F18 Point A i Analog input 0 Bias Gain 100 base base point point C50 C34 C39 or C44 E In the case of unipolar input terminal 12 with C35 1 terminal C1 terminal V2 with C4
35. FRN75G1 40 3 pcs each for upper and lower sides 3 pcs for upper side FRN30G1 20 FRN37G1 20 Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 Remove all of the base fixing screws from the top and bottom of the inverter Also remove the case fixing screws from the top On the bottom are no case fixing screws 2 Move the top mounting base to the center of the inverter and secure it with the base fixing screws 2 or 3 pcs using case fixing screw holes After the movement of the top mounting base 5 or 3 screws are left unused 3 Move the bottom mounting base to the center of the inverter and secure it with the base fixing screws Base fixing screws M Case fixing screws es 3 M6 x Base fixing screws Figure 2 3 Changing the Positions of the Top and Bottom Mounting Bases ACAUTION When changing the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases use only the specified screws Otherwise a fire or accident could occur 2 3 Wiring Follow the procedure below In the following description the inverter has already been installed 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide 1 For inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below First loosen the front cover fixing screw slide the cover downward holding its both sides tilt it toward you and t
36. For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered 2 cooling fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection when F10 1 The characteristic factors 1 through 3 as well as their corresponding switching frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor The tables below list the factors of the motor selected by P99 Motor 1 Selection Actual Output Current Continuous Overload Detection Level F11 4 100 a3 pote lik a 2L b Base frequency ai ven if the specified Output frequency fo Hz 0 f2 fs fo Cooling Characteristics of Motor with Shaft driven Cooling Fan Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 selection 0 or 4 Output frequency for for setting the motor characteristic thermal time factor constant Imax f2 aS Nominal Reference current applied motor kW 18 5 22 30 to 45 55 to 90 110 or above 4 0 kW for the EU Characteristic factor Thermal time constant t Factory default 6 Hz 7 Hz 5 Hz Allowable continuous current x 150 Base frequency x 83 Base frequency x 33
37. Ol 1 to O14 Overload of motor 1 through 4 Chapter 6 page 6 17 er4 Option communications error Chapter 6 page 6 20 ers Option error Chapter 6 page 6 20 erg RS 485 gornimunications error COM port 1 Chapter 6 page 6 21 erp RS 485 communications error COM port 2 ere Speed mismatch or excessive speed deviation Chapter 6 page 6 22 fal DC fan locked Function code H98 bit 5 ol Motor overload early warning Function code E20 data 7 Oh Heat sink overheat early warning Function code E20 data 28 lif Lifetime alarm Function code E20 data 30 ref Reference command loss detected Function code E20 data 33 pid PID alarm Function code E20 data 42 ull Low torque output Function code E20 data 45 pic PTC thermistor activated Function code E20 data 56 Function code E20 data 84 Function code H78 Function code E20 data 84 Function code H79 rile Inverter life Cumulative motor run time cnT Inverter life Number of startups Set data for selecting light alarm s in hexadecimal For details on how to select the codes refer to the next page Data setting range 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal E Selecting light alarm factors To set and display the light alarm factors in hexadecimal format each light alarm factor has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Tables 5 4 and 5 5 Set the bit that corresponds to the desired light alarm factor to 1 Table 5 6 shows the relationship between each of the light alarm
38. PCB RJ 45 RS 485 1 Used to connect the inverter with the keypad The inverter supplies the power to the connector communi keypad through the pins specified below The extension cable for remote operation for the cations also uses wires connected to these pins for supplying the keypad power keypad port 1 2 Remove the keypad from the standard RJ 45 connector and connect the RS 485 Standard communications cable to control the inverter through the PC or PLC RJ 45 Programmable Logic Controller For setting of the terminating resistor refer to connector Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches 4 5V GND Terminating RJ 45 connector resistor face SW3 RJ 45 connector pin assignment Figure 2 18 RJ 45 Connector and its Pin Assignment Communication Pins 1 2 7 and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for the remote keypad and multi function keypad so do not use those pins for any other equipment USB USB port A USB port connector Mini B that connects an inverter to a personal computer connec On the FRENIC Loader software running on the computer supports editing the function tor keypad codes transferring them to the inverter verifying them test running an inverter and monitoring the inverter running status FRENIC Loader is available as a free download from our website at http web1 fujielectric co jp Kiki Info EN User guestlogin asp Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems C
39. Shows the maximum current in RMS for every hour Unit A amperes Capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor in based on the capacitance when shipping as 100 Refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details Unit Cumulative run time of electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards which is calculated by multiplying the cumulative run time count by the coefficient based on the surrounding temperature condition Counter range 0 to 99 990 hours Display range 0 to 9999 The x10 LED turns ON Actual cumulative run time of electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards hours Displayed value x 10 When the count exceeds 99 990 the counter stops and the LED monitor sticks to 9999 Cumulative run time of the cooling fan Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling fan This counter does not work when the cooling fan ON OFF control function code H06 is enabled and the fan stops The display method is the same as for 5 06 above Number of startups Shows the content of the motor 1 startup counter i e the number of run commands issued Counter range 0 to 65 530 times Display range 0 to 9999 If the count exceeds 10 000 the x10 LED turns ON and the LED moni
40. a fire could occur Magnetic contactor MC in the inverter input primary circuit Avoid frequent ON OFF operation of the magnetic contactor MC in the input circuit otherwise the inverter failure may result If frequent start stop of the motor is required use FWD REV terminal signals or the keys on the inverter s keypad The frequency of the MC s ON OFF should not be more than once per 30 minutes To assure 10 year or longer service life of the inverter it should not be more than once per hour From the system s safety point of view it is recommended to employ such a sequence that Cip shuts down the magnetic contactor MC in the inverter input circuit with an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter s programmable output terminals The sequence minimizes the secondary damage even if the inverter breaks When the sequence is employed connecting the MC s primary power line to the inverter s auxiliary control power input makes it possible to monitor the inverter s alarm status on the keypad The breakdown of a braking unit or misconnection of an external braking resistor may trigger that of the inverter s internal parts e g charging resistor To avoid such a breakdown linkage introduce an MC and configure a sequence that shuts down the MC if a DC link voltage establishment signal is not issued within three seconds after the MC is switched on For the braking transistor built in type of inverters assign a transistor
41. and Braking time H DC Braking Braking response mode F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during decelerate to stop operation If the motor enters a decelerate to stop operation by turning OFF the run command or by decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency the inverter activates the DC braking by flowing a current at the braking level F21 during the braking time F22 when the output frequency goes down to the DC braking starting frequency F20 Setting the braking time to 0 0 F22 0 disables the DC braking E Braking starting frequency F20 F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor decelerate to stop state E Braking level F21 F21 specifies the output current level to be applied when the DC braking is activated The function code data should be set assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100 in increments of 1 E Braking time F22 F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking E Braking response mode H95 H95 specifies the DC braking response mode at the start of DC braking Data for H95 Characteristics Note Slow response Slows the rising edge of the Insufficient braking torque may result at the 0 current thereby preventing reverse rotation start of DC braking Quick response Quickens the rising edge of the current thereby accelerating the build up o
42. depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table 5 3 8 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See the table under ll Non linear V f Patterns 1 2 and 3 for Voltage in the description of F04 5 11 Drive 5 control D gt 22 we i a Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range Se we a g rang 2s a S setting v Wo w Page 5 PG PG H64 Low Limiter 0 0 Depends on F16 Frequency limiter Low Y Y 1 6 Y NIN Lower limiting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz H65 Non linear V f Pattern 3 Frequency 0 0 Cancel 0 1 to 500 0 Hz N Y 0 0 Y NIN 5 28 H66 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage N ye 0 Y N N 5 28 for 200 V class series 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H67 Auto Energy Saving Operation 0 Enable during running at constant speed ve ae 0 Y N Y Mode selection 1 Enable in all modes H68 Slip Compensation 1 0 Enable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or N Y 0 Y N N 5 48 Operating conditions above 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above 2 Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above 3 Disable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above H69 Automatic Deceleration 0 Disable Y Y 0 Y Y Y 574 Mode selection 2 Torque limit control with Force to stop if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the specified
43. frequency setting 0 to 10 VDC Power switching connector CN UX 10 Fan power supply switching connector CN RY CN W 10 1S G10 VDC OV 0 to 10 VDC Voltage input for frequency setting 0 to 10 VDC Current input for frequency setting 4 to 20 mA DC Enable input 12 Safety switch Digital input Y5C _Y5A Y4 PTC NTC SRA sws tt Aye ty 24 VDC _oV_ CMY PLC en i 0to10_ VDC 4to 20 7 mADC 0to10_ VDC 4to20 mA DC Run forward command Run reverse command Digital input common terminal Main circuit Motor Control circuit 8 Contact outputs 9 Alarm output for any alarm l l i i l AX terminal J function Transistor outputs 9 Motor overload early warning i Frequency speed detected Frequency speed arrival Inverter running Common terminal Analog frequency meter Analog frequency meter Pat Data transmission Select multi frequency 0 to 1 step Select multi frequency 0 to 3 step Select multi frequency 0 to 7 step RS 485 COM port 2 TB Select multi frequency 0 to 15 step Select ACC DEC time 2 staps f Select ACC DEC time 4 steps Reset alarm f Digital input common terminal DBR Dynamic Brakin
44. greng 2s a S setting vit Wo w page amp PG PG A18 Motor 2 Auto tuning 0 Disable N N 0 YTY Y 1 Tune while the motor stops R1 X and rated slip frequency 2 Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c 3 Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Available when the vector control is enabled A20 No load current 0 00 to 2000 A N YAYAN 7 YYY _ A21 R1 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y1Y2 7 YI YY _ A22 X 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y1Y2 7 ES A23 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 Ne Y 100 0 Y Y Y _ A24 Slip compensation response time 0 01 to 10 00s Y Y1Y2 0 12 Y NIN A25 Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 ye Y 100 0 Y JYJ Y A26 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 Hz N 1Y2 7 gt al i Ad Bn i A27 Iron loss factor 1 0 00 to 20 00 AINAN IA Y WY A28 Iron loss factor 2 0 00 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 000 Y YJ Y A29 Iron loss factor 3 0 00 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 000 Y YJ Y A30 Magnetic saturation factor 1 0 0 to 300 0 Ne NAY ZN O87 YI YY A31 Magnetic saturation factor 2 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y 1Y2 7 YI YY A32 Magnetic saturation factor
45. o 2 0 75 to 10 kHz HD mode 75 kW LD mode 22 to 55 kW e 0 75 to 6 kHz HD mode LD mode 75 kW Note The carrier frequency may automatically drop depending upon the surrounding temperature or output current to protect the inverter The automatic drop function can be disabled Accuracy Stability Analog setting 0 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C Keypad setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at 10 to 50 C Setting resolution Analog setting 1 3000 of maximum frequency 1 1500 for V2 input Keypad setting 0 01 Hz 99 99 Hz or less 0 1 Hz 100 0 to 500 0 Hz Link operation setting Selectable from the following two types 1 20000 of maximum frequency 0 01 Hz fixed Speed control range under vector control without speed sensor Speed control accuracy under vector control without speed sensor e 1 200 Minimum speed Base speed 4P 7 5 to 1500 r min 172 Constant torque range Constant output range e Analog setting 0 5 of base speed at 25 10 C Digital setting 0 5 of base speed at 10 to 50 C Speed control range under vector control with speed sensor e 1 1500 Minimum speed Base speed 4P 1 to 1500 r min 1024 p r 1 4 Constant torque range Constant output range Speed control accuracy under vector control with speed sensor e Analog setting 0 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C Digital setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at
46. or less of the rated current When a high carrier frequency is specified the temperature of the inverter may rise due to a surrounding temperature rise or an increase of the load If it happens the inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter overload alarm 0 u With consideration for motor noise the automatic reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled Refer to the description of H98 F29 to F31 F32 F34 Analog Output FM1 and FM2 Mode selection Voltage adjustment Function F35 These function codes allow terminals FM1 and FM2 to output monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current in an analog DC voltage or current The magnitude of such analog voltage or current is adjustable m Mode selection F29 and F32 F29 and F32 specify the property of the output to terminals FM1 and FM2 respectively You need to set the slide switches on the control printed circuit board control PCB Refer to Chapter 2 Mounting and Wiring of the Inverter Terminal FM1 Terminal FM2 Position of slide Position of slide Data for F29 switch SW4 on Data for F32 switch SW6 on Output form the control PCB the control PCB Voltage 0 to 10 VDC 0 vo1 0 vo2 Current 4 to 20 mA DC 1 101 1 102 Note The output current is not isolated from analog input and does not have an isolated power supply S Therefore if an electrical potential relationshi
47. under vector control No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c P16 to P23 X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 Tuning the R1 X and rated slip frequency with the motor being stopped Tuning the no load current and magnetic saturation factor with the motor running at 50 of the base frequency twice Can rotate the motor provided that it is safe Note that little load should be applied during tuning Tuning with load applied decreases the tuning accuracy Y Tuning available unconditionally Y Tuning available conditionally N Tuning not available The tuning results of motor parameters will be automatically saved into their respective function codes If P04 tuning is performed for instance the tuning results will be saved into P codes Motor 1 parameters 2 Preparation of machinery Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling from the motor and deactivating the safety devices 4 10 3 Tuning Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control Set function code P04 to 3 and press the key The blinking of 3 on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command The factory default is key on the keypad for forward rotation To switc
48. 0 Y Y Y b24 Slip compensation response time 0 01 to 10 00 s Y Y1Y2 0 12 Y NIN b25 Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 Me Yy 100 0 Y Y Y _ b26 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 Hz N Y 1Y2 7 Y Y Y b27 Iron loss factor 1 0 00 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 7 YI YY b28 Iron loss factor 2 0 00 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 0 00 Y Y Y b29 Iron loss factor 3 0 00 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 000 Y Y Y aq The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table 5 1 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table 5 2 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table 5 3 function code P03 5 0 min for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 10 0 min for those with 30 kW or above The motor constant is automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table 5 3 5 15 Drive 5 control 22 of Defaut Ref Cod N Data setti oz a gt Default efer to ode jame ata setting range 25 a z setting yr wo w Page 5 PG PG b30 Motor 3 0 0 to 300 0 KUTYA 7 Me NO TON _ Magnetic saturation factor 1 b31 Magnetic saturation factor 2 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y 1Y2 7 FE Y b32 Magnetic saturation factor 3 0
49. 0 to 100 HD mode 0 to 80 LD mode Y Y 0 bAT tie all fea r11 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s Y Y 0 00 YTY Y 2 Starting Frequency 4 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Y Y 0 5 FEY r13 Load Selection 0 Variable torque load N y 1 YINJ Y Auto Torque Boost 1 Constant torque load Auto Energy Saving Operation 4 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC 4 Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC 5 Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC r14 Drive Control Selection 4 0 V f control with slip compensation inactive N Y 0 YY Y 1 Dynamic torque vector control 2 V f control with slip compensation active 5 Vector control without speed sensor 6 Vector control with speed sensor r15 Motor 4 No of poles 2 to 22 poles N Y1Y2 4 Y YY r16 Rated capacity 0 01 to 1000 kW when r39 0 2 3 or 4 N Y 1Y2 7 YYY 0 01 to 1000 HP when r39 1 r17 Rated current 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1 Y2 7 Y 1Y Y r18 Auto tuning 0 Disable N N 0 Y YY 1 Tune while the motor stops R1 X and rated slip frequency 2 Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c 3 Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic
50. 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 WE e b33 Magnetic saturation factor 4 0 0 to 300 0 Y Yr Y2 7 ba ii cae O i _ b34 Magnetic saturation factor 5 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 ME OYE Y b35 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y 1Y2 7 Y YY factor a b36 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 Y FYNY z5 factor b b37 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 Y YY factor c b39 Motor 3 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series N Y1 Y2 0 YJIYJ Y 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 2 Motor characteristics 2 Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 _Other motors b40 Slip Compensation 3 0 Enable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or N Y 0 Y NIN Operating conditions above 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above 2 Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above 3 Disable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above b41 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 Li Y 0 20 Y N IN Gain for Motor 3 b42 Motor Parameter Switching 3 0 Motor Switch to the 3rd motor N Ne 0 VV NET 5 81 Mode selection 1 Parameter Switch to particular b codes b43 Speed Control 3 Speed command filter 0 000 to 5 000 s Y Y 0 020 N Y Y _ b44 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Ve Y 0 005 N Y Y b45 P
51. 000 to 5 000 s Y Y 0 020 N YJ Y r44 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s y Y 0 005 N YJ Y r45 P Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times ys Y 10 0 N Y Y r46 Integral time 0 001 to 1 000 s Y Y 0 100 N Y Y r48 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Yy Y o020 N YJ Y _ r51 Cumulative Motor Run Time 4 0 to 9999 The cumulative run time can be modified or reset N YIYIY in units of 10 hours r52 Startup Counter for Motor 4 Indication of cumulative startup count ae N a en Gl Bi A 0000 to FFFF hex 153 Motor 4 X correction factor 1 0 to 300 Y Y1Y2 100 Y Y Y _ r54 X correction factor 2 0 to 300 Y Y1Y2 100 Y YY r55 Torque current under vector control 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 N YJ Y r56 Induced voltage factor under 50 to 100 N Y1Y2 85 NIY Y vector control r57 Reserved 9 0 000 to 20 000 s N Y1 Y2 0 082 J codes Application Functions 1 Drive 5 control HER Defaut Refi Code Name Data setting range gE w gt Default efer to ovang es a setting vir W o w Page 5 PG PG J01 PID Control Mode selection 0 Disable N Y 0 e e 1 Enable Process control normal operation 2 Enable Process control inverse operation 3 Enable Dancer control J02 Remote command SV 0 keys on keypad N NY 0 Y Y Y 1 PID process command 1 Analog input terminals 12 C1 and V2 3 UP DOWN 4 Command via communications link J03 P Gain 0 000 to 30 000 ti
52. 1 Enable If any problem occurs in use of the equipment or machine is expected when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip H12 0 and actuate a mechanical brake at the same time e Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software it may cause a Cote delay in control If you need a quick response current limiting also enable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12 If an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set extremely low the inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency This may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting Depending on the load extremely short acceleration time may activate the current limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency causing the system oscillation hunting or activating the inverter overvoltage trip alarm Ou When specifying the acceleration time therefore you need to take into account machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concurrently they may conflict each other and cause hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters F50 to F52 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor Discharging capability Allowable av
53. 3 0 0 to 300 0 Me YAY 2 47 YO YO A33 Magnetic saturation factor 4 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 YYY A34 Magnetic saturation factor 5 0 0 to 300 0 Mei YALN2 47 YI YY _ A35 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 Y Y Y factor a A36 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 Y Y Y _ factor b A37 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 i a E i R i factor c A39 Motor 2 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series N Y1 Y2 0 YI YY 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 2 Motor characteristics 2 Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors A40 Slip Compensation 2 0 Enable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or N Y 0 Y NIN Operating conditions above 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above 2 Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above 3 Disable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above A41 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 Y Y 0 20 Y NIN Gain for Motor 2 A42 Motor Parameter Switching 2 0 Motor Switch to the 2nd motor N Y 0 Y Y YJ 581 Mode selection 1 Parameter Switch to particular A codes A43 Speed Control 2 Speed command filter 0 000 to 5 000 s Y Y 0 020 N Y Y A44 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s b gs Y 0 005 N YJ Y A45 P Gain
54. 3 Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC 4 Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC 5 Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC b14 Drive Control Selection 3 V f control with slip compensation inactive N Y 0 YY Y Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active Vector control without speed sensor 6 Vector control with speed sensor b15 Motor 3 No of poles 2 to 22 poles N Y1Y2 4 XTY Y b16 Rated capacity 0 01 to 1000 kW when b39 0 2 3 or 4 N Y 1Y2 7 YI YY 0 01 to 1000 HP when b39 1 b17 Rated current 0 00 to 2000 A N YTY2 7 YINYIN Y b18 Auto tuning 0 Disable N N 0 YTY Y 1 Tune while the motor stops R1 X and rated slip frequency 2 Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c 3 Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Available when the vector control is enabled b20 No load current 0 00 to 2000 A N lyiy2 7 Tylyfy b21 R1 0 00 to 50 00 YTA 7 Woe NSN b22 X 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y1Y2 7 YI YY b23 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 x Yy 100
55. 4A 2 0 2 0 4 0 5 FRN4 0G1m 4E 2 0 ae 5 5 HD FRNS 5G1 40 LD 7 5 HD FRN7 5G1 40 LD 11 3 5 3 5 3 5 HD FRN11G1 40 LD 3 5 gt 15 3 5 5 5 S HD FRN15G1 400 D 5 5 2 18 5 8 0 6 55 lt HD 2 0 os FRN18 5G1 40 5 5 5 5 LD 6 6 2 22 8 0 8 0 E HD 14 FRN22G1 40 LD 30 14 HD FRN30G1 8 400 14 14 LD 22 37 8 0 HD FRN37G1 400 iD 22 45 22 HD FRN45G1m 40 iD 22 38 55 38 38 HD FRN55G1m 40 LD 14 75 38 60 HD z 60 FRN75G1m 40 90 LD 60 100 5 4 0 KW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1 4E 6 Use the crimp terminal model No 8 L6 manufactured by JST Mfg Co Ltd or equivalent Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 2 7 2 3 4 Wiring precautions Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter 1 Make sure that the source voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate 2 Be sure to connect the three phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T of the inverter If the power wires are connected to other terminals the inverter will be damaged when the power is turned ON 3 Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock fire or other disasters and to reduce electric noise 4 Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure a reliable
56. AVR controlled voltage N Y2 8 Y N 5 28 for 200 V class series 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H52 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency 0 0 Cancel 0 1 to 500 0 Hz N Y 0 0 Y N N 5 28 H53 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage N Y2 0 Y N N j 5 28 for 200 V class series 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H54 Acceleration Time 0 00 to 6000 s Ys Y 2 YO Ney Jogging H55 Deceleration Time 0 00 to 6000 s Y Y 2 Y Y Y Jogging H56 Deceleration Time for Forced Stop 0 00 to 6000 s Y Y 2 Y Y Y H57 1st S curve acceleration range 0 to 100 Y Y 10 YY Y Leading edge H58 2nd S curve acceleration range 0 to 100 Y Ye 10 mad De Sl a Trailing edge H59 1st S curve deceleration range 0 to 100 Y Y 10 TNE AY Leading edge H60 2nd S curve deceleration range 0 to 100 Y Y 10 FN Y Trailing edge H61 UP DOWN Control 0 0 00 Hz N Y 1 YO ONS TAY Initial frequency setting 1 Last UP DOWN command value on releasing the run command H63 Low Limiter Mode selection 0 Limit by F16 Frequency limiter Low and continue to Y Y 0 or a Bs aa fae 4 5 40 run 1 If the output frequency lowers below the one limited by F16 Frequency limiter Low decelerate to stop the motor 2 6 00 s for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 20 00 s for those with 30 kW or above 7 The motor constant is automatically set
57. C Tip detects the idling motor speed and runs the idling motor without stopping it Refer to the description of H09 and d67 Restart V t control Vector control without speed Data mode after sensor Vector control for momentary Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search with speed F14 power Disable Enable Disable Enable sensor failure Hog 0 HO9 1 or 2 d67 0 d67 1 or 2 0 Disable Trip immediately 1 Disable Trip after recovery from power failure 2 Disable Decelerate to stop Continue to run Do not continue to run If failed restart If failed at the output search for 3 Enable frequency idling motor saved during speed and the power restart at the Restart at the failure searched EGNA rocessing speed requency Search for p 9 p saved during idling motor Restart at the Restart at the the previous speed and ea db reference power failure restart at the etected by frequency Search for processing searched the speed 4 Enable saved during idling motor speed sensor the previous speed and power failure restart at the Processing searched Restart at the speed Restart at the 5 Enable starting starting frequency frequency A WARNING If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 3 to 5 the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is restored Design the mach
58. Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions PTC NTC 1 Connects PTC Positive Temperature thermis Coefficient NTC Negative tor input Temperature Coefficient thermistor for motor protection Ensure that the HI Sa pea o eru slide switch SW5 on the control PCB Resistor i is turned to the PTC NTC position 27k f Operation level see Section 2 3 7 Setting up the c1 H27 _ ENN slide switches pae aid External PTCINTC t alarm The figure shown at the right thermistor H26 illustrates the internal circuit diagram n1 ov where SW5 switching the input of PONTE penean ae iT Figure 2 10 Internal Circuit Diagram position For details on SW5 refer to SW5 Selecting PTC NTC Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches In this case you must change data of the function code H26 Analog The frequency is commanded according to the external voltage input setting 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation ae e 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation R In addition to frequency setting PID command PID feedback signal auxiliary frequency command setting ratio setting torque limiter level setting or analog input monitor can be assigned to this terminal Hardware specifications Input impedance 22kQ e The maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage higher than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC Inputting a bipolar analog voltage
59. EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1E 4E 2 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 3 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series 4 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 5 380 to 440 V 50 Hz 380 to 480 V 60 Hz 6 j Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR Voltage unbalance x 67 IEC 61800 3 7 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 8 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 9 A DC reactor DCR is an option However inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Note A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 8 4 8 3 Common Specifications Output frequency Item Explanation Maximum 25 to 500 Hz 120 Hz for inverters in LD mode frequency 120 Hz under vector control without speed sensor 200 Hz under vector control with speed sensor Base frequency 25 to 500 Hz in conjunction with the maximum frequency o D S Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz 0 0 Hz under vector control with without speed sensor 2 Carrier frequency 0 75 to 16 kHz HD mode 0 4 to 55 kW LD mode 5 5 to 18 5 kW Po
60. Excessive torque boost specified What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 decreases the output current but does not stall the motor gt If no stall occurs decrease the torque boost F09 2 Continuous running in extremely slow speed Check the running speed of the inverter gt Change the speed setting or replace the motor with a motor exclusively designed for inverters 3 Overload Measure the inverter output current gt Reduce the load For fans or pumps decrease the frequency limiter value F15 In winter the load tends to increase 9 The motor does not run as expected Possible Causes 1 Incorrect setting of function code data What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that function codes are correctly configured and no unnecessary configuration has been done gt Configure all the function codes correctly Make a note of function code data currently configured and then initialize all function code data using H03 gt After the above process reconfigure function codes one by one checking the running status of the motor 6 9 6 3 2 Problems with inverter se ttings 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor Possible Causes 1 No power neither main power nor auxiliary control power supplied to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance
61. Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times Ne Y 10 0 N Y Y b46 Integral time 0 001 to 1 000 s y Y o10 N YJ Y b48 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y o0020 N YJ Y b51 Cumulative Motor Run Time 3 0 to 9999 The cumulative run time can be modified or reset N N s YIY Y _ in units of 10 hours b52 Startup Counter for Motor 3 Indication of cumulative startup count Y N lt Y YY _ 0000 to FFFF hex b53 Motor 3 X correction factor 1 0 to 300 F FYTS 100 Y YY b54 X correction factor 2 0 to 300 YIT 100 EI EA Y _ b55 Torque current under vector control 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 NIY Y b56 Induced voltage factor under 50 to 100 N Y1Y2 85 NX Y _ vector control b57 Reserved 9 0 000 to 20 000 s N Y1 Y2 0 082 x r codes Motor 4 Parameters Drive 5 control S21 gf Code Name Data setting range ge w Default Refer to 55 9 8 setting vit w o w page 5 PG PG r01 Maximum Frequency 4 25 0 to 500 0 Hz N T M YIY Y r02 Base Frequency 4 25 0 to 500 0 Hz N Y 50 0 Y Y Y _ r03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 4 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage N Y2 Fry Y 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series r04 Maximum Output Voltage 4 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage N Y2 izi Y YI N for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series
62. In winter the load tends to increase gt Decrease the motor sound Carrier frequency F26 gt Enable overload prevention control H70 Ventilation paths are blocked Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink Possible Causes 6 Cooling fan s airflow volume decreased due to the service life expired or failure What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan The wires to the motor are too long causing a large leakage current from them 16 05 Overspeed Measure the leakage current gt Insert an output circuit filter OFL Problem The motor rotates in an excessive speed Motor speed gt F03 data x d32 data d33 data x 1 2 Possible Causes 1 Incorrect setting of function code data What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the motor parameter Number of poles P01 gt Specify the P01 data in accordance with the motor to be used Check the maximum frequency setting F03 gt Specify the F03 data in accordance with the output frequency Check the setti
63. L2 S L3 T U V W Inverter type Power supply voltage HD LD mode Control circuit Remarks Remarks Nominal applied motor Aux Control Power Supply Aux Fan Power Supply FRNO 4G1m 20 FRNO 75G1 20 FRN1 5G1 20 FRN2 2G1 20 FRN3 7G1 20 is FRN5 5G1m 20 iw FRN7 5G1 20 FRN11G1 20 Cf ez ee FRN15G1 20 FRN18 5G1 20 ojojoj o ojojoj o FRN22G1 20 RC ee pe CE iw Three phase 200 V 25 is FRN30G1 20 iw is FRN37G1 20 FRN45G1 20 Ff Llc e A A o is iw FRN55G1m 20 Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 No terminal end treatment is required for connection 2 Use 75 C Cu wire only xi Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ACAUTION z Required torque o v Ib in N m gt 6 lt N 5 E v o n 28 3 3 e2 gt 3 E o r 2 Inverter type g D S s yp g 2 g Main terminal AY Control Aux Fan Power 5 g 8 S Power Supply Supply E amp
64. OFF current 0 to 300 Y Y 100 Y Y Y J69 Brake OFF frequency speed 0 0 to 25 0 Hz Y w 1 0 YIYTY J70 Brake OFF timer 0 0 to 5 0 s Y NY 1 0 b cal fan od Dae J71 Brake ON frequency speed 0 0 to 25 0 Hz Y h 10 0 YAY Y J72 Brake ON timer 0 0 to 5 0 s Y Yi 1 0 YIYJ Y J95 Brake OFF torque 0 to 300 Y Y 100 Y Y Y J96 Speed selection 0 Detected speed 1 Commanded speed Y Y 0 Yor Yat Y J97 Servo lock Gain 0 00 to 10 00 Y y oio NJINJ Y J98 Completion timer 0 000 to 1 000 s Y Y 0 100 N N Y J99 Completion width 0 to 9999 Ne Y 10 NINTY d codes Application Functions 2 Drive 5 control S2l gf Code Name Data setting range ge we Default Refer to ee a 8 setting vit w o w page 6 PG PG d01 Speed control 1 Speed command filter 0 000 to 5 000 s Y yY 0 020 N YJ Y d02 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y Y 0 005 N Y Y d03 P Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times Y Y 100 N Y Y d04 Integral time 0 001 to 1 000 s Y Y 0 100 N Y Y d06 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y Y 0 002 N Y Y d09 Speed control Jogging 0 000 to 5 000 s Y Y 0 020 N Y Y Speed command filter d10 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y 0 005 N Y Y dit P Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times Y Y 100 N Y Y d12 Integral time 0 001 to 1 000 s T Y 0 100 N Y Y d13 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y Y 0002 N YJ Y d14 Fe
65. Output FM1 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC Y Y 0 YY Y 5 45 Mode selection 1 Output in current 4 to 20 mA DC F30 Voltage adjustment 0 to 300 E Y 100 Y Y Y 545 F31 Function Select a function to be monitored from the followings Y Y 0 YIYIY 5 45 0 Output frequency 1 before slip compensation 1 Output frequency 2 after slip compensation 2 Output current 3 Output voltage 4 Output torque 5 Load factor 6 Input power 7 PID feedback amount 8 PG feedback value 9 DC link bus voltage 10 Universal AO 13 Motor output 14 Calibration 15 PID command SV 16 PID output MV F32 Analog Output FM2 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC Ni Y 0 YY Y 5 45 Mode selection 1 Output in current 4 to 20 mA DC F34 Voltage adjustment 0 to 300 y Yy 100 Y Y Y 545 F35 Function Select a function to be monitored from the followings Y 0 gt a i ae a 5 45 0 Output frequency 1 before slip compensation 1 Output frequency 2 after slip compensation 2 Output current 3 Output voltage 4 Output torque 5 Load factor 6 Input power 7 PID feedback amount 8 PG feedback value 9 DC link bus voltage 10 Universal AO 13 Motor output 14 Calibration 15 PID command SV 16 PID output MV F37 Load Selection 0 Variable torque load N Y 1 YINJ Y 5 30 Auto Torque Boost 1 Constant torque load Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy saving Variable torque load
66. P20 P21 P22 P23 P55 H46 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 75 0 62 5 50 0 06 3 112 5 118 8 0 10 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 74 4 63 6 50 7 08 8 118 7 129 6 0 17 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 66 9 54 5 43 3 1 0 129 3 148 4 0 34 05 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 67 0 55 2 43 8 21 126 5 144 3 0 68 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 62 6 51 8 41 1 2 4 129 2 148 4 1 27 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 71 4 58 1 46 2 1 4 126 1 143 9 2 55 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 61 7 50 3 39 8 5 7 133 5 150 6 3 74 0 6 3 70 to 5 49 4 0 61 3 49 5 39 1 5 6 133 2 154 1 6 28 0 8 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 64 9 52 7 41 8 43 133 1 155 6 9 34 1 0 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 67 1 56 1 45 6 1 7 128 4 149 2 12 74 1 2 11 00 to 14 99 11 69 9 58 0 47 0 114 1 130 2 147 9 18 68 1 3 15 00 to 18 49 15 72 1 60 7 49 5 09 0 121 3 137 8 25 47 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 70 7 59 9 48 7 112 1 127 9 147 5 31 41 2 0 22 00 to 29 99 22 68 9 59 1 48 4 114 1 130 2 151 8 37 36 30 00 to 36 99 30 68 7 57 2 45 8 114 8 132 3 153 9 50 94 2 3 37 00 to 44 99 37 65 4 54 2 43 4 112 2 126 4 143 6 62 83 2 5 45 00 to 54 99 45 66 8 55 4 44 4 112 3 126 0 141 8 76 41 1 0 55 00 to 74 99 55 64 7 53 6 43 1 117 2 136 2 157 8 93 39 2 6 75 00 to 89 99 75 64 3 54 2 42 9 114 9 129 8 144 6 127 4 2 8 90 00 to 109 9 90 65 0 54 0 44 0 115 0 130 0 145 0 152 8 3 2 110 0 or above 110 70 7 58 7 47 8 112 2 126 1 142 4 186 8 3 5 Note A box m replaces S or E depending on the enclosure 5 24 5 2 Details of Function Codes This section provides the details of the function codes The descriptions are in principle arrang
67. RS 485 Communication 2 0 2400 bps Y Y 3 YIY Y Baud rate 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps y15 Data length 0 8 bits 1 7 bits Y b YHE yi6 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits Y Y NEH IN 1 Even parity 1 stop bit 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit 3 None 1 stop bit y17 Stop bits 0 2 bits 1 1bit Y Ys 0 ago Bia Gan Wh y18 No response error detection time 0 No detection 1 to 60 s Y Y 0 WILY N y19 Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 s Y Y 0 01 Y YI Y g y20 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol Y Y 0 YIY Y 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol y97 Communication Data Storage 0 Save into nonvolatile storage Rewritable times limited Y Y 0 YI Y Y Selection 1 Write into temporary storage Rewritable times unlimited 2 Save all data from temporary storage to nonvolatile one After saving data the data automatically returns to 1 y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Frequency command Run command Y ey 0 YIY Y 0 Follow H30 data Follow H30 data 1 Via fieldbus option Follow H30 data 2 Follow H30 data Via fieldbus option 3 Via fieldbus option Via fieldbus option y99 Loader Link Function Frequency command Run command y N 0 Y bo fal oY Mode selection 0 Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data 1 Via RS 485 link Follow H30 and y98 data FRENIC Loader 2 Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link FRENIC Loader 3 Via RS 485 link Via RS 485 link FRENIC Loa
68. Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 3 to 5 then the inverter automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine An accident or injuries could occur Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Even if the run command is set to OFF voltage is output to inverter output terminals U V and W if the servo lock command is ON An electric shock may occur The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur ACAUTION Do not touch the heat sink and braking resistor because they become very hot Doing so could cause burns The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur When the inverter is controlled with the digital input signals switching run or frequency command sources with the related terminal commands e g SS1 SS2 SS4 SS8 Hz2
69. When replacing the inverter connected with such a filter make a note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 leakage reactance X no load current and rated slip frequency and specify those values to the new inverter s function codes Vibration that may occur when the motor s coupling is elastic can be regarded as normal vibration due to the output voltage pattern applied in tuning The tuning does not always result in an error however run the motor and check its running state 4 8 4 1 8 Function code basic settings lt 3 gt Driving a motor under vector control without speed sensor F42 5 requires auto tuning regardless of the motor type Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 Even driving a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control requires auto tuning Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values For the motor ratings check the ratings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them Menu 1 Data Setting Function code Base frequency 1 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 Motor 1 Rated capacity Motor 1 Rated current Function code data Motor ratings printed on the nameplate of the motor For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Factory default FRN___G1 2A
70. Y Y YIY Y 1 Even parity 1 stop bit 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit 3 None 1 stop bit y07 Stop bits 0 2 bits 1 1bit Y 0 Y Y Y paa y08 No response error detection time 0 No detection 1 to 60 s Y Y 0 Y Y Y G y09 Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 s Y Y 0 01 Y Y Y y10 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol Y Y 1 eai i A e g 1 FRENIC Loader protocol SX protocol 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol y11 RS 485 Communication 2 Station address 1 to 255 N Y 1 Y Y Y y12 Communications error processing 0 Immediately trip with alarm erp Y Y 0 WF W Be 1 Trip with alarm er p after running for the period specified by timer y13 2 Retry during the period specified by timer y13 If the retry fails trip with alarm er p If it succeeds continue to run 3 __ Continue to run y13 Timer 0 0 to 60 0 s Y Y 2 0 Gd tie fad 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 12 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity 5 for inverters with a capacity of 3 7 kW 4 0 kW for the EU or below 10 for those with 5 5 kW to 22 kW 20 for those with 30 kW or above 5 20 Drive 5 control 2 D gt 22 we Code Name Data setting range oe w a Default Refer to HE a g setting vit w o w Page 5 PG PG y14
71. a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 ADC reactor DCR is an option However inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Note A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 8 3 8 2 2 Three phase 400 V class series HD and LD mode inverters Type FRN___G1E 40 04 075 1 5 22 he 55 75 11 15 185 22 30 37 45 55 75 Nominal applied motor kW a Rated capacity kVA A k i 10 14 12 17 Rated voltage V 4 Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function 2 5 d i A 13 5 16 5 23 150 1 min 200 3 0 s 120 1 min D oltage frequency 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz i D i D Rated current A Output ratings Overload capability V 5 o6 1 2 21 3 2 5 2 74 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 96 with DCR kVA 7 L 10 15 114 sa H 10 to 15 L 7 to 12 ing transistor Input power power Torque ilt in braking resistor Braking time s Duty cycle ED Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 UL508C C22 2No 14 EN50178 1997 27 29 s2 6s 69 sa i0s i0s n2 2 27 o e 1 4 0 KW for the
72. a single inverter the wiring length should be the sum of the length of the wires to the motors Precautions for high frequency leakage currents If the wiring distance between an inverter and a motor is long high frequency currents flowing through stray capacitance across wires of phases may cause an inverter overheat overcurrent trip increase of leakage current or it may not assure the accuracy in measuring leakage current Depending on the operating condition an excessive leakage current may damage the inverter To avoid the above problems when directly connecting an inverter to a motor keep the wiring distance 50 m or less for inverters with a capacity of 3 7 kW or below and 100 m or less for inverters with a higher capacity If the wiring distance longer than the specified above is required lower the carrier frequency or insert an output circuit filter OFL OOO DA as shown below No output circuit filter installed Output circuit filter installed Max 5m Max 50 m Max 100 m Output circuit filter Inverter Inverter er gt For an inverter with an output circuit filter installed the total secondary wiring length should be 400 m or less 100 m or less under the vector control If further longer secondary wiring is required consult your Fuji Electric representative Precautions for surge voltage in driving a motor by an inverter especially for 400 V class general purpose motors If the motor is
73. activated ot teas Saad concurrently they may conflict each other and cause hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters F42 Drive Control Selection 1 H68 Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions F42 specifies the motor drive control Data for i Basic Speed F42 Drive control control feedback Speed control 0 V f control with slip compensation inactive Frequency control Dynamic torque vector control vif Di sable j 1 with slip compensation and auto torque boost control Frequency control with ee slip compensation 2 V f control with slip compensation active Speed 5 Vector control without speed sensor Vector estimation Speed control with control speed regulator 6 Vector control with speed sensor Enable For details about the motor drive control refer to Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR F43 F44 Current Limiter Mode selection Level H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter F44 the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limit the output current The default setting is 160 and 130 for HD mode inverters and LD mode inverters respectively Once the HD mode or LD mode is selected by F80 the current limit for each mode is automatically specified If 160 or 130 or over of overcurrent instantaneously
74. and digital reference Y y 0 Y Y Y 5 25 protection 1 Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection 2 Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection 3 Enable both data protection and digital reference protection Frequency Command 1 0 A amp keys on keypad N Y 0 Y YY 5 25 1 Voltage input to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC 2 Current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC 3 Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 5 Voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC 7 Terminal command UP DOWN control 8 A amp keys on keypad balanceless bumpless switching available 11 Digital input interface card option 12 PG interface card Operation Method 0 RUN STOP keys on keypad Motor rotational direction N Y 2 Y Y Y 5 27 specified by terminal command FWD REV 1 Terminal command FWD or REV 2 RUN STOP keys on keypad forward 3 _RUN STOP keys on keypad reverse Maximum Frequency 1 25 0 to 500 0 Hz N Yy YJYJ Y 527 Base Frequency 1 25 0 to 500 0 Hz N Y 50 0 Y Y Y 5 28 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input N Y2 4 Y Y Y 5 28 voltage 80 to 240 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Maximum Output Voltage 1 80 to 240 V Output an AVR controlled voltage N Y2 4 Y N N 5 28 for 200 V class series 160 to 500 V Output an AVR contro
75. as 150 for 1 min 500 Hz default 200 for 3 s the inverter s Capable of driving a motor 1 LD Low Duty mode Light load whose capacity is one rank 120 for 1 min 120 Hz higher than the inverter s For details refer to Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR The LD mode inverter brings out the rated current level which enables the inverter to drive a motor with one rank higher capacity but its overload capability against the continuous current rating level decreases For the rated current level see Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS E01 to E07 Terminal X1 to X7 Function E98 E99 Terminal FWD and REV Function Function codes E01 to E07 E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable digital input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal The default setting is normal logic system Active ON So explanations that follow are given in normal logic system Active ON A CAUTION sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed An accident or physical injury may result When the inverter is controlled with the digital input signals switching run or frequency command sources with the related terminal commands e g SS1 SS2 SS4 SS8 Hz2 Hz1 Hz PID IVS and LE may ca
76. assigned terminal ON and reassign the WE KP terminal command to a correct command WE KP is only a signal that permits you to change function code data so it does not protect the frequency settings specified by the and keys or PID command D Qo m Cancel PID control Hz PID Function code data 20 Turning this terminal command ON disables the PID control If the PID control is disabled with this command the inverter runs the motor with the reference frequency manually set by any of the multi frequency keypad analog input etc Terminal command Function Hz PID OFF Enable PID control ON Disable PID control Enable manual frequency settings Refer to the descriptions of J codes m Switch normal inverse operation IVS Function code data 21 This terminal command switches the output frequency control between normal proportional to the input value and inverse in analog frequency setting or under PID process control To select the inverse operation turn the IVS ON Output frequency Inverse 100 Normal 0 3 OV 10 V Analog input voltage 4mA 20 mA Analog input current Tio The normal inverse switching operation is useful for air conditioners that require switching AIP between cooling and heating In cooling the speed of the fan motor output frequency of the inverter is increased to lower the temperature In heating it is reduced to lower the temperature This sw
77. below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Electric shock may occur e Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work Use insulated tools e Never modify the inverter Electric shock or injuries could occur 7 1 Daily Inspection Visually inspect the inverter for operation errors from the outside without removing the covers when the inverter is ON or operating Check that the expected performance satisfying the standard specification is obtained Check that the surrounding environment satisfies the requirements given in Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Check that the LED monitor on the keypad displays normally Check for abnormal noise odor or excessive vibration Check for traces of overheat discoloration and other defects 7 2 Periodic Inspection Perform periodic inspections according to the items listed in Table 7 1 Before performing periodic inspections be sure to stop the motor and remove the front cover with the inverter power OFF Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Check part Check ite
78. cause electric shock If the auto reset function has been selected the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor depending on the cause of tripping Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured at the time of restarting Otherwise an accident could occur A WARNING If the stall prevention function current limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control or overload prevention control has been selected the inverter may operate with acceleration deceleration or frequency different from the commanded ones Design the machine so that safety is ensured even in such cases The key on the keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with function code F02 0 2 or 3 When the keypad operation is disabled prepare an emergency stop switch separately for safe operations Switching the run command source from keypad local to external equipment remote by turning ON the Enable communications link command LE disables the key To enable the key for an emergency stop select the STOP key priority with function code H96 1 or 3 If any of the protective functions have been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to OFF release the alarm If the alarm is released while any run commands are set to ON the inverter may supply the power to the motor running the motor Otherwise an accident could occur If you enable the
79. connection 5 Keep the power supply wiring primary circuit and motor wiring secondary circuit of the main circuit and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other 6 After removing a screw from the main circuit terminal block be sure to restore the screw even if no wire is connected 7 Use the wiring guide to separate wiring For inverters with a capacity of 3 7 kW or below the wiring guide separates the main circuit wires and the control circuit wires For inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 22 kW it separates the upper and lower main circuit wires and control circuit wires Be careful about the wiring order Control circuit wires Upper main circuit wires _ Control circuit E m a hH Wiring guide wires a H Wiring guide 0000000000000000 a Lower main circuit wires Main circuit wires FRN3 7G1m 40 FRN11G1 40 Note A box W in the above figure replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above figure replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination E Preparing for the wiring guide Inverters with a capacity of 11 to 22 kW three phase 200 V class series is sometimes lacking in wiring space for main circuit wires depending upon the wire materials used To assure a sufficient wiring space remove the clip off sections see below as required with a nipper Note that the enclosure rating of IP20 may not be ensured when the wiring guide itself is removed t
80. control P55 A55 b55 r55 Induced voltage factor under vector control P56 A56 b56 r56 5 82 Table 5 9 Function Codes Unavailable for the 2nd to 4th Motors Name Function codes Operation in 2nd to 4th motors Non linear V f pattern H50 to H53 H65 H66 Disabled Starting frequency 1 F24 Disabl Holding time eames Stop frequency F Disabl Holding time ae i bigd Overload early warning E34 E35 Disabled Current detection Droop control H28 Disabled UPIDOWN control H61 Fixed at the initial setting 0 Hz Initial frequency setting J01 to J06 J08 to J13 J15 to J19 PID control J56 to J62 E40 E41 H91 Disabled Brake signal J68 to J72 J95 J96 Disabled Current limiter F43 F44 Disabled Rotational direction limitation H08 Disabled Pre excitation H84 H85 Disabled Maintenance Interval Preset Startup Count for Maintenance H78 H79 Disabled NTC thermistor H26 H27 Disabled Chapter6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 Protective functions The FRENIC MEGA series of inverters has various protective functions as listed below to prevent the system from going down and reduce system downtime The protective functions marked with an asterisk in the table are disabled by factory default Enable them according to your needs The protective functions include for example the heavy alarm detection function which upon detection of an abnormal state displays the alarm c
81. during ACC DEC 4 Auto energy saving Constant torque load during ACC DEC 5 Auto energy saving Auto torque boost during ACC DEC F38 Stop Frequency Detection mode 0 Detected speed 1 Commanded speed N Y 0 NIN Y F39 Holding Time 0 00 to 10 00 s bd Y 0 00 Y Y Y 5 43 F40 Torque Limiter 1 1 300 to 300 999 Disable Y 99 Y Y Y 5 47 F41 1 2 300 to 300 999 Disable Y Y 999 YIYJY 5 47 F42 Drive Control Selection 1 0 V f control with slip compensation inactive N Y 0 Y Y Y 5 48 1 Dynamic torque vector control 2 V f control with slip compensation active 5 Vector control without speed sensor 6 Vector control with speed sensor F43 Current Limiter Mode selection 0 Disable No current limiter works Yy Y 2 YINJN 5 48 1 Enable at constant speed Disable during ACC DEC 2 Enable during ACC constant speed operation F44 Level 20 to 200 The data is interpreted as the rated output Y Y 160 Y N N 5 48 current of the inverter for 100 F50 Electronic Thermal Overload 0 Braking resistor built in type 1 to 9000 kWs Y Y1Y2 6 Y YJ Y 549 Protection for Braking Resistor OFF Disable Discharging capability F51 Allowable average loss 0 001 to 99 99 kW Y Y1Y2 0 001 Y Y Y 5 49 F52 Resistance 0 01 to 9990 Yy Y1Y2 0 01 Y Y Y 5 49 F80 Switching between HD and LD drive 0 HD High Duty mode 1 LD Low Duty mode N Y 0 Y Y Y 5 51 modes The shaded function codes EE ar
82. even if the internal air circulation DC fan is locked due to a failure etc When you start the inverter in this state it automatically issues the run fan command then the inverter detects the DC fan lock state and turn ON the LIFE or OH output or enters the alarm O 1 state note If the ON OFF control of the cooling fan is enabled H06 1 the cooling fan may stop depending Note that operating the inverter under the condition that the DC fan is locked for long time may shorten the life of electrolytic capacitors on the PCBs due to local high temperature inside the inverter Be sure to check with the LIFE signal etc and replace the broken fan as soon as possible Braking transistor error detection Bit 6 ba 22 kW or below Upon detection of a built in braking transistor error this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm dba Set data of this bit to 0 when the inverter does not use a braking transistor and there is no need of entering an alarm state Switch IP20 IP40 enclosure Bit 7 22 kW or below Mounting an IP40 option to inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below enables them to conform to IP40 In such a case switch Bit 7 to 1 for the protection coordination For details refer to the instruction manual of the IP40 option To set data of function code H98 assign the setting of each function to each bit and then convert the 8 bit binary to the decimal number Refer to the assignment of each function t
83. factor assignments and the LED monitor display Table 5 7 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecimal Table 5 4 Light Alarm Selection 1 H81 Bit Assignment of Selectable Factors Content Content Overload of motor 3 Overload of motor 2 RS 485 communications error COM port 2 Overload of motor 1 RS 485 communications error COM port 1 Braking resistor overheated Option error Option communications error Inverter internal overheat External alarm Overload of motor 4 Heat sink overheat Content Lifetime alarm Heat sink overheat early warning Inverter life Number of startups Motor overload early warning Inverter life Cumulative motor run time DC fan locked PTC thermistor activated Low torque output PID alarm Reference command loss detected Speed mismatch or excessive speed deviation Table 5 6 Display of Light Alarm Factor Example Light alarm factors RS 485 communications error COM port 2 RS 485 communications error COM port 1 Option communications error Overload of motor 1 and Heat sink overheat are selected by H81 LED No Bit Code Binary Hexa decimal See Table 5 7 Hexa LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 decimal on the _l LED 1 monitor m Hexadecimal expression A 4 bit binary number can be expressed
84. factor of the error that has occurred in the option being connected to the C port 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information Menu 6 Alarm Information shows the causes of the past 4 alarms in alarm code Further it is also possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm occurred Figure 3 5 shows the menu transition in Menu 6 Alarm Information and Table 3 16 lists the details of the alarm information Running status info at the time List of alarm codes an alarm occured gt DATA DATS g gt Item Switching at approx Output frequency lt _ LOL Fe OPR 1 second intervals cann T out SUL z 1 olto 7 1 i Item Output current Switching at approx Lg second intervals uy ae i 6 01 mot Switching at approx Error sub code gs 1 second intervals D1 bg n bee t Li zk io SSeee Sees SS eS GP A Same as above J Figure 3 5 Menu Transition in Menu 6 Alarm Information Basic key operation To view the alarm information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the G key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears Use the and keys to display Alar
85. in hexadecimal format 1 hexadecimal digit The table below shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Table 5 7 Binary and Hexadecimal conversion Binary Hexadecimal Binary Hexadecimal 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cote When H26 data is set to 1 PTC The inverter immediately trips with 0 4 displayed if the PTC Ss thermistor is activated the inverter stops without displaying a blinking the KEYPAD CONTROL LED or outputting L ALM signal regardless of the assignment of bit 11 PTC thermistor activated by H82 Light Alarm Selection 2 H97 Clear Alarm Data H45 Mock Alarm H97 clears alarm data alarm history and relevant information stored in the inverter To clear alarm data simultaneous keying of amp key A key is required H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external sequences function correctly at the time of machine setup Mock alarm data can also be cleared by H97 Data for H97 Function 0 Disable 1 Enable Setting 1 clears alarm data and then returns to 0 H98 Protection Maintenance Function Mode selection H98 specifies whether to enable or disable automatic lowering of carrier frequency input phase loss protection output phase loss protection judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor judgment
86. instead of the Gs key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears 7 Press the key to return to the menu from the function code list SG CEC 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking Menu 2 Data Checking in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been changed Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor You can refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary To check function codes in Menu 2 Data Checking it is necessary to set function code E52 to 1 Function code data check mode or 2 Full menu mode The menu transition in Menu 2 Data Checking is just like that in Menu 0 Quick Setup 3 9 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Menu 3 Drive Monitoring is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial running The display items for Drive Monitoring are listed in Table 3 6 Figure 3 3 shows the menu transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Programming mode 1 1 1 1 mo 1 1 1 1 1 T ERENG List of monitoring items Running status info gt 49 55 Output frequency aoe e gt 42 54 Output current
87. integrated sequence to switch ______ to commercial power 50 Hz uswso _ 41 Enable integrated sequence to switch Drive i lt lt lt lt lt lt i lt i Z lt i lt lt lt lt lt lt iz i lt iZiz S control 2 gf oc 5 Default 25 AG setting wio w gt e v i PG PG E N Y 98 N Y 99 YIY Y YIY Y YIY Y YIY Y YIY Y YEYE YJYJ Y YIY Y YIY Y YIY Y YIY Y YIY Y YIY Y YIY Y YJ Y ZY AN ES eee EEN N YIY Y YIY Y YIYI Y YYY YJIYJ Y YIY Y YY a 1 BARABA oe Y Juin YIY Y Refer to page 5 52 5 52 motor 1 CRUN M1 _ _YJNIJNJ BERORREN EANN Gee EREEN INUN Count the run time of commercial power driven E MONE S KCRUN MA CAN LIY iN d Y 99 Run reverse REV YY Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal C codes Control Functions of Frequency Drive 5 control EP gf Code Name Data setting range gE we Default Refer to ee a 8 setting Vit w o w page 5 PG PG C01 _ Jump Frequency 1 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 00 Y Y Y c02 2 Y Y 00 Y Y Y c03 3 Y X 00 Y Y Y C04 Hysteresis width 0 0 to 30 0 Hz Y kd 3 0 YIY Y C05 Multi frequency 1 0 00 to 500 00 Hz Y 0 00 Y Y Y c06 2 Y Y 0 00 Y YY 5 8
88. is 1kQ 2 W Check if the pulse train is correctly transmitted because stray capacity is significantly affected by the wire types and wiring conditions Analog output Analog Both terminals output monitor signals for analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V or analog DC monitor current 4 to 20 mA The output form VO IO for each of FM1 and FM2 can be switched with the slide switches on the control PCB and the function codes as listed below r MOP Output form Terminal function is Content is specified by Analog DC Analog DC ified by voltage current specified by Slide switch SW4 vo1 101 Function code Function code F29 0 1 F31 Slide switch SW6 VO2 102 Function code Function code F32 0 1 F35 Terminal FM1 FM2 The signal content can be selected from the following with function codes F31 and F35 Output frequency e Output current e Output voltage Output torque e Load factor e Input power PID feedback amount e Speed PG feedback value DC link bus voltage e Universal AO e Motor output e Calibration PID command PID output Input impedance of the external device Min 5kQ at 0 to 10 VDC output While the terminal is outputting 0 to 10 VDC it is capable of driving up to two analog voltmeters with 10 kQ impedance Input impedance of the external device Max 5009 at 4 to 20 mA DC output Adjustable range of the gain 0 to 300 Analog Two common terminals for
89. keys stands for pressing the key with the key held down 3 3 3 3 Running Mode 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status In Running mode the fourteen items listed below can be monitored Immediately after the inverter is turned ON the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed Press the key to switch between these monitor items Monitor items Speed monitor Display sample on the LED monitor 1 Table 3 3 Monitoring Items LED indicator E ON O OFF Meaning of displayed value Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED indicators Output frequency before slip compensation 5 00 Frequency actually being output Output frequency after slip compensation Frequency actually being output Reference frequency Reference frequency being set Motor speed Ou pu f eq J tput frequency Hz x y 1 Load shaft speed Output frequency Hz x E50 Line speed Output frequency Hz x E50 Speed Output frequency x 100 Maximum frequency Function code data for E43 Output current Current output from the inverter in RMS Output voltage Calculated torque Voltage output from the inverter in RMS Motor output torque in Calculated value Input power Input power to the inverter PID command 3 4 PID feedback amount 3 5 PID command feedback amount transformed to that of vi
90. light XP Table 3 12 Segment Display for External Signal Information Segment LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 n a n E CI 30A B C Y1 CMY Y2 CMY Y3 CMY a Y4 CMY f 9 i Y5A Y5C I ti op Edp No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communications control Refer to Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next page e Displaying I O signal status in hexadecimal Each I O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3 13 An unassigned bit is interpreted as 0 Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor as four hexadecimal digits 0 to f each On the FRENIC MEGA digital input terminals FWD and REV are assigned to bits 0 and 1 respectively Terminals X1 through X7 are assigned to bits 2 through 10 The bit is set to 1 when the corresponding input terminal is short circuited ON and it is set to 0 when the terminal is open OFF For example when FWD and X1 are ON short circuited and all the others are OFF open 0005 is displayed on LED4 to LED1 Digital output terminals Y1 through Y4 are assigned to bits 0 through 3 Each bit is set to 1 when the output terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 is short circuited with CMY ON and 0 when it is open OFF The status of the relay contact output terminal Y5A C is assigned
91. moment of inertia for load Recalculate the deceleration torque based on the moment of inertia for the load and the deceleration time gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 E13 E15 and H56 gt Enable the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control H69 or deceleration characteristics H71 gt Enable torque limiter F40 F41 E16 E17 and H73 gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 to 0 to improve the braking capability gt Consider the use of a braking resistor The acceleration time was too short Check if the overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration gt Increase the acceleration time F07 E10 E12 and E14 gt Select the S curve pattern H07 gt Consider the use of a braking resistor Braking load was too heavy Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 to 0 to improve the braking capability gt Consider the use of a braking resistor Malfunction caused by noise Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level when the overvoltage alarm occurred gt Implement noise control measures For refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Appendix A gt Enable the auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any causing noise details 4 u Undervoltage Problem DC link bus voltage
92. of the inverter if the power supply is three phase 200 400 V 4 The inverter should be used in an environment that does not exceed Pollution Degree 2 requirements If the environment conforms to Pollution Degree 3 or 4 install the inverter in an enclosure of IP54 or higher 5 Install the inverter AC or DC reactor input or output filter in an enclosure with minimum degree of protection of IP2X Top surface of enclosure shall be minimum IP4X when it can be easily accessed to prevent human body from touching directly to live parts of these equipment 6 Do not connect any copper wire directly to grounding terminals Use crimp terminals with tin or equivalent plating to connect them 7 When you use an inverter at an altitude of more than 2000 m you should apply basic insulation for the control circuits of the inverter The inverter cannot be used at altitudes of more than 3000 m vi Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued ACAUTION 8 Use wires listed in EN60204 Appendix C Recommended wire size mm Main circuit MCCB or Main power RCD ELCB 1 input 2 Rated current L1 R L2 S L3 T Inverter s grounding G Ww W o DCR DCR Inverter type HD LD mode DC reactor Control circuit supply RO TO Aux fan power supply R1 T1 Power supply voltage U V W Nominal applied motor P DB 2 Aux control power Inverter outputs 2 Braking resistor FRNO 4G1
93. on the LED monitor Abnormal motor operation 9 _ Qo to Section 6 3 1 1 The motor does not rotate 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command 4 Speed fluctuation or current oscillation e g hunting occurs during running at constant speed 5 Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates 6 The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time 7 The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure 8 The motor abnormally heats up 9 The motor does not run as expected Problems with inverter settings _ _ Qo to Section 6 3 2 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor 2 The desired menu is not displayed 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed f an alarm code appears on the LED monitor _ Qo to Section 6 4 f the light alarm indication a appears on the LED monitor Go to Section 6 5 f an abnormal pattern appears on the LED monitor _ __ Qo to Section 6 6 while neither an alarm code nor light alarm indication a is displayed If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure contact your Fuji Electric representative 6 3 6 3 I
94. on the life of DC link bus capacitor DC fan lock detection braking transistor error detection and IP20 IP40 switching in combination Bit 0 to Bit 7 Automatic lowering of carrier frequency Bit 0 This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter running Even if a heat sink overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load abnormal surrounding temperature or cooling system failure enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping OA1 OA3Z or O uv Note that enabling this function results in increased motor noise Input phase loss protection n Bit 1 Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit due to phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance in the three phase power supplied to the inverter this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm n In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected phase loss or Note line to line voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit Output phase loss protection Qp _ Bit 2 Upon detection of phase loss in the output while the inverter is running this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm Op Note Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation all t
95. one 3 DC link bus voltage control with Force to stop if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the specified one 4 Torque limit control with Force to stop disabled 5 DC link bus voltage control with Force to stop disabled H70 Overload Prevention Control 0 00 Follow the deceleration time selected Y Y 999 Y Y Y 0 01 to 100 0 Hz s 999 Cancel H71 Deceleration Characteristics 0 Disable 1 Enable Y Y 0 Y NIN as H72 Main Power Down Detection 0 Disable 1 Enable hi Y 1 Y Y Y Mode selection H73 Torque Limiter 0 Enable during ACC DEC and running at constant N W 0 Y Y Y 547 Operating conditions speed 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable during running at constant speed 2 Enable during ACC DEC and disable during running at constant speed H76 Frequency increment limit 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 5 0 Y NJN 5 47 for braking 5 74 H77 Service Life of DC Link Bus 0 to 8760 in units of 10 hours Y N YAY Capacitor Remaining time H78 Maintenance Interval M1 0 Disable 1 to 9999 in units of 10 hours Ye N 8760 Y Y Y 5 75 H79 Preset Startup Count for 0000 Disable 0001 to FFFF hex Y N 0 VYY 5 75 Maintenance M1 H80 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 Y Y 0 20 Y N N Gain for Motor 1 10 H81 Light Alarm Selection 1 0000 to FFFF hex W Y 0 YON IY 5 76 H82 Light Alarm Selection 2 0000 to FFF
96. other be sure to separate them with a partition plate or the like so that any heat radiating from an inverter will not affect the one s above As long as the surrounding temperature is 40 C or lower inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below can be mounted side by side without any clearance between them 2 1 Table 2 2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude Altitude isc rs 1000 m or lower 1 00 1000 to 1500 m 0 97 1500 to 2000 m 0 95 2000 to 2500 m 0 91 2500 to 3000 m 0 88 Note 1 When inverters are mounted side by side without any clearance between them 22 kW or below the surrounding temperature should be within the range from 10 to 40 C Note 2 Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to lint cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat sink of the inverter If the inverter is to be used in such an environment install it in a dustproof panel of your system Note 3 If you use the inverter in an altitude above 1000 m you should apply an output current derating factor as listed in Table 2 2 Top 100 mm Bottom 100 mm For the inverters with a capacity of 1 5 kW or below and 30 kW or above maintain 50 mm clearance to the right and left sides 100 mm to the front Figure 2 1 Mounting Direction and Required Clearances m When employing external cooling External heat t i TANS radiation 70 In externa
97. performed To perform it put those conditions back to the factory default ones and shut down the inverter For the measuring procedure see 1 given on the next page To measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is turned OFF it is necessary to set up the load conditions for ordinary operation and measure the reference capacitance initial setting when the inverter is introduced For the reference capacitance setup procedure see 2 given on the next page Performing the setup procedure automatically detects and saves the measuring conditions of the DC link bus capacitor Setting bit 3 of H98 data to O restores the inverter to the measurement in comparison with the initial capacitance measured at shipment If the multi function keypad is mounted the inverter does not measure the discharging time automatically since the inverter s conditions are different from the ones applied at shipment It is therefore necessary to perform the setup procedure mentioned in above to enable the measurement under ordinary operating conditions To make an accurate judgment on the service life of the DC ink bus capacitor accurate measurement of the capacitance select the judgment procedure according to the keypad type and the measuring conditions following the flowchart given below Selection of life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor What keypad type is mounted on the invert
98. place whichever date is earlier 2 However in cases where the use environment conditions of use use frequency and times used etc have an effect on product life this warranty period may not apply 3 Furthermore the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric s Service Department is 6 months from the date that repairs are completed 2 Warranty range 1 Inthe event that breakdown occurs during the product s warranty period which is the responsibility of Fuji Electric Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has broken down free of charge at the place where the product was purchased or where it was delivered However if the following cases are applicable the terms of this warranty may not apply The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions environment handling or use methods etc which are not specified in the catalog operation manual specifications or other relevant documents The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji s product The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji s product such as the customer s equipment or software design etc Concerning the Fuji s programmable products the breakdown was caused by a program other than a program supplied by this company or the results from using such a program The breakdown was caused by modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji Electric
99. provided in each model Use function codes F10 to F12 to set the protection level Use Cu wire only Use Class 1 wire only for control circuits Short circuit rating Suitable For Use On A Circuit Of Delivering Not More Than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 240 Volts Maximum for 200V class input 22 kW or less 230 Volts maximum for 200V class input 30 kW or above when protected by Class J Fuses or a Circuit Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 240 Volts Maximum Models FRN rated for 200V class input Suitable For Use On A Circuit Of Delivering Not More Than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 480 Volts Maximum when protected by Class J Fuses or a Circuit Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 480 Volts Maximum Models FRN rated for 400V class input Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes Field wiring connections must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed loop terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer All circuits with terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T RO TO R1 T1 must have a common disconnect and be connected to the same pole of the disconnect if the terminals are conn
100. results or any error in the tuning process it displays er 7 and discards the tuning data Listed below are possible causes that trigger tuning errors Possible tuning error causes Details An interphase voltage unbalance or output phase loss has been detected Error in tuning results Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter due to the output circuit opened Output current error An abnormally high current has flown during tuning During tuning a run command has been turned OFF or STOP Force to stop BX Sequence error Coast to a stop DWP Protect from dew condensation or other similar terminal command has been received During tuning any of the operation limiters has been activated The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter high has limited tuning operation Error due to limitation Other errors An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred If any of these errors occurs remove the error cause and perform tuning again or consult your Fuji Electric representative Cote If a filter other than the Fuji optional output filter OFL OA is connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit the tuning result cannot be assured When replacing the inverter connected with such a filter make a note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 leakage reactance X no load current and rated slip frequency and speci
101. saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Available when the vector control is enabled r20 No load current 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 YJYJ Y r21 R1 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y 1Y2 7 You Pye ey r22 X 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y1Y2 7 YIY Y _ 123 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 Y Y 100 0 Y Y Y _ r24 Slip compensation response time 0 01 to 10 00 s Y Y1Y2 0 12 Y NIN r25 Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 w Y j100 0 Y YJ Y r26 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 Hz N Y1Y2 7 Y YY _ r27 Iron loss factor 1 0 00 to 20 00 Y Y 1Y2 7 YYY _ r28 Iron loss factor 2 0 00 to 20 00 Y 1Y2 0 00 Y Y Y r29 Iron loss factor 3 0 00 to 20 00 Y 1Y2 0 00 Y YY r30 Magnetic saturation factor 1 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y 1Y2 7 YoY oy r31 Magnetic saturation factor 2 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 YIY Y r32 Magnetic saturation factor 3 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y 1Y2 7 FIY ba r33 Magnetic saturation factor 4 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y 1Y2 7 YIY Y r34 Magnetic saturation factor 5 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 YIY Y r35 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y 1Y2 7 YY Y factor a r36 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 Y EE factor b r37 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 PET E factor c 4 The motor rated current is au
102. selecting motor 1 2 3 or 4 is correct and the data of function codes matches each motor gt Correct the motor switching signal gt Modify the function code data to match the connected motor Check whether the reference frequency is below the slip compensated frequency of the motor gt Change the reference frequency so that it becomes higher than the slip compensated frequency of the motor 15 Wrong connection or poor contact of DC reactor DCR Check the wiring Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DCR to be connected Without a DCR these inverters cannot run gt Connect the DCR correctly Repair or replace DCR wires 6 5 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase Possible Causes 1 The maximum frequency currently specified was too low What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code F03 Maximum frequency gt Correct the F03 data 2 The data of frequency limiter High currently specified was too low Check the data of function code F15 Frequency limiter High gt Correct the F15 data The reference frequency currently specified was too low Check that the reference frequency has been entered correctly using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Increase the reference frequency gt Inspect the external potentiometer for frequency setting signal converters
103. standard motors 6 series When accessing function code P02 with the keypad take into account that P02 data automatically updates data of function codes P03 P06 through P23 P53 through P56 and H46 Also when accessing function code A16 b16 or r16 data of related function codes for each are automatically updated Cote 5 73 H69 H76 Automatic Deceleration Anti regenerative control Mode selection Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H69 enables or disables the anti regenerative control In the inverter not equipped with a PWM converter or braking unit if the regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip occurs To avoid such an overvoltage trip enable the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control with this function code and the inverter controls the output frequency to keep the braking torque around 0 N m in both the deceleration and constant speed running phases Function Data for H69 Force to stop with actual deceleration time Controkmade exceeding three times the specified one 0 Disable automatic deceleration 2 Torque limit control Enable 3 DC link bus voltage control Enable 4 Torque limit control Disable 5 DC link bus voltage control Disable FRENIC MEGA series of inverters have two braking control modes torque limit control and DC link bus voltage control Control mode
104. status in hex format amp ert Die DE gt 5 8 Input voltage V at terminal 12 te a m TOD le Li Not used Figure 3 4 Menu Transition in Menu 4 I O Checking Basic key operation To check the status of the I O signals set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the A and keys to display I O Checking _ 0 3 Press the key to proceed to a list of I O check items e g 4 00 4 Use the and keys to display the desired I O check item then press the amp key The corresponding I O check data appears For the item 4 0O or 4_ 01 using the O and Q keys switches the display method between the segment display for external signal information in Table 3 12 and hexadecimal display for I O signal status in Table 3 13 5 Press the key to return to the list of I O check items Press the key again to return to the menu Table 3 11 I O Check Items LED monitor shows Description Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals on the next page for details Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals that r
105. supply 10 VDC for frequency command potentiometer Supply Variable resistor 1 to 5kQ for the potentio The potentiometer of 1 2 W rating or more should be connected meter Analog 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external voltage input setting 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation voltage 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation PPR In addition to frequency setting PID command PID feedback signal auxiliary frequency command setting ratio setting torque limiter level setting or analog input monitor can be assigned to this terminal Hardware specifications Input impedance 22kQ The maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage higher than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC Inputting a bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 requires setting function code C35 to 0 es a D 2 m C lt The frequency is commanded according to the external current input 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 Normal operation 20 to 4 mA DC 0 to 100 Inverse operation In addition to frequency setting PID command PID feedback signal auxiliary frequency command setting ratio setting torque limiter level setting or analog input monitor can be assigned to this terminal Hardware specifications Input impedance 2509 The maximum input is 30 mA DC however the current larger than 20 mA DC is handled as 20 mA DC Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the
106. supply without fail before measurement 2 Ifthe test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring disconnect all the wiring from the control circuit Connect the main circuit terminals with a common line as shown in Figure 7 2 4 The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground 5 Value of 5 MQ or more displayed on the Megger indicates a correct state The value is measured on an inverter alone Inverter Megger Figure 7 2 Main Circuit Terminal Connection for Megger Test 2 Insulation test of control circuit Do not make a Megger test or withstand voltage test for the control circuit Use a high resistance range tester for the control circuit 1 Disconnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals 2 Perform a continuity test to the ground One MQ or a larger measurement indicates a correct state 3 Insulation test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit Disconnect all the wiring connected to the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter 7 8 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 6 1 When making an inquiry Upon breakage of the product uncertainties failure or inquiries inform your Fuji Electric representative of the following information Inverter type Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 SER No serial number of equipment Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 Function codes and t
107. switch between torque limiter 1 and torque limiter 2 use the terminal command TL2 TL1 Qip assigned to any of the digital input terminals Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 g Although the data setting range for F40 F41 E16 and E17 is from positive to negative values Note 300 to 300 specify positive values in practice If a negative value is specified the inverter interprets it as an absolute value The torque limiter determined depending on the overload current actually limits the torque current output Therefore the torque current output is automatically limited at a value lower than 300 the maximum setting value 5 47 m Torque limiter Operating conditions H73 H73 specifies whether the torque limiter is enabled or disabled during acceleration deceleration and running at constant speed Data for H73 During accelerating decelerating During running at constant speed 0 Enable Enable 1 Disable Enable 2 Enable Disable Em Torque limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H76 H76 specifies the increment limit of the frequency in limiting torque for braking The factory default is 5 0 Hz f the increasing frequency during braking reaches the limit value the torque limiters no longer function resulting in an overvoltage trip Such a problem may be avoided by increasing the setting of H76 CNote The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are
108. switch to active OFF depending upon their assigned functions m Drive control The FRENIC MEGA runs under V f control vector control without speed sensor or vector control with speed sensor Some function codes apply exclusively to the specific drive control which is indicated by letters Y Applicable and N Not applicable in the Drive control column in the function code tables given on the following pages Each drive control is indicated by the abbreviation V f V f control w o PG vector control without speed sensor and w PG vector control with speed sensor For details about the drive control refer to Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR note The FRENIC MEGA is a general purpose inverter whose operation is customized by frequency basis function codes like conventional inverters Under the speed basis drive control however the control target is a motor speed not a frequency so convert the frequency to the motor speed according to the following expression Motor speed r min 120 x Frequency Hz Number of poles 5 2 The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC MEGA series of inverters F codes Fundamental Functions Drive 5 control i 32 ef Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range Bs E 2 setting 7 w o w page 5 PG PG FOO Data Protection 0 Disable both data protection
109. switches and relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 C1 and V2 correctly A frequency command e g multi frequency or via communications with higher priority than the one attempted was active and its reference frequency was too low The acceleration time was too long or too short Check the data of the relevant function codes and what frequency commands are being received through Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad by referring to the block diagram of the frequency command refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 6 gt Correct any incorrect data of function codes e g cancel the higher priority frequency command Check the data of function codes F07 E10 E12 and E14 Acceleration time gt Change the acceleration time to match the load Overload Measure the output current gt Reduce the load Check whether any mechanical brake is activated gt Release the mechanical brake Function code settings do not agree with the motor characteristics If auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is specified check whether the data of P02 P03 P06 P07 and P08 agree with the parameters of the motor gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for the motor to be used The output frequency does not increase due to the current limiter
110. terminals EN and PLC are short circuited with each other using a jumper wire disabling this function To enable it be sure to remove the jumper wire For details of connection to this terminal and precautions refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 6 Compliance with EN954 1 Category 3 Enable input Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Enable lt Terminal EN circuit specification gt input lt Control circuit gt Item PLC TAVI Operating ON level K H voltage SOURCE OFF level Operating current at ON EN Input voltage is at 24 V Allowable leakage current at OFF CM PLC 1 Connects to PLC output signal power supply signal Rated voltage 24 VDC Allowable range 22 to 27 VDC Maximum 100 mA DC power 2 This terminal also supplies a power to the load connected to the transistor output terminals Refer to Transistor output described later in this table for more CM Digital Two common terminals for digital input signals input These terminals are electrically isolated from the terminals 11 s and CMY common Cip m Using a relay contact to turn X1 to X7 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 14 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control signal input X1 to X7 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circ
111. terminals P1 and P Connect a DC reactor DCR to these terminals for power factor correction 1 Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P 2 Connect an optional DCR to those terminals Cote e The wiring length should be 10 m or below Do not remove the jumper bar when a DCR is not used e Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Ifa PWM converter is connected to the inverter no DCR is required A WARNING Be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity Otherwise a fire could occur DC braking resistor terminals P and DB for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below y Built in DC braking Option mounting steps Capacity kW Braking transistor resistor DBR Optional devices External DC braking resistor 0 4 to 7 5 Built in Built in with a larger capacity 11 to 22 Built in No External DC braking resistor In inverters with a capacity of 7 5 kW or below if the capacity of the built in DC braking resistor DBR is insufficient since the inverter undergoes frequent start stop or heavy inertial load mount an optional external DC braking resistor DBR with a larger capacity to increase the braking capability Before mounting the external DBR remove
112. the anti regenerative control to apply when three times the specified deceleration time is elapsed thus decelerating the motor forcibly Note Enabling the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control may automatically increase the deceleration time When a brake unit is connected disable the anti regenerative control The automatic deceleration control may be activated at the same time when a braking unit starts operation which may make the deceleration time fluctuate In case the set deceleration time is so short the DC link bus voltage of the inverter rises quickly and consequently the automatic deceleration may not follow the voltage rise In such a case prolong the deceleration time H78 Maintenance Interval M1 H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 H78 Maintenance interval M1 specifies the maintenance interval in units of ten hours When the cumulative motor run time 1 H94 reaches the time specified by H78 Maintenance interval M1 the inverter outputs the maintenance timer signal MNT to remind the user of the need of system maintenance To enable this function assign the maintenance timer signal MNT to one of the digital output terminals function code data 84 The setting is in units of 10 hours The maximum setting is 9999 x 10 hours Data setting range 0 Disable 1 to 9999 in increments of 10 hours Cote After the current maintenance interval time has elapsed set a new interval for the next maintena
113. the LED monitor displays a load factor the 7 segment letter in the lowest digit stands for 7 When the LED monitor displays the motor output the unit LED indicator kW blinks 8 The analog input monitor can appear only when the analog input monitor function is assigned to any of the analog input terminals by any of function codes E61 to E63 20 9 These items appear only when the vector control is selected F42 5 or 6 L Ti Function code E42 LED display filter allows you to filter the monitoring signals for the monitor items te such as output frequency and output current Increase the E42 data if the monitored values are unstable and unreadable due to fluctuation of load 3 3 2 Monitoring light alarms The FRENIC MEGA identifies abnormal states in two categories Heavy alarm and Light alarm If the former occurs the inverter immediately trips if the latter occurs the inverter shows the a on the LED monitor and blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED but it continues to run without tripping Which abnormal states are categorized as a light alarm Light alarm object should be defined with function codes H81 and H82 beforehand Assigning the LALM signal to any one of the digital output terminals with any of function codes E20 to E24 and E27 98 enables the inverter to output the LALM signal on that terminal upon occurrence of a light alarm QJ For details of the light alarm objects refer to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTIN
114. the LED monitor shows 1 00 time of the value to be displayed If no ratio setting is selected appears Line speed Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 Coefficient for speed indication If the value is 10000 or lager the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value Table 3 6 Drive Monitoring Display Items Continued LED monitor Description shows Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used PID output value in 100 at the maximum frequency If PID control is disabled appears PID output value Flux command Flux command value in value Running status 2 in 4 digit hexadecimal format Running status 2 Refer to m Displaying running status 3 07 and running status 2 3_23 below Temperature detected by the NTC thermistor built in the motor VG Motor temperature motor If the NTC thermistor connectivity is disabled appears Not used Not used m Displaying running status 3 07 and running status 2 3 2 3 To display the running status and running status 2 in 4 digit hexadecimal format each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Tables 3 7 and 3 8 Table 3 9 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display Table 3 10 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecima
115. the braking resistor has been activated Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Braking load is too heavy Reconsider the relationship between the braking load estimated and the real load gt Lower the real braking load gt Review the selection of the braking resistor and increase the braking capability Modification of related function code data F50 F51 and F52 is also required 2 Specified deceleration Recalculate the deceleration torque and time needed for the load currently time is too short applied based on a moment of inertia for the load and the deceleration time gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 E13 E15 and H56 gt Review the selection of the braking resistor and increase the braking capability Modification of related function code data F50 F51 and F52 is also required 3 Incorrect setting of Recheck the specifications of the braking resistor epee gt Review data of function codes F50 F51 and F52 then modify them Note The inverter issues an overheat alarm of the braking resistor by monitoring the magnitude of the braking load not by measuring its surface temperature When the braking resistor is frequently used so as to exceed the settings made by function codes F50 F51 and F52 therefore the inverter issues an overheat alarm even if the surface temperature of the braking resistor does not rise To squeeze out full performance of the braking resistor con
116. the digital output terminals function code data 84 Set the H79 and H44 data in hexadecimal The maximum setting count is 65 535 FFFF in hexadecimal Data setting range 0000 Disable 0001 to FFFF Hexadecimal Cote After the current setting has expired set a value for the next maintenance in H79 and press the key so that the output signal is reset and counting restarts This function is exclusively applies to the 1st motor H81 H82 Light Alarm Selection 1 and 2 If the inverter detects a minor abnormal state light alarm it can continue the current operation without tripping while displaying the light alarm indication a on the LED monitor In addition to the indication al the inverter blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED and outputs the light alarm signal L ALM to a digital output terminal to alert the peripheral equipment to the occurrence of a light alarm To use the L ALM it is necessary to assign the signal to any of the digital output terminals by setting any of function codes E20 through E24 and E27 to 98 Function codes H81 and H82 specify which alarms should be categorized as light alarm The table below lists alarms selectable as light alarm Code Refer to Oh1 Heat sink overheat Chapter 6 page 6 14 Oh2 External alarm Chapter 6 page 6 14 Oh3 Inverter internal overheat Chapter 6 page 6 15 dbh Braking resistor overheated Chapter 6 page 6 16
117. the inverter ready to be turned OFF under ordinary operating conditions 4 Set both function codes H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0000 5 Turn OFF the inverter and the following operations are automatically performed The inverter measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and saves the result in function code H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor The conditions under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved During the measurement will appear on the LED monitor 6 Turn ON the inverter again Confirm that H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor hold right values Shift to Menu 5 Maintenance Information and confirm that the relative capacitance ratio to full capacitance is 100 Cnote If the measurement has failed 0001 is entered into both H42 and H47 Remove the factor of the failure and conduct the measurement again Hereafter each time the inverter is turned OFF it automatically measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor if the above conditions are met Periodically check the relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor with Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode Cnote The condition given above produces a rather large measurement error If this mode gives you a lifetime alarm set H
118. the inverter will start from the normal starting frequency The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure by detecting an undervoltage condition whereby the voltage of the DC link bus goes below the lower limit In a configuration where a magnetic contactor is installed on the output side of the inverter the inverter may fail to recognize a momentary power failure because the momentary power failure shuts down the operating power of the magnetic contactor causing the contactor circuit to open When the contactor circuit is open the inverter is cut off from the motor and load and the voltage drop in the DC link bus is not great enough to be recognized as a power failure In such an event restart after a recovery from momentary power failure does not work properly as designed To solve this connect the interlock command IL line to the auxiliary contact of the magnetic contactor so that a momentary power failure can sure be detected For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 During a momentary power failure the motor slows down After power is restored the inverter restarts at the frequency just before the momentary power failure Then the current limiting function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases When the output frequency matches the motor speed the motor accelerates up to the original output frequency See the figure below In this case the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be ena
119. the motor respectively 2 Incorrect connection and settings for run commands and rotation direction commands FWD and REV Check the data of function codes E98 and E99 and the connection to terminals FWD and REV gt Correct the data of the function codes and the connection Arun command with fixed rotational direction from the keypad is active but the rotational direction setting is incorrect Check the data of function code F02 Run command gt Change the data_of function code F02 to 2 fxn 6708 keys on keypad forward or 3 keys on keypad reverse The rotation direction specification of the motor is opposite to that of the inverter The rotation direction of IEC compliant motors is opposite to that of incompliant motors gt Switch the FWD REV signal setting 4 Speed fluctuation or current oscillation e g hunting occurs during running at constant speed Possible Causes 1 The frequency command fluctuates What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the signals for the frequency command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Increase the filter constants C33 C38 and C43 for the frequency command An external potentiometer is used for frequency setting Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or
120. the output current exceeds the current limiter level F44 during acceleration deceleration or constant speed running this function decreases the output frequency to avoid an overcurrent trip Overload prevention control Before the inverter trips due to a heat sink overheat OA or inverter overload 0 u this function decreases the output frequency to reduce the load Automatic deceleration Anti regenerative control If regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter s braking capability this function automatically increases the deceleration time or controls the output frequency to avoid an overvoltage trip Deceleration characteristics Excessive regenerative energy proof braking capability During deceleration this function increases the motor energy loss and decreases the regenerative energy returned to avoid an overvoltage trip 0u Reference loss detection This function detects a reference frequency loss due to a broken wire etc continues the inverter operation at the specified frequency and issues the Command loss detected signal REF OFF Automatic lowering of carrier frequency Before the inverter trips due to an abnormal surrounding temperature or output current this function automatically lowers the carrier frequency to avoid a trip Dew condensation prevention Even when the inverter is in stopped state this function feeds DC current across the motor at certain int
121. time specified by H54 and H55 ACC DEC Time apply Cninte The inverter s status transition between ready for jogging and normal operation is possible Note only when the inverter is stopped To start jogging operation with the JOG terminal command and a run command e g FWD the input of the JOG should not be delayed 100 ms or more from that of the run command If the delay exceeds 100 ms the inverter does not jog the motor but runs it ordinarily until the next input of the JOG m Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Function code data 11 Turning this terminal command ON and OFF switches the frequency command source between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 If no Hz2 Hz7 terminal command is assigned the frequency sourced by F01 takes effect by default Terminal command Fr r minana Hz2 Hz1 quency command source OFF Follow F01 Frequency command 1 ON Follow C30 Frequency command 2 LL For details of other frequency command sources refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 6 in FRENIC MEGA User s Manual m Select motor 2 3 and 4 M2 M3 and M4 Function code data 12 36 and 37 The combination of digital input terminal commands M2 M3 and M4 switches to any of the 1st to 4th motors When the motor is switched the function code group with which the inverter drives the motor is also switched to the one corresponding to the motor Terminal com
122. to Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC F01 2 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example fn is displayed 2 If anything other than fn is displayed use the and keys to display f n 3 Press the key to proceed to the list of function codes 4 Use the A and QO keys to display the desired function code f OJ in this example then press the key The data of this function code appears In this example data O of f O1 appears 5 Change the function code data using the xa and Q keys In this example press the O key two times to change data 0 to 2 6 Press the key to establish the function code data The saue appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code In this example f 02 Pressing the amp key instead of the Gs key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears a Press the Ge key to return to the menu from the function code list 3 8 i Cursor movement You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the key for 1 second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings This actio
123. to 0 keys is required 7 Even when F00 1 or 3 function code data can be changed via the communications link MN For similar purposes WE KP a signal enabling editing of function code data from the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 F010 C30 Frequency Command 1 and 2 F01 or C30 sets the command source that specifies reference frequency 1 or reference frequency 2 respectively Data for F01 C30 Function 0 Enable O Q keys on the keypad 1 Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC 2 Enable the current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC maximum frequency obtained at 20 mA DC SW5 on the control PCB should be turned to the C1 side factory default 3 Enable the sum of voltage 0 to 10 VDC and current inputs 4 to 20 mA DC given to terminals 12 and C1 respectively See the two items listed above for the setting range and the value required for maximum frequencies SW5 on the control PCB should be turned to the C1 side factory default Note If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency F03 the maximum frequency will apply Data for F01 C30 Function 5 Enable the voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC 7 Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals
124. to 4th motors are selected If data of function code A42 b42 or r42 is set to 1 Parameter Switch to particular A codes b codes or r codes a combination of M2 M3 and M4 switches the particular parameters marked with Y in the Object of parameter switching column in Table 5 8 Table 5 8 Function Codes to be Switched Function code Object of Mame ist 2na 3rd 4thn parameter motor motor motor motor switching Maximum frequency F03 A01 b01 r01 Base frequency F04 A02 b02 r02 Rated voltage at base frequency F05 A03 b03 r03 Maximum output voltage F06 A04 b04 r04 Torque boost F09 A05 b05 r05 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor a F10 A06 b06 r06 Select motor characteristics Overload detection level F11 A07 b07 r07 F12 A08 b08 r08 F20 A09 b09 r09 F21 A10 b10 r10 F22 A11 b11 r11 Thermal time constant DC braking Braking starting frequency Braking level Braking time Starting frequency F23 A12 b12 r12 Table 5 8 Function Codes to be Switched Continued Function code Object of Name ist 2nd 3rd 4th Parameter motor motor motor motor Switching E Pae A N eal a 2 Drive control selection F42 A14 b14 r14 Motor No of poles P01 A15 b15 r15 Rated capacity
125. to bit 4 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals Y5A and Y5C is closed The status of the relay contact output terminals 30A B C is assigned to bit 8 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals 30A and 30C is closed and 0 when the circuit between 30A and 30C is open For example if Y1 is ON Y2 through Y4 are OFF the circuit between Y5A and Y5C is open and the circuit between 30A and 30C is closed then 0701 is displayed on the LED4 through LED1 Table 3 13 presents bit assignment and an example of corresponding hexadecimal display on the 7 segment LED Table 3 13 Segment Display for I O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Example LED No Bit Input terminal Output terminal Binary Hexa LED4 LED3 LED2 LED decimal the LED LILI monitor No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communications control Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control below E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control Under communications control input commands function code S06 sent via RS 485 or other optional communications can be displayed in two ways with ON OFF of each LED segment and in hexadecimal The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I O si
126. to inverter s control terminals and for connection of the RS 485 communication signal cable use shielded wires As with the motor clamp the shields firmly to a grounded panel 3 If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level enclose the inverter and its peripherals within a metal panel as shown in Figure 9 3 Note Connect the shielding layer of shielded cable to the motor and panel electrically and ground the motor and panel MCCB or RCD ELCB Metal panel PONEN FRENIC MEGA supply ara compliant filter Three phase Shielded cable with overcurrent protection Figure 9 3 Mounting the Inverter with EMC compliant Filter in a Metal Panel 9 3 9 3 3 Leakage current of EMC filter built in type of inverters An EMC filter uses grounding capacitors for noise suppression which increase leakage current When using an EMC filter built in type of inverters therefore check whether there is no problem with electrical systems Table 9 1 Leakage Current of EMC Filter Built in Type of Inverters Input Power Three phase 200 V 2 Inverter type 1 Leakage current mA FRNO 4G1 FRNO 75G1E 20 FRN1 5G1E 20 FRN2 2G1E 20 FRN3 7G1E 20 FRN5 5G1E 20 FRN7 5G1E 20 FRN11G1E 20 FRN15G1E 20 FRN18 5G1E 20 FRN22G1E 20 FRN30G1E 20 FRN37G1E 20 FRN45G1E 20 FRNS55G1E 20 Three phase 400 V 3 FRNO 4G1E 40 FRNO 75G1E
127. transistor Built in Built in braking resistor 5s Braking time s 3 7 s 3 4 s 3 5 3 2 3 2 Duty cycle ED yeye LD 2 2 1 4 Overload capability Voltage frequency 200 to 240 V 50 60 z fe a 5 a Torque 5 poe OCH Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2No 14 EN50178 1997 Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type IP00 UL open type Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Face OO 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 To use the inverter with the carrier frequency of 3 kHz or more at the surrounding temperature of 40 C or higher manage the load so that the current comes to be within the rated ones enclosed in parentheses in continuous running 5 Voltage unbalance Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR x 67 IEC 61800 3 6 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 ADC reactor DCR is an option However inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Note A
128. twisted wires for control signals Check whether the external potentiometer for frequency setting is malfunctioning due to noise from the inverter gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the potentiometer or set a ferrite core on the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Frequency switching or multi frequency command was enabled Check whether the relay signal for switching the frequency command is chattering gt If the relay contact is defective replace the relay The wiring length between the inverter and the motor is too long Check whether auto torque boost auto energy saving operation or dynamic torque vector control is enabled gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used gt Disable the automatic control systems by setting F37 to 1 Constant torque load and F42 to 0 V f control with slip compensation active then check that the motor vibration stops gt Make the output wires as short as possible The machinery is hunting due to vibration caused by low rigidity of the load Or the current is irregularly oscillating due to special motor parameters Once disable all the automatic control systems such as auto torque boost auto energy saving operation overload prevention control current limiter torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation dynamic torque vector control droop con
129. up and yet does not cause over excitation at no or light load Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant regardless of the load fluctuation Specify the F09 data in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 At factory shipment F09 is preset to a level that assures approx 100 of starting torque A Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque but may cause overcurrent due note to over excitation at no load If you continue to drive the motor it may overheat To avoid such a situation adjust torque boost to an appropriate level When the non linear V f pattern and the torque boost are used together the torque boost takes effect below the frequency on the non linear V f pattern s point Output voltage V Rated voltage at base frequency 1 ocr rrr 5 Increased output voltage using torque boost 1 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 Torque boost 1 F09 Output frequency 0 Non linear V f Base Hz pattern 1 frequency 1 Frequency H50 F04 e Auto torque boost This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load Under light load auto torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over excitation Under heavy load it increases the output voltage to increase the output torque of the motor Poania e Since this function relies also on the charac
130. using an external power supply Furthermore the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 1 5 seconds after power ON so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient period Terminals Y5A C and 30A B C use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent ON OFF switching Where frequent ON OFF switching is anticipated for example limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit control such as switching to commercial power line or direct on line starting use transistor outputs Y1 Y2 Y3 and Y4 instead The service life of a relay is approximately 200 000 times if it is switched ON and OFF at one second intervals The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5A C and 30A B C To make the explanations simpler the functions listed below are all written for the normal logic Active ON Function code data Active ON Active OFF Functions assigned Inverter running Frequency speed arrival signal Frequency speed detected Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped Torque polarity detected Inverter output limiting Auto restarting after momentary power failure Motor overload early warning Keypad operation enabled ojoj n a oa amp wo rp Inverter ready to run Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For MC on comm
131. version FRN FRENIC series A Asia English Code Nominal applied motor E Ev English 0 4 0 4 kW Code Power supply voltage Three phase 200 V Sua 0 75 kw 4 Three phase 400 V 55 55 kw Code Enclosure 75 75kW S Basic type IP20 IP00 E EMC filter built in type IP20 IP00 Code Development code 1 i Code Applicable area G High performance mutifunction In tables given in this manual inverter types are denoted as FRN_ _ _G1Wm 20 40 The boxes W Note and O replace alphabetic letters depending on the enclosure and shipping destination respectively The FRENIC MEGA is available in two drive modes High duty HD and Low duty LD modes Either mode should be selected to match the load property of your system Specifications in the HD and LD modes are printed each on the main nameplate For details see Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS High Duty HD mode designed for heavy duty load applications Overload capability 150 for 1 min 200 for 3 s Continuous ratings Inverter ratings Low Duty LD mode designed for light duty load applications Overload capability 120 for 1 min Continuous ratings One rank higher capacity of inverters SOURCE Number of input phases three phase 3PH input voltage input frequency input current each for HD and LD modes OUTPUT Number of output phases rated output voltage output frequency range rated output capacity rated output current overload capability each for HD and LD modes S C C Short circ
132. 0 to 100 HD mode 0 to 80 LD mode Y Y 0 Y YY 5 42 F22 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s Y Y 0 00 Y Y Y 5 42 F23 Starting Frequency 1 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Ad Y 0 5 Y Y Y 58 F24 Holding time 0 00 to 10 00 s Y Y 0 00 Y Y Y 5 43 F25 Stop Frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Yy Y 0 2 YJY Y 5 43 The shaded function codes E are applicable to the quick setup 1 The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 00 s for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 20 00 s for those with 30 kW or above The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table 5 2 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table 5 3 function code P03 5 0 min for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 10 0 min for those with 30 kW or above 5 3 Drive 5 control 38 of Default Refer to E g Code Name Data setting range DE Ss setting w o w page g VE PG PG 8 Motor Sound Carrier frequency 0 75 to 16 kHz HD mode inverters with 55 kW or below Y Y 2 YYY 5 44 and LD mode ones with 18 5 kW or below Asia 0 75 to 10 KHz HD mode inverters with 75 to 630 kW and 15 LD mode ones with 22 to 55 kW EU 0 75 to 6 kHz_ LD mode inverters with 75 to 630 kW F27 Tone 0 Level 0 Inactive Yy Y 0 Y NIN 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 3 Level 3 F29 Analog
133. 0 or above 110 70 7 58 7 47 8 2 2 126 1 142 4 339 6 3 5 Note A box m replaces S or E depending on the enclosure 5 22 Table 5 3 Motor Parameters Continued This table lists the function codes dedicated to motor 1 For motors 2 to 4 replace the function codes with the ones dedicated to the respective motor Three phase 400 V class series for Asia FRN__ _G1ll 4A Motor pit ni Rated No load E g e Iron loss bene besa E ity motor Curent conent R1 X frequency a 1 factor 1 factor 2 kW kw A A Hz A A P02 P03 P06 P07 P08 P12 P13 P16 P17 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 23 0 21 13 90 11 84 1 77 14 00 93 8 87 5 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 35 0 28 12 49 12 21 1 77 14 00 93 3 86 1 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 0 66 0 55 12 67 12 64 2 33 12 60 89 7 81 9 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 1 15 0 86 9 83 13 17 2 40 9 88 88 7 81 3 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 1 79 1 19 8 31 10 31 2 33 7 40 88 3 77 7 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 3 04 1 57 6 19 10 60 2 00 5 85 92 1 82 8 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 4 53 2 52 6 15 10 41 1 80 5 91 85 1 74 6 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 7 37 3 98 5 48 10 66 1 93 5 24 86 0 76 9 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 11 28 5 71 4 99 13 53 1 40 4 75 88 6 79 2 7 50 to 10 99 TS 14 18 6 48 4 24 13 84 1 57 4 03 87 7 80 0 11 00 to 14 99 11 20 52 9 18 3 56 14 21 1 07 3 92 91 3 83 3 15 00 to 18 49 15 26 79 10 38 3 05 15 37 1 13 3 32 90 5 83 5 18
134. 1 40 HD ae PRN2201840 M4 1 8 M4 18 Figure B 3 7 FRN3 7G1 4A 4 0 FRN4 0G1 4E 25 FRNS 5G1m 40 HD Three 7 5 cD phase FRN7 5G1m 40 HD M5 3 5 M5 3 5 Figure C 400 V 11 LD FRN11G1m 40 HD LD i HD FRN15G1m 40 ID 18 5 HD FRN18 5G1m 40 iD M6 5 8 M6 5 8 Figure D 22 HD FRN22G18 40 30 LD 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1 4E Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 2 4 Table 2 4 Main Circuit Terminal Properties Continued Power Nominal HD LD Terminal Tightening Grounding Tightening supply applied motor Inverter type mode Screw torque screw torque Refer to voltage kW size N m size N m 30 FRN30G1m 40 a aa HD FRN37G1 8 40 D Three 45 HD M8 13 5 Figure E phase FRN45G1 40 D M8 13 5 400 V 55 ap FRN55G18 40 LD D HD Pr 30 FRN75G1 40 D M10 27 Figure F Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination Terminal RO TO Screw size M3 5 Tightening torque 1 2 N m common to all inverter types
135. 1 5G1m 20 FRN2 2G1m 20 FRN3 7G1m 20 FRN5 5G1m 20 FRN7 5G1m 20 FRN11G1m 20 FRN15G1 20 FRN18 5G1 20 gt 3S a o n 2 o D g f FRN22G1 20 FRN30G1 20 FRN37G1 20 FRN45G1 20 FRN55G1m 20 2 Use the crimp terminal model No 38 6 manufactured by JST Mfg Co Ltd or equivalent 3 Use the crimp terminal model No 60 6 manufactured by JST Mfg Co Ltd or equivalent 4 When using 150 mm wires for main circuit terminals use CB150 10 crimp terminals designed for low voltage appliances in JEM1399 Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 2 6 Table 2 6 Recommended Wire Sizes Continued o Recommended wire size mm 2 Main circuit S Nonna Main circuit power g appie Inverter type input i 3 motor YP L1 R L2 S L3 T Grounding Inverter Braking E kW c output resistor g U V W P DB a w DCR w o DCR 0 4 FRNO 4G1 40 0 75 FRNO 75G1 40 1 5 FRN1 5G1 40 HD 2 2 FRN2 2G1 40 2 0 3 7 FRN3 7G18
136. 1 Machinery design values Note For a test driving of the motor 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz increase values so that they are longer than your machinery design values If 6 00 s the specified time is short the inverter Deceleration time 1 may not run the motor properly Note Acceleration time 1 Note 6 00 s Electric thermal overload protection for motor 1 0 00 Disable Depending upon the inverter capacity Overload detection level After the above configuration initialize motor 1 with the function code H03 2 It automatically updates the data of the function codes F04 F05 P01 P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically Note updates the data of the function codes F04 F05 P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 4 1 10 Running the inverter for motor operation check A WARNING If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine Accident or injury may result After completion of preparations for a test run as described above start running the inverter for motor operation check using the following procedure CAUTION f any abnormality is found in the inverter or motor immediately stop operation and invest
137. 11 gt 100 may cause a system oscillation so carefully check the operation on the actual machine For Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control the rated slip of the motor for driving or braking is compensated by P09 or P11 respectively to improve output torque accuracy P10 determines the response time for slip compensation Basically there is no need to modify the default setting If you need to modify it consult your Fuji Electric representatives P99 Motor 1 Selection P99 specifies the motor type to be used Data for P99 Motor type 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 2 Motor characteristics 2 Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors To select the motor drive control or to run the inverter with the integrated automatic control functions such as auto torque boost and torque calculation monitoring it is necessary to specify the motor parameters correctly First select the motor type with P99 Motor 1 selection from Fuji standard motors 8 series 6 series and Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control next specify the motor rated capacity with P02 and then initialize the motor parameters with H03 This process automatically configures the related motor parameters P01 P03 PO6 through P23 P53 through P56 and H46 The data of
138. 11 69 9 58 0 47 0 114 1 30 2 47 9 18 00 1 3 15 00 to 18 49 15 72 1 60 7 49 5 109 0 21 3 37 8 24 55 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 70 7 59 9 48 7 112 1 27 9 47 5 30 28 2 0 22 00 to 29 99 22 68 9 59 1 48 4 114 1 30 2 51 8 36 01 30 00 to 36 99 30 68 7 57 2 45 8 114 8 32 3 53 9 49 10 2 3 37 00 to 44 99 37 65 4 54 2 43 4 112 2 26 4 43 6 60 56 2 5 45 00 to 54 99 45 66 8 55 4 44 4 112 3 26 0 41 8 73 65 1 0 55 00 to 74 99 55 64 7 53 6 43 1 117 2 36 2 57 8 90 02 2 6 75 00 to 89 99 75 64 3 54 2 42 9 114 9 29 8 44 6 122 8 2 8 90 00 to 109 9 90 65 0 54 0 44 0 115 0 30 0 45 0 147 3 3 2 110 0 or above 110 70 7 58 7 47 8 112 2 26 1 42 4 180 0 3 5 Note A box m replaces S or E depending on the enclosure 5 23 Table 5 3 Motor Parameters Continued This table lists the function codes dedicated to motor 1 For motors 2 to 4 replace the function codes with the ones dedicated to the respective motor Three phase 400 V class series for EU FRN__ _G1 l 4E Nominal Rated Magnetic Magnetic cnet anole aea Note fom sax Sl IOS Saturation saturation kW motor A A frequency factor 1 factor 2 kW Hz P02 P03 P06 P07 P08 P12 P13 P16 P17 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 22 0 20 13 79 1 75 1 77 14 00 93 8 87 5 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 35 0 27 12 96 2 67 1 77 14 00 9
139. 21 2 FRN30G1 40 3 26 7 FRN37G1 40 3 33 6 FRN45G1m 40 1 0 FRNS55G18 40 53 5 1 0 75 53 5 2 0 4 0 a FRN75G1 40 tD 67 4 107 2 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1 4E Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 No terminal end treatment is required for connection 2 Use 75 C Cu wire only xiii Table of Contents Preface m Safety precautions Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 Acceptance Inspection 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 3 Precautions for Using Inverters 1 3 1 Precautions in introducing inverters 1 3 2 Precautions in running inverters 1 3 3 Precautions in using special motors Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER 2 1 2 1 Operating Environment 1 2 2 Installing the Inverter 233 Wining fess O AET EOE DROE DEE DOA 2 3 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide cece eee 2 3 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications Recommended wire sizes Wiring precautions Wiring of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches er 2 4 Mountin
140. 3 0 s Overload capability 2 LD 120 1 min 200 to 220 V 50 Hz 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Allowable voltage frequency Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 Frequency 5 to 5 0 6 1 2 2 2 3 1 5 2 7 4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 150 10 to 15 7 to 12 Braking transistor Standard Voltage frequency 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz Required capacity with DCR kVA 6 Input power HD LD HD Torque ip Built in braking resistor Braking time s Duty cycle ED EMC filter Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 Woon Was ta te Tet 30 st 2 or eee oso ee eT 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 To use the inverter with the carrier frequency of 3 kHz or more at the surrounding temperature of 40 C or higher manage the load so that the current comes to be within the rated ones enclosed in parentheses in continuous running 5 Voltage unbalance Max voltage V Min voltage V x 67 IEC 61800 3 Three phase average voltage V f this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 6 Required when
141. 3 3 86 1 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 0 65 0 53 12 95 2 92 2 33 12 60 89 7 81 9 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 1 15 0 83 10 20 13 66 2 40 9 88 88 7 81 3 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 1 80 1 15 8 67 10 76 2 33 7 40 88 3 77 7 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 3 10 1 51 6 55 1 21 2 00 5 85 92 1 82 8 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 4 60 2 43 6 48 10 97 1 80 5 91 85 1 74 6 3 70 to 5 49 4 0 7 50 3 84 5 79 1 25 1 93 5 24 86 0 76 9 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 11 50 5 50 5 28 14 31 1 40 4 75 88 6 79 2 7 50 to 10 99 TS 14 50 6 25 4 50 4 68 1 57 4 03 87 7 80 0 11 00 to 14 99 11 21 00 8 85 3 78 5 09 1 07 3 92 91 3 83 3 15 00 to 18 49 15 27 50 10 00 3 25 6 37 1 13 3 32 90 5 83 5 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 34 00 10 70 2 92 6 58 0 87 3 34 90 7 83 0 22 00 to 29 99 22 39 00 12 60 2 70 6 00 0 90 3 28 89 7 81 3 30 00 to 36 99 30 54 00 19 50 2 64 4 96 0 80 3 10 90 2 81 6 37 00 to 44 99 37 65 00 20 80 2 76 6 41 0 80 2 30 88 7 78 9 45 00 to 54 99 45 78 00 23 80 2 53 6 16 0 80 2 18 89 0 79 7 55 00 to 74 99 55 95 00 29 30 2 35 6 20 0 94 2 45 89 2 79 3 75 00 to 89 99 75 130 0 41 60 1 98 6 89 0 80 2 33 88 1 78 0 90 00 to 109 9 90 155 0 49 60 1 73 6 03 0 80 2 31 88 8 79 0 110 0 or above 110 188 0 45 60 1 99 20 86 0 66 1 73 90 5 82 6 A i Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Torque Motor paled ae Saona agnete sal uration saturation saturation iron anise Starting mode capacity motor factor 3 factor 4 factors ension extension extension vector Auto search kW kW factor a factor b factor c control delay time 2 A P02 P18 P19
142. 3 9 Running Status Display LED No Bit Notation Binary Hexa LED4 LED3 LED2 LED decimal on the LED monitor m Hexadecimal expression A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal 1 hexadecimal digit Table 3 10 shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Table 3 10 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion Binary Hexadecimal Binary Hexadecimal alalualalolololo alalolo Aalolo O Oo 4 oOo o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking Using Menu 4 I O Checking displays the I O status of external signals including digital and analog I O signals without using a measuring instrument Table 3 11 lists check items available The menu transition in Menu 4 I O Checking is shown in Figure 3 4 List of I O check items I O data R By LED segment ON OFF gt o nn MET iais I O status in binary format ALHO Se ALITO 0355 Input status in hex format OUTO AlO FU wu i 1 i t 1 i t i nc e E 1 i i 1 i i 1 i Output status in hex format By LED segment ON OFF I O status in binary format 3595 Input status in hex format OTO Oto OO37 Output
143. 40 FRN1 5G1E 40 FRN2 2G1E 40 FRN3 7G1E 4A FRN4 0G1E 4E FRNS 5G1E 40 FRN7 5G1E 40 FRN11G1E 40 FRN15G1E 40 FRN18 5G1E 40 FRN22G1E 40 FRN30G1E 40 FRN37G1E 40 FRN45G1E 40 FRN55G1E 40 FRN75G1E 40 FRN4 0G1E 4E for the EU in which the nominal applied motor rating is 4 0 kW 1 A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 2 Calculated based on these measuring conditions 240 V 60 Hz grounding of a single wire in delta connection interphase voltage unbalance ratio 2 3 Calculated based on these measuring conditions 480 V 60 Hz neutral grounding in Y connection interphase voltage unbalance ratio 2 9 4 9 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 9 4 1 General comments When you use general purpose industrial inverters in the EU the harmonics emitted from the inverter to power lines are strictly regulated as stated below If an inverter whose rated input is 1 kW or less is connected to public low voltage power supply it is regulated by the harmonics emission regulations from inverters to power lines with the exception of industrial low voltage power lines Refer to Figure 9 4 below for details Medium Voltage Medium to usere low voltage transformer power supply Medium to low voltage transformer S Public low voltage eo User A Industrial low v
144. 4A 200 V class series 60 0 Hz 400 V class series 50 0 Hz FRN___G1 4E 200 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 200 V class series 220 V 400 V class series 415 V 200 V class series 400 V class series 400 V Nominal applied motor capacity Rated current of nominal applied motor Maximum frequency 1 Acceleration time 1 Note Deceleration time 1 Note Machinery design values Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer than your machinery design values If the specified time is short the inverter may not run the motor properly 200 V class series 60 0 Hz 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 200 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 6 00 s 6 00 s When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically updates the data of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 e Specify the rated voltage at base frequency F05 at the normal value although the inverter controls the motor keeping the rated voltage rated voltage at base frequency low under vector control without speed sensor After the auto tuning the inverter automatically reduces the rated voltage at base frequency To drive a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control configure the following basic function codes initialize the motor 1 parameters with the f
145. 5 1 As shown in the graph above the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1 can arbitrarily be determined by points A and B Point A is defined by the combination of the bias F18 and its base point C50 Point B by the combination of the gain C32 C37 or C42 and its base point C34 C39 or C44 The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal 12 that of C37 and C39 to C1 C1 function and that of C42 and C44 to C1 V2 function Configure the bias F18 and gain C32 C37 or C42 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 and the bias base point C50 and gain base point C34 C39 or C44 assuming the full scale 10 VDC or 20 mA DC of analog input as 100 Pe The analog input less than the bias base point C50 is limited by the bias value F18 Cote Specifying that the data of the bias base point C50 is equal to or greater than that of each gain base point C34 C39 or C44 will be interpreted as invalid so the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz Example Setting the bias gain and their base points when the reference frequency 0 to 60 Hz follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal 12 in frequency command 1 Reference frequency Hz Assuming the maximum frequency 4 F03 60 Hz as 100 Gain C32 60 Hz 100 Point B PointA Bias F18 0 Hz 0 Analog input voltage 1V SV 10V l l fi Ana
146. 5 106 2 86 145 53 1 145 M6 M12 11 4 400 V 53 aa DCR4 75C 255 10 225 10642 86 125 53 1 145 M6 M10 12 4 75 LD DCR4 90C 255 10 225 11642 96 140 58 1 145 M6 M12 14 7 Note 1 A box m in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination Note 2 Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DCR to be connected AL F Di D D2 GHEE D3 Po i mE E E s Inverter Ground ing terminal 27 8 x 16 mm for input line provided only on the EMC fil V class ter built in type of 200 V 400 series inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 11 kW Typical example 8 8 e i e 2x 4x gopra pee p eee Mounting ole hole D3 MAX D2 F g 3 1 O ae 3 AE l A 4 y D w D Li DC reactor DCR Chapter 9 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS 9 1 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL certification 9 1 1 General Originally the UL standards were established by Underwri
147. 50 to 21 99 18 5 33 03 11 10 2 73 15 52 0 87 3 34 90 7 83 0 22 00 to 29 99 22 37 90 13 07 2 53 14 99 0 90 3 28 89 7 81 3 30 00 to 36 99 30 52 59 20 23 2 48 14 04 0 80 3 10 90 2 81 6 37 00 to 44 99 37 63 16 21 58 2 58 15 37 0 80 2 30 88 7 78 9 45 00 to 54 99 45 75 73 24 69 2 37 15 12 0 80 2 18 89 0 79 7 55 00 to 74 99 55 92 26 30 40 2 20 15 16 0 94 2 45 89 2 79 3 75 00 to 89 99 75 126 3 43 16 1 85 15 82 0 80 2 33 88 1 78 0 90 00 to 109 9 90 150 5 51 46 1 62 15 00 0 80 2 31 88 8 79 0 110 0 or above 110 182 0 47 31 1 86 19 47 0 66 1 73 90 5 82 6 i Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Torque Motor Pople Magnate sareno Mace satiation sa Gain sa raon durent under Starting mode capacity motor factor3 factor 4 factor 5 extension exi ension exi ension vector Auto search kW kW factor a factor b factor c control delay time 2 A P02 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P55 H46 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 75 0 62 5 50 0 106 3 12 5 18 8 0 10 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 74 4 63 6 50 7 108 8 18 7 29 6 0 16 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 66 9 54 5 43 3 111 0 29 3 48 4 0 33 05 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 67 0 55 2 43 8 112 1 26 5 44 3 0 65 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 62 6 51 8 41 1 112 4 29 2 48 4 1 23 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 71 1 58 1 46 2 111 4 26 1 43 9 2 46 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 61 7 50 3 39 8 115 7 33 5 50 6 3 60 0 6 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 61 3 49 5 39 1 115 6 33 2 54 1 6 06 0 8 5 50 to 7 49 55 64 9 52 7 41 8 114 3 33 1 55 6 9 00 1 0 7 50 to 10 99 75 67 1 56 1 45 6 111 7 28 4 49 2 12 28 1 2 11 00 to 14 99
148. 98 Maintenance operation back to the default setting Bit 3 Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor 0 and conduct the measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment 3 Early warning of lifetime alarm For the components listed in Table 7 3 the inverter can issue an early warning of lifetime alarm LIFE at one of the transistor output terminals Y1 to Y4 and the relay contact terminals Y5A Y5C and 30A B C as soon as any of the levels specified in Table 7 3 has been exceeded The early warning signal is also turned ON when a lock condition on the internal air circulation DC fan provided on 200 V class series inverters with a capacity of 45 kW or above on 400 V class series inverters with a capacity of 75 kW or above has been detected 7 6 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit Because the voltage and current of the power supply input primary circuit of the main circuit of the inverter and those of the motor output secondary circuit contain harmonic components the readings may vary with the type of the meter Use meters indicated in Table 7 4 when measuring with meters for commercial frequencies The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power factor meter that measures the phase difference between the voltage and current To obtain the power factor measure the power voltage and current on each of the input and output sides and use the following
149. CC DEC a z lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt z lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt A14 Drive Control Selection 2 V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active Vector control without speed sensor 6 Vector control with speed sensor NES A15 A16 A17 Motor 2 No of poles Rated capacity Rated current 2 to 22 poles Y1 Y2 0 01 to 1000 kW when A39 0 2 3 or 4 0 01 to 1000 HP when A39 1 Y1 Y2 7 0 00 to 2000 A Y1 Y2 Z A 3 4 5 7 The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table 5 1 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table 5 2 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table 5 3 function code P03 5 0 min for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 10 0 min for those with 30 kW or above The motor constant is automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table 5 3 5 13 Drive 5 control D gt SP we i ws Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range geej we x
150. E10 through E15 and H56 4 Overload Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the overload early warning E34 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated In winter the load tends to increase 5 Excessive torque boost Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 does not stall the motor specified F09 gt If no stall occurs decrease the F09 data 15 O u Inverter overload Problem Temperature inside inverter has risen abnormally Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded the inverter s specification range What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted Excessive torque boost specified F09 Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 does not stall the motor gt If no stall occurs decrease the F09 data The specified acceleration deceleration time was too short Recalculate the acceleration deceleration torque and time needed for the load based on the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 and H56 4 Overload Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the overload early warning E34 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated
151. F hex Y Y 0 Y VYA Y 5 76 H84 Pre excitation Initial level 100 to 400 T X 100 N YJ Y H85 Time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s Y y 000 N YJ Y H86 Reserved 9 Oto2 Y Y 1 2 O 11 5 H87 Reserved 9 25 0 to 500 0 Hz Ny Y 25 0 7 H88 Reserved 9 0 to 3 999 Y N 0 H89 Reserved 9 0 1 W Y 0 H90 Reserved 9 0 1 y Y 0 H91 PID Feedback Wire Break Detection 0 0 Disable alarm detection Y Y 00 Y Y IY 0 1 to 60 0 s H92 Continuity of Running P 0 000 to 10 000 times 999 Y Y1Y 2 999 Y Y Y H93 I 0 010 to 10 000 s 999 Y Y1Y2 99 Y Y Y H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 0 to 9999 The cumulative run time can be modified or reset N N m y y Y 575 in units of 10 hours H95 DC Braking 0 Slow bd Y 1 Y N N 5 42 Braking response mode 1 Quick H96 STOP Key Priority Data STOP key priority Start check function PN o lyly y Start Check Function 0 Disable Disable A Enable Disable 2 Disable Enable 3 Enable Enable 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 10 0 10 for 200 V class series of inverters with a capacity of 37 kW or above 11 2 for 200 V class series of inverters with a capacity of 37 kW or above 5 12 Code H97 Name Clear Alarm Data Data setting range 0 Disable 1 Enable Setting 1 clears ala
152. F09 Torque boost 1 H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time and F11 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level depends on the motor capacity refer to Table 5 2 but the process stated above does not change them Specify and adjust the data during a test run if needed H03 Data Initialization HO3 initializes the current function code data to the factory defaults or initializes the motor parameters To change the H03 data it is necessary to press the 6 A keys or 0 keys simultaneous keying er Function 0 Disable initialization Settings manually made by the user will be retained 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults 2 Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 Rated capacity and P99 Motor 1 selection 3 Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 Rated capacity and A39 Motor 2 selection 4 Initialize motor 3 parameters in accordance with b16 Rated capacity and b39 Motor 3 selection 5 Initialize motor 4 parameters in accordance with r16 Rated capacity and r39 Motor 4 selection To initialize the motor parameters set the related function codes as follows Function code Step Item Action 1st motor 2nd motor 3rd motor 4th motor 1 Motor selection Selects the motor type P99 A39 b39 r39 Motor Sets the motor capacity 2 P02 A16 b16 r16 2 rated capacity kW
153. F41 E16 and E17 or reset them to the factory defaults gt Set the TL2 TL1 correctly gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 8 The specified acceleration or deceleration time was incorrect Check the terminal commands RT1 and RT2 for acceleration deceleration times gt Correct the RT1 and RT2 settings 7 The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure Possible Causes 1 The data of function code F14 is either 0 1 or o What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if an undervoltage trip u occurs gt Change the data of function code F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection to 3 4 or 5 2 The run command remains OFF even after the power has been restored Check the input signal with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit If necessary consider the use of a relay that can keep the run command ON In 3 wire operation the power to the control printed circuit board control PCB has been shut down once because of a long momentary power failure time or the Enable 3 wire operation signal HOLD has been turned OFF once gt Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be issued again within 2 seconds after the power has been restored 8 The motor abnormally heats up Possible Causes 1
154. FO Instruction Manual High Performance Multifunction Inverter FRENIC MEGA ACAUTION Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC MEGA series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with the handling procedure for correct use Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Deliver this manual to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded For how to use an optional device refer to the instruction and installation manuals for that optional device Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd INR S147 1223a E Copyright 2007 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement Preface Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC MEGA series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with proper handling and operation of this product Improper
155. G Table 6 1 m How to check a light alarm factor Programming mode by pressing the key and select 5_ 36 on Menu 5 Maintenance Information It is also possible to check the factors of the last three light alarms 5_ 37 last to 5_ 39 3rd last For details of the menu transition of the maintenance information refer to Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information When a light alarm occurs a Bey on the LED monitor To check the current light alarm factor enter m How to remove the current light alarm After checking the current light alarm factor to switch the LED monitor back to the running status display e g output frequency from the a indication press the Gay key in Running mode If the light alarm factor has been removed the KEYPAD CONTROL LED stops blinking and the LALM signal turns OFF If not e g DC fan lock the KEYPAD CONTROL LED continues blinking and the LALM signal remains ON 3 5 3 4 Programming Mode The Programming mode provides you with these functions setting and checking function code data monitoring maintenance information and checking input output I O signal status The functions can be easily selected with the menu driven system Table 3 4 lists menus available in Programming mode The leftmost digit numerals of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents When the inverter enters Programmin
156. G1m 40 HD 10 2 2 FRN2 2G1m 20 20 2 2 FRN2 2G1m 40 15 3 7 _ FRN3 7G1m 20 20 30 3 7 FRN3 7G1m 4A 10 20 55 FRN5 5G1m 20 E 30 50 a FRNAOGY m 4E m a 7 5 HD 40 75 FRN5 5G1m 40 LD FRN7 5G1m 20 D 75 HD 20 40 x 11 HD 50 100 FRN7 5G1m 40 LD o FRN11G1 20 11 30 50 amp 15 a 75 125 gt FRN11G1m 40 2 g FRN15G1m 20 HD s 15 7 60 amp 185 HD 150 FRN15G1 401 ID 40 b FRN18 5G1m 20 D 100 8 18 5 AD 75 22 HD 175 a FRN18 5G1m 40 5 FRN22G1m 20 2 22 HD 50 100 30 p 150 200 E FRN22G1 40 LD FRN30G1m 20 5 30 AD 75 37 HD 175 250 FRN3OG1 40 LD 125 FRN37G1m 20 D 37 HD 45 HD 200 300 FRN37G1m 40 LD 100 FRN45G1 20 D 45 HD 150 55 HD 250 350 FRN45G1m 40 LD FRN55G1 20 55 125 200 I a e Pe i FRN55G1m 40 HOD 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1 4E 75 ED 175 Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the FRN75G1 40 HD enclosure 90 LD 200 A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 5 6 a amp AWARNING If no zero phase current earth leakage current detective device such as a ground fault relay is installed in the upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system s shutdown undesirable to factory operation install a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB individually to inverters to break the individual inverter power supply lines only Otherwise
157. H79 This function applies to motor 1 only The display method is the same as for 5_ 08 above Light alarm factor Latest Shows the factor of the latest light alarm as an alarm code For details refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Functions Light alarm factor Last Shows the factor of the last light alarm as an alarm code For details refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Functions Light alarm factor 2nd last Shows the factor of the 2nd last light alarm as an alarm code For details refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Functions Light alarm factor 3rd last Shows the factor of the 3rd last light alarm as an alarm code For details refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Functions Option error factor 1 Shows the factor of the error that has occurred in the option being connected to the A port Number of option errors 2 Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in the option being connected to the B port Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 Option error factor 2 Shows the factor of the error that has occurred in the option being connected to the B port Number of option errors 3 Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in the option being connected to the C port Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 Option error factor 3 Shows the
158. Hz1 Hz PID IVS and LE may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed An accident or injuries could occur Maintenance and inspection and parts replacement A WARNING Before proceeding to the maintenance inspection jobs turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Otherwise an electric shock could occur Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work Use insulated tools Otherwise an electric shock or injuries could occur Never modify the inverter Doing so could cause an electric shock or injuries Disposal ACAUTION Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it Otherwise injuries could occur GENERAL PRECAUTIONS Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts Restore the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting operation Icons The fo llowing icon
159. NIC MEGA drives the motor under V f control vector control with speed sensor or other drive control which can be selected with function codes To use the integrated automatic control functions such as auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving operation torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector control droop control and overload stop it is necessary to build a motor model in the inverter by specifying proper motor parameters including the motor capacity and rated current Specify the motor parameters correctly referring to this section and Chapter 4 Section 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test The FRENIC MEGA provides built in motor parameters for Fuji standard motors 8 series 6 series and Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control To use these Fuji motors it is enough to specify motor parameters for P99 Motor 1 Selection If the cabling between the inverter and the motor is long generally 20 m or longer or a reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter however the apparent motor parameters are different from the actual ones so auto tuning or other adjustments are necessary For the auto tuning procedure refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test When using a motor made by other manufacturers or a Fuji non standard motor obtain the datasheet of the motor and specify the motor p
160. Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Shielded Wire Functions Capacitor gt 13 lt Control Circuit gt External Analog Output Device 0 022 u F 50V lt Control Circuit gt 12 12 D 11 1kto5kQ Figure 2 11 Connection of Shielded Wire 11 Ferrite Core Pass the same phase wires through or turn them around the ferrite core 2 or 3 times Figure 2 12 Example of Electric Noise Reduction Digital input 1 1 Digi inpu Digi inpu Digi inpu Digi inpu Digi input 6 Digi input 7 Run forward command Run Digital input circuit specifications Various signals such as Coast to a stop Enable external alarm trip and Select multi frequency can be assigned to terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV by setting function codes E01 to E07 E98 and E99 For details refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Details of Function Codes Input mode i e SINK SOURCE is changeable by using the slide switch SW1 Refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches The factory default for FRN_ _ __G1M 2A 4A is SINK and for FRN__ _G1 l 4E SOURCE Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals X1 to X7 FWD or REV If the logic value for ON of the terminal X1 is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vic
161. P02 A16 b16 r16 Rated current POS A17 b17 r17 Auto tuning P04 A18 b18 r18 No load current P06 A20 b20 r20 R1 P07 A21 b21 r21 X P08 A22 b22 r22 Slip compensation gain for driving P09 A23 b23 123 Y Slip compensation response time P10 A24 b24 r24 Y Slip compensation gain for braking P11 A25 b25 r25 Y Rated slip frequency P12 A26 b26 r26 Iron loss factor 1 P13 A27 b27 r27 Iron loss factor 2 P14 A28 b28 r28 Iron loss factor 3 P15 A29 b29 r29 Magnetic saturation factor 1 P16 A30 b30 r30 Magnetic saturation factor 2 P17 A31 b31 r31 Magnetic saturation factor 3 P18 A32 b32 r32 Magnetic saturation factor 4 P19 A33 b33 r33 Magnetic saturation factor 5 P20 A34 b34 r34 Magnetic saturation extension factor a P21 A35 b35 r35 Magnetic saturation extension factor b P22 A36 b36 r36 Magnetic saturation extension factor c P23 A37 b37 r37 Motor selection P99 A39 b39 r39 Slip compensation Operating conditions H68 A40 b40 r40 Y Output current fluctuation damping gain for motor H80 A41 b41 r41 Y Speed control Speed command filter d01 A43 b43 r43 Y Speed detection filter d02 A44 b44 r44 Y P Gain d03 A45 b45 r45 Y Integral time d04 A46 b46 r46 Y Output filter d06 A48 b48 r48 Y Reserved d51 d52 d53 d54 Cumulative motor run time H94 A51 b51 r51 Startup counter for motor H44 A52 b52 r52 Motor X correction factor 1 P53 A53 b53 r53 X correction factor 2 P54 A54 b54 r54 Torque current under vector
162. Stop frequency 1 frequency Holding time Holding time F24 F39 Starting Ie Stop frequency 1 1 1 1 1 frequency l i F25 F23 gt Time Inverter Out of running F Out of running running state Gate OFF In running Gate ON Gate OFF Time F26 Motor Sound Carrier frequency F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself and to decrease a leakage current from the main output secondary wirings Item Characteristics Remarks 0 4 to 55 kW HD mode 0 75 to 16 kH CORSE 5 5 to 18 5 kW LD mode trier frequenc 75 kW HD m E AN nena a to ai kw NERT 0 75 to 6 kHz 75 kW LD mode Motor sound noise emission High lt gt Low Motor temperature due to harmonics components High lt gt Low Ripples in output current waveform Large lt gt Small Leakage current Low lt gt High Electromagnetic noise emission Low lt High Inverter loss Low lt gt High a Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to have a large Note amount of ripples As a result the motor loss increases causing the motor temperature to rise Furthermore the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below therefore reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80
163. The UP command any of E01 to E07 17 and DOWN command any of E01 to E07 18 should be assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X7 For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 8 Enable A Q keys on the keypad balanceless bumpless switching available 11 Enable a digital input interface card option 12 Enable the PIN command assigned to digital input terminal X7 The PIN command any of E01 to E07 48 should be assigned to digital input terminal X7 For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 Tin Using the terminal command Hz2 Hz7 assigned to one of the digital input terminals switches ne Qi between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 Refer to function codes E01 through E07 E Setting up a reference frequency Using the keypad F01 0 factory default or 8 1 Set F01 data to 0 or 8 This can be done only when the inverter is in Running mode 2 Press the WO key to display the current reference frequency The lowest digit on the LED monitor will blink 3 To change the reference frequency press the WO key again To save the new setting into the inverter s memory press the key when E64 1 factory default When the power is turned ON next time the new setting will be used as an initial reference frequency C ip f e In addition to the saving with the key described above auto saving is also available wh
164. The display method is the same as for 5 23 above LED Monitor shows Table 3 15 Display Items in Maintenance Information Continued Cumulative run time of motor 4 Description Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of motor 4 The display method is the same as for 5_ 23 above Remaining time before the next motor 1 maintenance Shows the time remaining before the next maintenance which is estimated by subtracting the cumulative run time of motor 1 from the maintenance interval specified by H78 This function applies to motor 1 only Display range Oto 9999 The x10 LED turns ON Time remaining before the next maintenance hour Displayed value x 10 Number of startups 2 Shows the content of the motor 2 startup counter i e the number of run commands issued The display method is the same as for 5_ 08 above Number of startups 3 Shows the content of the motor 3 startup counter i e the number of run commands issued The display method is the same as for 5 08 above Number of startups 4 Shows the content of the motor 4 startup counter i e the number of run commands issued The display method is the same as for 5_ 08 above Remaining startup times before the next maintenance Shows the startup times remaining before the next maintenance which is estimated by subtracting the number of startups from the preset startup count for maintenance specified by
165. USB Connectivity The keypad has a USB port mini B connector on its face To connect a USB cable open the USB port cover as shown below USB port cover Connecting the inverter to a PC with a USB cable enables remote control from FRENIC Loader On the PC running FRENIC Loader it is possible to edit check manage and monitor the function code data in real time to start or stop the inverter and to monitor the running or alarm status of the inverter QJ For the instructions on how to use the FRENIC Loader refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual In addition using the keypad as a temporary storage media allows you to store the running status information in the keypad detach the keypad from the inverter connect it to a PC running FRENIC Loader at an office or off site place 2 For details on how to store data into the keypad refer to Section 3 4 8 Data copying Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test 4 1 1 Test run procedure Make a test run of the motor using the flowchart given below This chapter describes the test run procedure with motor 1 dedicated function codes that are marked with an asterisk For motors 2 to 4 replace those asterisked function codes with respective motor dedicated ones Refer to Chapter 5 Table 5 7 4 For the function codes dedicated to motors 2 to 4 see Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES Stat Mount the inverter perform wiring and set up slide switches
166. V IVI Cancel PG alarm PG CCL NIN Y Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal E10 Acceleration Time 2 0 00 to 6000 s Y Y ne Y Y Y 5 30 E11 Deceleration Time 2 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring Y Y 2 Y Y Y 5 30 E12 Acceleration Time 3 external soft start and stop YY 2 Yy Yy Y 530 E13 Deceleration Time 3 Y Y me Y Y Y 5 30 E14 Acceleration Time 4 Y Y 2 Y Y Y 5 30 E15 Deceleration Time 4 Y Y 2 Y Y Y 5 30 E16 Torque Limiter 2 1 300 to 300 999 Disable Y 999 Y Y Y 5 47 E17 Torque Limiter 2 2 300 to 300 999 Disable Li Y 99 Yy Y Y 5 47 2 6 00 s for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 20 00 s for those with 30 kW or above 5 5 Drive S control 5 2 sE Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range 25 8 amp setting wo w page E 8 vi Pa pa E20 Terminal Y1 Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding N Y 0 5 62 E21_ Terminal Y2 Function function to terminals Y1 to YSA C and 30A B C as listed N Y 1 5 62 E22 Terminal Y3 Function below N Y 2 5 62 E23 _ Terminal Y4 Function 0 1000 Inverter running i RUN N yY 7 Y Y Y 562 E24 Terminal Y5A C Function i nooi i Frequeney epee ie a N oY 45 y y 5 62 A i Frequency speed detecte Em Eeg
167. a 30A B C Funetion Relay Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU N Y 99 YIY Y eee Torque polarity detected B D TEY 5 1005 Inverter output limiting IOL YOY OY 6 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF Y YY 7 1007 Motor overload early warning OL Y Y Y 8 1008 Keypad operation enabled KP YIY Y 10 1010 Inverter ready to run _ _Lnn ey Ltd ii Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output pee Eor MG on commercialiiins ___ SW5e fe YN ON 12 Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output EEE ror secondaty side SW92 7 akisi CNN 13 Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output eae bees ECIN N KESSE ee ES SCANN 22 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay IOL2 Yr Yory 25 1025 Cooling fan in operation FAN YY LY 26 1026 Auto resetting TRY Your YoY 27 1027 Universal DO U DO Yo Yo Y 28 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning OH Y YY 30 1030 Lifetime alarm LIFE YJYJ Y 31 1031 Frequency speed detected 2 FDT2 b a es Gal 33 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF Y Y Y 35 1035 Inverter output on RUN2 YoY LY 36 1036 Overload prevention control OLP CY Y 37 1037 Current detected ID Bal a all 38 1038 Current detected 2 ID2 YY Y 39 1039 Current detected 3 ID3 Yo Y 41 1041 Low current detected IDL YY Y 42 1042 PID alarm PID ALM yilyl
168. ability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor and configuring the function code data When using any non Fuji braking resistor inquire of the resistor manufacturer about the resistor rating and then configure the related function codes The calculation procedures for the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor differ depending on the application of the braking load as shown below Applying braking load during deceleration In usual deceleration the braking load decreases as the speed slows down In the deceleration with constant torque the braking load decreases in proportion to the speed Use Expressions 1 and 3 given below Applying braking load during running at a constant speed Different from during deceleration in applications where the braking load is externally applied during running at a constant speed the braking load is constant Use Expressions 2 and 4 given below Braking load kW Braking load kW gt Time Time Applying braking load Applying braking load during deceleration during running at a constant speed Em Discharging capability F50 The discharging capability refers to kWs allowable for a single braking cycle which is obtained based on the braking time and the motor rated capacity Data for F50 Function 0 To be applied to the braking resistor built in type 1 to 9000 1 to 9000 kWs OFF Disable the electronic thermal overload protection
169. agnetic Torque Motor Sooo bie eee Loe ee ini sa uration sa uration saturation arrea under Starting mode capacity motor factor 3 factor 4 factor 5 extension ex ension extension vector Auto search kW kW factor a factor b factor c control delay time 2 A P02 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P55 H46 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 75 0 62 5 50 0 06 3 12 5 118 8 0 19 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 74 4 63 6 50 7 08 8 18 7 129 6 0 31 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 66 9 54 5 43 3 1 0 129 3 148 4 0 62 05 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 67 0 55 2 43 8 2 1 126 5 144 3 1 23 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 62 6 51 8 41 1 2 4 129 2 148 4 2 32 1 50 to 2 19 15 714 58 1 46 2 1 4 126 1 143 9 4 63 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 61 7 50 3 39 8 5 7 133 5 150 6 6 79 0 6 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 61 3 49 5 39 1 5 6 133 2 154 1 11 42 0 8 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 64 9 52 7 41 8 4 3 133 1 155 6 16 98 1 0 7 50 to 10 99 75 67 1 56 1 45 6 157 128 4 149 2 23 16 1 2 11 00 to 14 99 11 69 9 58 0 47 0 114 1 130 2 147 9 33 96 1 3 15 00 to 18 49 15 72 1 60 7 49 5 09 0 121 3 137 8 46 31 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 70 7 59 9 48 7 21 127 9 147 5 57 12 2 0 22 00 to 29 99 22 68 9 59 1 48 4 114 1 130 2 151 8 67 92 30 00 to 36 99 30 68 7 57 2 45 8 114 8 132 3 153 9 92 62 2 3 37 00 to 44 99 37 65 4 54 2 43 4 112 2 126 4 143 6 114 2 25 45 00 to 54 99 45 66 8 55 4 44 4 2 3 126 0 141 8 138 9 55 00 to 74 99 55 64 7 53 6 43 1 7 2 136 2 157 8 169 8 2 6 75 00 to 89 99 75 64 3 54 2 42 9 4 9 129 8 144 6 231 6 2 8 90 00 to 109 9 90 65 0 54 0 44 0 5 0 130 0 145 0 277 9 3 2 110
170. ain and bias to analog inputs voltage inputs to terminals 12 and V2 and current input to terminal C1 enables the frequency to be set within an arbitrary range frequency vs analog input level Refer to the description of F18 e Noise reduction filters are applicable to these analog inputs For details refer to the descriptions of C33 C38 and C43 The normal inverse operation for the frequency command 1 setting F01 can be selected with function code C53 and be switched between them with the terminal command IVS assigned to any of the digital input terminals For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 4 _ To input bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminals 12 and V2 set C35 and C45 data rote to 0 Setting C35 and C45 data to 1 enables the voltage range from 0 to 10 VDC and interprets the negative polarity input from 0 to 10 VDC as 0 V Areference frequency can be specified not only with the frequency Hz but also with other menu items depending on the setting of function code E48 3 to 5 or 7 F02 Operation Method F02 selects the source that specifies a run command Data for F02 Run Command Source Description 0 Keypad Enables the un 1E keys to run and stop the motor Rotation direction The rotation direction of the motor is specified by terminal specified by terminal command FWD or REV command 1 External signal Enables terminal command FWD or REV to run t
171. an inverter the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency 1 specified by F23 The inverter stops its output when the output frequency reaches the stop frequency specified by F25 Set the starting frequency to a level at which the motor can generate enough torque for startup Generally set the motor s rated slip frequency as the starting frequency In addition F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 in order to compensate for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the motor F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency in order to stabilize the motor speed at the stop of the inverter E Starting frequency 1 F23 F23 specifies the starting frequency at the startup of an inverter Under V f control even if the starting frequency is set at 0 0 Hz the inverter starts at 0 1 Hz m Starting frequency 1 Holding time F24 F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 m Stop frequency F25 F25 specifies the stop frequency at the stop of the inverter Under V f control even if the stop frequency is set at 0 0 Hz the inverter stops at 0 1 Hz 5 43 E Stop frequency Holding time F39 F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency i Ifthe starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency the inverter will not output any power as Note at long as the reference frequency does not exceed the stop frequency Output frequency Starting
172. analog input and output signals common These terminals are electrically isolated from terminals CM and CMY Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Transistor 1 Various signals such as inverter running speed freq arrival and overload early output 1 warning can be assigned to any terminals Y1 to Y4 by setting function code E20 to E24 Refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Details of Function Codes for details 2 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between Y1 to Y4 and CMY If the logic value for ON between Y1 to Y4 and CMY is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Transistor output 2 Transistor Transistor output circuit specification output 3 lt Control circuit gt Photocoupler Current kem Operation ON level voltage OFF level Maximum current at ON Leakage current at OFF Figure 2 16 Transistor Output Circuit Figure 2 17 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a PLC Transistor DNota When a transistor output drives a control relay connect a surge absorbing Note N an output 4 S diode across relay s coil terminals When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be supplied with DC power feed the p
173. ar the inverter To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter s programmable output terminals by the protective function or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down connect these terminals to the power supply lines Without power supply to these terminals the inverter can run Normally no need to be connected Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power factor regenerative PWM converter RHC series When connecting an optional DC reactor DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Use a DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity or when there are thyristor driven loads in the same power supply line Inverters with a capacity of 7 5 kW or below have a built in braking resistor DBR between the terminals P and DB When connecting an external braking resistor DBR be sure to disconnect the built in one A grounding terminal for a motor Use this terminal if needed For control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of them to the common terminals of the control circuit To prevent malfunction due to noise keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring
174. arameters manually or perform auto tuning To specify the motor parameters correctly select the motor type with P99 Motor 1 Selection specify the motor rated capacity with P02 and then initialize the motor parameters with HO3 This procedure also applies when the inverter is switched to the LD mode and a motor with one rank higher capacity is used When switching the motor between the 1st to 4th motors specify the corresponding function codes Refer to the description of A42 Usually it is not necessary to specify the motor parameters with P13 through P56 such as iron loss factors and magnetic saturation factors for individual motors P01 Motor 1 No of poles P01 specifies the number of poles of the motor Enter the value given on the nameplate of the motor This setting is used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor and to control the speed refer to E43 The following expression is used for the conversion 120 Motor speed r min No of poles x Frequency Hz Data setting range 2 to 22 poles P02 Motor 1 Rated capacity P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor Data for P02 Unit Function kW When P99 Motor 1 Selection 0 2 3 or 4 HP When P99 Motor 1 Selection 1 0 01 to 1000 When accessing function code P02 with the keypad take into account that the P02 data automatically updates the data of function c
175. arameters subjected to tuning Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 Tuning type Tuning with the motor being stopped Selection condition of tuning type Cannot rotate the motor If the tuning while the motor is rotating under vector control P04 3 cannot be selected due to restrictions on the machinery refer to the m If tuning while the motor is rotating cannot be selected Drive control abbreviation V f V f control w o PG vector control without speed sensor and w PG vector control with speed sensor Drive control Vit w o PG w PG Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c P16 to P23 X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 Tuning the R1 and X with the motor being stopped Tuning the no load current and magnetic saturation factor with the motor running at 50 of the base frequency Tuning the rated slip frequency again with the motor being stopped Can rotate the motor provided that it is safe Note that little load should be applied during tuning Tuning with load applied decreases the tuning accuracy Tune while the motor is rotating
176. ariety of information relating to the inverter status and maintenance If an alarm condition arises the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode in which you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related information on the LED monitor Alarm mode Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition For details first see Table 6 1 Abnormal States Detectable Heavy Alarm and Light Alarm Objects in Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Functions and then read the troubleshooting of each alarm Running mode Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes Power ON Running mode Programming mode Configuration of function code data and monitor of maintenance alarm info and various status A j Run Stop of motor l l 4 Detection of Release of i a light alarm a light alarm yf l De i Run Stop of motor i i I I I I ee R i d P r H Press this key if 7 an alarm has H occurred I Ul Occurrence of Release of H F aheavy alarm N s aheavy alarm l A I Pa I I I Alarm mode Display of alarm status Figure 3 1 Status Transition between Operation Modes Tip Simultaneous keying Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a letter between the keys throughout this manual For example the expression o
177. arted again from the ordinary starting frequency Therefore ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a recovery of power or install a mechanical latch relay When run commands are entered via the keypad the above operation is also necessary for the mode F02 0 in which the rotational direction is determined by the terminal command FWD or REV In the modes where the rotational direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 it is retained inside the inverter so that the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready to run state 5 36 Power failure Recovery DC link bus voltage E EREA Undervoltage level No power i Time reserved for restart re IS about 0 3 to 0 6 s Gate ON command Gate OFF _ _ Ready to run State of the inverter i ae a Waiting for run command Run command ON ON 4 Restart When the power is restored the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run command Note However if the allowable momentary power failure time H16 elapses after the power failure was recognized even within the 2 seconds the restart time for a run command is canceled The inverter will start operation in the normal starting sequence If the Coast to a stop terminal command BX is entered during the power failure the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode If a run command is entered with power supply applied
178. as far as possible recommended 10 cm or more Never install them in the same wire duct When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring set them at right angles The connection diagram shows factory default functions assigned to digital input terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV transistor output terminals Y1 to Y4 and relay contact output terminals Y5A C and 30A B C 10 Switching connectors in the main circuits For details refer to Switching connectors later in this section 11 Slide switches on the control printed circuit board control PCB Use these switches to customize the inverter operations For details refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches 12 When using the Enable input function be sure to remove the jumper wire from terminals EN and PLC For opening and closing the hardware circuit between terminals EN and PLC use safety components such as safety relays and safety switches that comply with EN954 1 Category 3 or higher Be sure to use shielded wires exclusive to terminals EN and PLC Do not put them together with any other control signal wire in the same shielded core Ground the shielding layer For details refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 6 Compliance with EN954 1 Category 3 When not using the Enable input function keep the terminals between EN and PLC short circuited with the jumper wire factory default Primary grounding terminal G f
179. ata 24 Turning this terminal command ON gives priorities to frequency commands or run commands received via the RS 485 communications link H30 or the fieldbus option y98 No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON Refer to the descriptions of H30 Communications link function and y98 Bus link function Universal DI U DI Function code data 25 Using U DI enables the inverter to monitor digital signals sent from the peripheral equipment via an RS 485 communications link or a fieldbus option by feeding those signals to the digital input terminals Signals assigned to the universal DI are simply monitored and do not operate the inverter LL For an access to universal DI via the RS 485 or fieldbus communications link refer to their respective Instruction Manuals m Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM Function code data 26 This digital terminal command determines at the start of operation whether or not to search for idling motor speed and follow it Refer to the description of H09 m Force to stop STOP Function code data 30 Turning this terminal command OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop in accordance with the H56 data Deceleration time for forced stop After the motor stops the inverter enters the alarm state with the alarm er 6 displayed E Pre excitation EXITE Function code data 32 Turning EXCITE ON activates the pre exciting feature Eve
180. ating note For LD mode inverters set the maximum frequency at 120 Hz or below Under vector control with speed sensor set the maximum frequency at 200 Hz or below and under vector control without speed sensor at 120 Hz or below AAWARNING The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur No _ Modifying F03 data to allow a higher reference frequency requires also changing F15 data specifying a frequency limiter high F04 to F06 Base Frequency 1 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 Maximum Output Voltage 1 H50 to H530H650H66 Non linear V f Pattern 1 2 and 3 Frequency and Voltage These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essentially required for running the motor properly If combined with the related function codes H50 through H53 H65 and H66 these function codes may profile the non linear V f pattern by specifying increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V f pattern The following description includes setups required for the non linear V f pattern At high frequencies the motor impedance may increase resulting in an insufficient output voltage and a decrease in output torque To prevent this problem use F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 to increase the voltage Note however that the inverter cannot output voltag
181. ation running Validating and saving function code data If the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with S and keys the change will immediately take effect however the change is not saved into the inverter s memory To save the change press the key If you press the key without pressing the key to exit the current state then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation Possible Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with O and Q keys Possible the change will not take effect Pressing the G3 key will make the change take effect and save it into the inverter s memory Impossible Ta m Copying data The keypad is capable of copying of the function code data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory refer to Menu 7 Data copying in Programming mode With this feature you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ some code data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copying column of the function code tables given on page 5 3 and subsequent pages Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated in
182. ato P 3 03 i i T i i i 1 i i i 1 i l i i i 1 l i i l i 3265 he gt A Not used Figure 3 3 Menu Transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Basic key operation To monitor the running status in Drive monitoring set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example fn is displayed 2 Use the A and keys to display Drive Monitoring ope 3 Press the amp amp key to proceed to a list of monitoring items e g 3_ 00 4 Use the O and Q keys to display the desired monitoring item then press the key The running status information for the selected item appears 5 Press the key to return to the list of monitoring items Press the key again to return to the menu LED monitor shows Output frequency Table 3 6 Drive Monitoring Display Items Description Output frequency before slip compensation Output frequency Output frequency after slip compensation Output current Output current Output voltage Output voltage Calculated torque Calculated output torque of the motor in Reference frequency Frequency specified by a frequency command Rotational direction Rotational direction being outputted f forward r reverse Running
183. bled H12 1 Power failure Recovery F14 4 DC link bus Undervoltage voltage H i gt i i Searching for i motor speed Output H frequency i Sei ret Motor speed Acceleration m Auto restarting after i momentary power failure ON IPF i Time m m Restart mode after momentary power failure Allowable momentary power failure time H16 H16 specifies the maximum allowable duration 0 0 to 30 0 seconds from an occurrence of a momentary power failure undervoltage until the inverter is to be restarted Specify the coast to stop time during which the machine system and facility can be tolerated If the power is restored within the specified duration the inverter restarts in the restart mode specified by F14 If the power is restored after the specified duration the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting Power Failure Recovery DC Link Bus Voltage Time Reserved for Restart About 0 3 to 0 6 s State of the Inverter Gate Signal ON Ready to Run Run Command Operation Case 1 on pi Restart Run Command i Operation Case 2 a Hig s ON Start of Normal Running If H16 Allowable momentary power failure time is set to 999 restart will take place until the DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart afte
184. blinking any of the following problems has arisen e The function codes stored in the keypad and ones registered in the inverter are not compatible with each other Either of the two may have been revised or upgraded in a non standard or incompatible manner Consult your Fuji Electric representative 3 5 Alarm Mode If an abnormal condition arises the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm then the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode At the same time an alarm code appears on the LED monitor E Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the es key to release the alarm and return to Running mode The alarm can be removed using the key only when the alarm code is displayed E Displaying the alarm history It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the AO key while the current alarm code is displayed E Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm When the alarm code is displayed you may check various running status information output frequency and output current etc by pressing the E key The item number and data for each running information will be displayed alternately Further you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the A Q key The information displayed is the same as for Menu 6 Alarm Info
185. box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series HD and LD mode inverters 3 7 Type FRN___G1S 40 0410 75 15 22 gon 55 75 11 15 185 22 30 37 45 55 75 Nominal applied motor kW 2 Rated capacity kVA i 5 10 14 3 12 17 Rated voltage Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function 15 25 4 0 5 5 9 0 13 5 18 5 45 60 16 5 23 60 75 150 1 min 200 3 0 s 120 1 min Voltage frequency 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Allowable voltage frequency Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 6 Frequency 5 to 5 0 6 1 2 24 3 2 5 2 7 4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 10 to 15 70 7 to 12 Braking transistor Built in Rated current A Output ratings Overload capability Required capacity with DCR kVA 7 Input power Torque 8 D D D D Built in braking resistor HD Braking time s LD 3 7 s 3 LD 22 Duty cycle ED DC reactor DCR 1 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1S 4E 2 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 3 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class serie
186. by sensors and devices from malfunctioning due to such noise An accident could occur m Connecting disconnecting wires to from a control circuit terminal Strip the wire end by 8 to 10 mm as shown below peza Ea Strip length of wire end 8to 100 Type of screwdriver tip shape Flat 0 6 x 3 5 0 N For strand wires the strip length specified above should apply after twisting of them If the strip length is out of the specified range the wire may not be firmly clamped or may be short circuited with other wires Twist the end of the stripped wires for easy insertion and insert it firmly into the wire inlet on the control circuit terminal If the insertion is difficult hold down the clamp release button on the terminal with a flat screwdriver When disconnecting the wires from the terminal hold down the clamp release button on the terminal with a flat screwdriver and pull out the wires Connecting wire to terminal Disconnecting wire from terminal Wires Flat screwdriver Wire inlet Clamp release button Table 2 7 lists the symbols names and functions of the control circuit terminals The wiring to the control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes which reflects the use of the inverter Route wires properly to reduce the influence of noise Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Functions Power Power
187. cations RS 485 COM port 1 for keypad connection RS 485 COM port 2 on terminal board and USB port on the keypad face Protection against momentary power failure Upon detection of a momentary power failure lasting more than 15 ms this function stops the inverter output If restart after momentary power failure is selected this function invokes a restart process if power is restored within a predetermined period allowable momentary power failure time 8 7 8 4 External Dimensions 8 4 1 Standard models Inverter type i FRN___Gim 20 40 Dimensions mm 200 V 400 V Ww w1 w2 H H1 H2 D D1 D2 D3 OA 0 4 0 4 110 96 132 19 0 75 0 75 1 5 1 5 6 246 7 113 3 6 14 2 2 2 22 150 136 260 S 3 3 7 3 7 4 0 5 5 5 5 7 5 7 5 220 196 238 H 1 10 11 195 105 90 10 10 15 15 18 5 18 5 250 226 400 378 22 22 30 30 37 320 240 550 530 255 140 ef 10 an 12 115 4 10 5 355 275 270 155 75 740 720 55 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1S 4E Note A box m in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 8 4 2 DC reactor Power Inverter type Dimensions mm Mass supply Reactor Mounting Terminal voltage FRN___G1m 20 40 w jwi D f D2 D H eS hoe ko 200 V 55 LD DCR2 75C 255 10 22
188. ches the output form of analog output terminals FM1 and FM2 between voltage and current When changing the setting of SW4 and SW6 also change the data of function codes F29 and F32 respectively sw4 Sw6 FM1 Fm2 Output form SW4 Data of F29 SW6 Data of F32 Voltage output Factory default VO1 0 vo2 0 Current output 101 1 102 1 Switches the property of the analog input terminal C1 between analog setting current inpu hermistor input and NTC thermistor input When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code H26 A SW5 Data of H26 Function Analog setting current input Factory default PTC thermistor input PTC NTC 1 alarm or 2 warning NTC thermistor input PTC NTC 3 C1 0 Figure 2 19 shows the location of slide switches on the control PCB for the input output terminal configuration Switch configuration and factory default SW4 SW6 VO1 VO2 Factory default E t SINK SOURCE la halts 101 102 PTC NTC The factory default for FRN__ _G1 2A 4A is SINK for FRN___G1M 4E SOURCE Figure 2 19 Location of the Slide Switches on the Control PCB inte To move a switch slider use a tool with a narrow tip e g a tip of tweezers Be careful not to touch Note other electronic part
189. circuit power supply wires L1 R L2 S and L3 T to the input terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB and an MC if necessary It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter with each other With overcurrent protection Cc Tip It is recommended to insert a manually operable magnetic contactor MC that allows you to disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency e g when the protective function is activated preventing a failure or accident from causing secondary disasters i Note To drive the inverter with single phase input power consult your Fuji Electric representative So Auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO for inverters with a capacity of 1 5 kW or above In general the inverter runs normally without power supplied to the auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO If the inverter main power is shut down however no power is supplied to the control circuit so that the inverter cannot issue a variety of output signals or display on the keypad To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter s programmable output terminals by the protective function or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down connect the auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO to the power supply lines If a magnetic contactor MC is installed in t
190. citance of the capacitors If the input voltage unbalance rate is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR Max voltage V Min voltage V X Volt bal otaga unbalance ie Three phase average voltage V 67 IEC 61800 3 DC reactor DCR for correcting the inverter input power factor for suppressing harmonics To correct the inverter input power factor to suppress harmonics use an optional DCR Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power source so as to decrease harmonic components on the power source lines and correct the power factor of the inverter DCR models Input power factor Remarks DCR2 4 00 O0A OOB Approx 90 to 95 The last letter identifies the capacitance Exclusively designed for nominal applied motor DCR2 4 00C Approx 86 to 90 of 37 KW or above Qot Select a DCR matching not the inverter but the nominal applied motor Therefore for HD mode inverters arrange a DCR with the same capacity as the inverter for LD mode inverters arrange a DCR with one rank higher capacity than the inverter PWM converter for correcting the inverter input power factor Using a PWM converter High power factor regenerative PWM converter RHC series corrects the inverter power factor up to nearly 100 When combining an inverter with a PWM converter disable the main power loss detection by setting the function code H72 to 0 If the main power loss detection is enabled H72 1 by fa
191. class series 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 200 V class series 200 V class series Function code Function code data Base frequency 1 Motor ratings printed on the nameplate of the motor 220 V 400 V class series 400 V Rated voltage at base frequency 1 400 V class series 415 V Motor 1 Rated capacity Motor 1 Rated current Nominal applied motor capacity Rated current of nominal applied motor 200 V class series 200 V class series 60 0 Hz 400 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz Machinery design values Maximum frequency 1 Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer than your machinery design values If the specified time is short the inverter may not run the motor Acceleration time 1 Note Deceleration time 1 6 00 s Note properly 6 00 s Not When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically ote updates the data of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 E Tuning procedure 1 Selection of tuning type Check the situation of the machinery and select Tuning with the motor being stopped P04 1 or Tuning with the motor running P04 2 For the latter tuning adjust the acceleration and deceleration times F07 and F08 and specify the rotation direction that matches the actual rotation di
192. cracks breakage and discoloration caused by overheat or deterioration 3 Check for contamination or accumulation of dust or dirt How to inspect 1 Retighten 2 3 Visual inspection Evaluation criteria 1 2 3 No abnormalities Conductors and wires 1 Check conductors for discoloration and distortion caused by overheat 2 Check the sheath of the wires for cracks and discoloration 1 2 Visual inspection 1 2 No abnormalities Terminal blocks Check that the terminal blocks are not damaged Visual inspection No abnormalities Braking resistor Main circuit 1 Check for abnormal odor or cracks in insulators caused by overheat 2 Check for wire breakage 1 Olfactory and visual inspection 2 Check the wires visually or disconnect either wire and measure the conductivity with a multimeter 1 No abnormalities 2 Within 10 of the resistance of the braking resistor DC link bus capacitor 1 Check for electrolyte leakage discoloration cracks and swelling of the casing 2 Check that the safety valve does not protrude remarkably 3 Measure the capacitance if necessary 1 2 Visual inspection 3 Measure the discharge time with capacitance probe 1 2 No abnormalities 3 The discharge time should not be shorter than the one specified by the replacement manual Transformer and reactor Check for abnormal roaring noise and odor
193. crease the gain for insufficient one increase the gain Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for braking For excessive slip compensation during braking decrease the gain for insufficient one increase the gain Output current luctuation damping gain 1 For motor 1 If the motor vibrates due to current fluctuation increase the suppression gain Y Modification effective N Modification ineffective If any problem persists under vector control with without speed sensor selected in Section 4 1 8 or 4 1 9 modify the following function code data The vector control uses a PI controller for speed control The PI constants are sometimes required to be modified because of the load inertia The table below lists the main modification items For details see Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES and Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Function code Modification key points Speed contro If an excessive overshoot occurs for a speed command change Speed command filter increase the filter constant If ripples are superimposed on the speed detection signal so that the speed control gain cannot be increased increase the filter constant to obtain a larger gain Speed contro Speed detection filter Speed control P If hunting is caused in the motor speed control decrease the gain Gain If the motor response is slow increase the gain Speed contro Integral time If the motor response is slow increase the in
194. ctory default the inverter interprets the main power as being shut down ignoring an entry of a run command Molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB Install a recommended MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring Since using an MCCB or RCD ELCB with a lager capacity than recommended ones breaks the protective coordination of the power supply system be sure to select recommended ones Also select ones with short circuit breaking capacity suitable for the power source impedance Molded Case Circuit Breaker MCCB and Residual Current Operated Protective Device RCD Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker ELCB Nominal Rated current of Nominal Rated current of Power applied HD LD MCCB and Power applied HD LD MCCB and supply rotor lnvertertype node RCD ELCB A Supply Motor IMvertertype mode RCD ELCB A voltage kW voltage kW w DCR w o DCR w DCR w o DCR 0 4 _ FRNO 4G1m 20 5 5 0 4 _ FRN0 4G1m 40 5 0 75 _ FRNO 75G1m 20 10 0 75 _ FRNO 75G1m 40 5 1 5 FRN1 5G1m 20 HD 10 15 1 5 FRN1 5
195. curred 3 4 7 Allows you to read or write function code data as well as verifying it A aTi 7 E i Section Data Copying Saving the function code data of the currently running 3 4 8 inverter into the keypad and connecting it to a PC running FRENIC Loader enables data checking on the PC Note The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option 3 6 m Selecting menus to display The menu driven system allows you to cycle through menus To cycle through necessary menus only for simple operation use function code E52 that provides a choice of three display modes as listed below The factory default E52 0 is to display only three menus Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 1 Data Setting and Menu 7 Data Copying allowing no switching to any other menu Table 3 5 Keypad Display Mode Selection Function Code E52 Data for E52 Menus selectable Menu 0 Quick Setup Function code data editing mode factory default Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 7 Data Copying Menu 2 Data Checking Function code data check mode Menu 7 Data Copying Full menu mode Menus 0 through 7 Cc Tip Press the amp key to enter Programming mode and display menus While cycling through the menus with the key select the desired menu item with the GS key Once the entire menu has been cycled through the display returns
196. cy fall rate 0 00 Deceleration time selected by F08 Y Y g99 w EY 5 35 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s 999 Follow the current limit command H15 Continuous running level 200 to 300 V for 200 V class series Y Y2 235 Y YJ Y 400 to 600 V for 400 V class series 470 The shaded function codes 0039 are applicable to the quick setup 3 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table 5 2 7 The motor constant is automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table 5 3 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 5 10 Drive S control 32 we i oe s Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range 25 g setting P w o w page PG PG H16 Restart Mode after Momentary 0 0 to 30 0 s Y Y 99 Y Y Y 5 35 Power Failure 999 Automatically determined by inverter Allowable momentary power failure time H26 Thermistor for motor 0 Disable W Y 0 YI Y Y Mode selection 1 PTC The inverter immediately trips with 0h4 displayed 2 PTC The inverter issues output signal THM and continues to run 3 __ NTC When connected H27 Level 0 00 to 5 00 V Y Y 035 Y YI Y _ H28 Droop Control 60 0 to 0 0 Hz Y Y 00 ii a e a o H30 C
197. d then check the voltage of the DC link bus which should be 200 VDC or below for three phase 200 V class series and 400 VDC or below for three phase 400 V class series gt Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input specifications 2 The main power is not ON while the auxiliary input power to the control circuit is supplied Check whether the main power is turned ON gt Turn the main power ON 3 Although power is supplied not via the commercial power line but via the DC link bus the main power down detection is enabled H72 Check the connection to the main power and check if the H72 data is set to 1 factory default gt Correct the H72 data 1 3 Problem _ appears Parentheses Possible Causes 1 The display data overflows the LED monitor 1 appeared on the LED monitor during speed monitoring on the keypad What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the product of the output frequency and the display coefficient E50 exceeds 99999 gt Correct the E50 data Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Perform daily and periodic inspections to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation of the inverter for a long time When performing inspections follow the instructions given in this chapter A WARNING e Before proceeding to the maintenance inspection jobs turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or
198. der FRENIC Loader Table 5 1 Factory Default According to Shipping Destination Shipping destination r Asia EU Function code Name FRN___G1 2A FRN___G1 m 4A FRN___G1 4E 200 V class series 400 V class series 400 V class series F03 A01 b01 r01 Maximum frequency E31 E36 E54 Frequency detection Level 60 0 hiz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz F05 A03 b03 r03 Rated voltage at base frequency F06 A04 b04 r04 Maximum output voltage mae 415V A00N Note A box m in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Table 5 2 Factory Defaults Depending upon Inverter Capacity Auto restart after Inverter Torque boost momentary power Inverter Torque boost capacity 1to4 failure capacity 1to4 kW F09 A05 b05 r05 H13 kw F09 A05 b05 r05 0 4 TA 18 5 22 0 75 22 1 5 6 8 30 2 2 0 5 37 3 7 5 5 45 0 0 5 5 49 55 75 4 4 75 11 X 3 5 10 90 15 2 8 5 21 Auto restart after momentary power failure H13 1 1 0 5 Table 5 3 Motor Parameters This table lists the function codes dedicated to motor 1 For motors 2 to 4 replace the function codes with the ones dedicated to the respective motor Three phase 200 V class series for Asia FRN__ _G1 l 2A Nominal Rated Magnetic Mag
199. digital I O terminals and communications ports The locations of those switches are shown in Figure 2 19 To access the slide switches remove the front cover so that you can see the control PCB For inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above open also the keypad enclosure LL For details on how to remove the front cover and how to open and close the keypad enclosure refer to Section 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide Table 2 8 lists function of each slide switch Table 2 8 Function of Each Slide Switch Switch Function Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE This switches the input mode of digital input terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV to be used as the SINK or SOURCE mode The factory default for FRN__ _G1 l 2A 4A is SINK for FRN___G1 4E SOURCE Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port on the inverter ON and OFF RS 485 communications port 2 on the control PCB If the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications network as a terminating device turn SW2 to ON Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port on the inverter ON and OFF RS 485 communications port 1 for connecting the keypad To connect a keypad to the inverter turn SW3 to OFF Factory default If the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications network as a terminating device turn SW3 to ON Swit
200. driven by a PWM type inverter surge voltage generated by switching the inverter component may be superimposed on the output voltage and may be applied to the motor terminals Particularly if the wiring length is long the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation resistance of the motor Implement any of the following measures Use a motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage All Fuji standard motors feature reinforced insulation Connect a surge suppressor unit SSU50 100TA NS at the motor terminal Connect an output circuit filter OFL OOO DA to the output terminals secondary circuits of the inverter Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor 10 to 20 m or less When an output circuit filter is inserted in the secondary circuit or the wiring between the inverter and the motor is long a voltage loss occurs due to reactance of the filter or wiring so that the insufficient voltage may cause output current oscillation or a lack of motor output torque To avoid it select the constant torque load by setting the function code F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 to 1 and keep the inverter output voltage at a higher level by configuring H50 H52 Non linear V f Pattern Frequency and H51 H53 Non linear V f Pattern Voltage E Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment 1 Phase advancing capacitors for power factor correction Do not mount a phase ad
201. e QOR reet ke es j Tg es iy mn End of Ba M ae verification be saved or alte Ses T uo isin a U verification error el T 1 Verification error i ae i Y l 5 A i c x 5 n p End of read AHO four ie ishows Blinking Figure 3 6 Menu Transition in Menu 7 Data Copying Basic keying operation 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears BS Use the and keys to display Data Copying cpy Press the key to proceed to the list of data copying functions e g read g Use the and keys to select the desired function then press the Gs key to execute the selected function e g read will blink S 5 When the selected function has been completed end appears Press the key to return to the list of data copying functions Press the key again to return to the menu Table 3 17 below lists details of the data copying functions Display on LED Monitor Function Read data Table 3 17 List of Data Copying Functions Description Reads the function code data out of the inverter s memory and stores it into the keypad memory Also reads out inverte
202. e applicable to the quick setup 6 0 for inverters with a capacity of 7 5 kW or below OFF for those with 11 kW or above 5 4 E codes Extension Terminal Functions Drive S control 52 af Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range 25 A setting a wo w page Sia o PG PG E01 Terminal X1 Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding N Y 0 5 52 E02 Terminal X2 Function function to terminals X1 to X7 as listed below N Y 1 5 52 E03 Terminal X3 Function 0 1000 Select multi frequency 0 to 1 steps SS1 N Y 2 YJYJ Y 5 52 E04 Terminal X4 Function 1 1001 Select multi frequency 0 to 3 steps SSJ N Y 3 ARISE I E05_ Terminal X5 Function 2 1002 Select multi frequency 0 to 7 steps SS4 N Y 4 YPL E06 _ Terminal X6 Function peed ne EPEC G S a ad Ni y 5 x y y 552 K Selec ime 2 steps 5 50 EOZ terminal ps Runetion 5 1005 Select ACC DEC time 4 steps cara N Y 8 Ty y y O 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD Y YTY 7 1007 Coast to a stop BX Y YTY 8 1008 Reset alarm RST Y Ye Y 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR Ye YE oY 9 Active OFF 1009 Active ON 0 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 1 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 12 1012 Select motor 2 M2 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt ziz Y DOWN Decr
203. e basic type of inverters that bear a CE marking but have no built in EMC filter becomes compliant with these EMC Directives CAUTION The EMC filter built in type of the FRENIC MEGA inverters is categorized as Category C3 of the EN61800 3 It is not designed for use in a domestic environment It may interfere with the operations of home appliances or office equipment due to noise emitted from it 9 1 9 3 Compliance with EMC Standards 9 3 1 General The CE marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including our CE marked products is compliant with the EMC Directive Therefore CE marking for the equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer For this reason Fuji s CE mark is indicated under the condition that the product shall be used within equipment meeting all requirements for the relevant Directives Instrumentation of such equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer Generally machinery or equipment includes not only our products but other devices as well Manufacturers therefore shall design the whole system to be compliant with the relevant Directives In addition to satisfy the requirements noted above use the EMC filter built in type of inverters or the combination of the basic type of inverters that have no built in EMC filter and an external filter option dedicated to Fuji inverters In either case mount inverters in accordance with the installation procedu
204. e decreased due to the service life expired or failure 4 Overload 8 OhA2 External alarm Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the heat sink overheat early warning E01 through E07 or the overload early warning E34 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated gt Decease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable the overload prevention control H70 Problem External alarm was inputted THR when the Enable external alarm trip THR has been assigned to any of digital input terminals Possible Causes 1 An alarm function of external equipment was activated What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the operation of external equipment gt Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred 2 Wrong connection or poor contact in external alarm signal wiring Check if the external alarm signal wiring is correctly connected to the terminal to which the Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR has been assigned Any of E01 through E07 E98 and E99 should be set to 9 gt Connect the external alarm signal wire correctly Possible Causes 3 9 Incorrec
205. e exceeding its input power voltage E Base Frequency 1 F04 Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor E Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 F05 Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor If FO5 0 the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the inverter The output voltage will fluctuate in line with the input voltage fluctuation If F05 an arbitrary value other than 0 the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage constant in line with the setting When any of the auto torque boost auto energy saving etc is enabled the F05 data should be equal to the rated voltage of the motor m Non linear V f Patterns 1 2 and 3 for Frequency H50 H52 and H65 Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point in the non linear V f pattern Cote Setting 0 0 to H50 H52 or H65 disables the non linear V f pattern operation Non linear V f Patterns 1 2 and 3 for Voltage H51 H53 and H66 Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point in the non linear V f pattern i Note The factory default values for H50 and H51 differ depending on the inverter capacity For inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below H50 0 0 Hz and H51 0 V For those with a capacity of 30 kW or above refer to the table below Destination Asia EU Inverter type FRN___G1 2A FRN___G1 4A FRN___G1 4E Voltage 200 V class series 400 V class
206. e motor enters a coast to stop state Trip after recovery from power failure As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm u The moment the power is restored an undervoltage alarm wu is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state Trip after decelerate to stop As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level due to a momentary power failure decelerate to shop control is invoked Decelerate to stop control regenerates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia slowing down the motor and continuing the deceleration operation After decelerate to stop operation an undervoltage alarm uw is issued Continue to run for heavy inertia or general loads As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level due to a momentary power failure continuous running control is invoked Continuous running control regenerates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia continues running and waits the recovery of power When an undervoltage condition is detected due to a lack of energy to be regenerated the output frequency at that time is saved the output of the inverter is shut down and the motor enters a coast to stop state Whe
207. e of the motor when running the inverter in the low speed range E Motor noise When a general purpose motor is driven by an inverter the noise level is higher than that when it is driven by a commercial power supply To reduce noise raise carrier frequency of the inverter Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher noise level Machine vibration When an inverter driven motor is mounted to a machine resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the motor driven machinery Driving a 2 pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause abnormal vibration If it happens do any of the following Consider the use of a rubber coupling or vibration proof rubber Use the inverter s jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance frequency zone s Use the vibration suppression related function codes that may be effective For details refer to the description of H80 in Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 1 7 1 3 3 Precautions in using special motors When using special motors note the followings m Explosion proof motors When driving an explosion proof motor with an inverter use a combination of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance E Submersible motors and pumps These motors have a larger rated current than general purpose motors Select an inverter whose rated output current is greater than that of the motor These motors differ from general purpose motors in thermal characteristics Decrease the th
208. e one for the motor with one rank higher capacity so configure the P02 data to match the applied motor rating as required 4 1 5 Selecting a desired motor drive control The FRENIC MEGA supports the following motor drive control Drive control V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active Basic Speed control feedback Speed control Other restrictions Frequency control Vif control Disable Frequency control with slip compensation Vector control without speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor Estimated Speed control Maximum Vector speed with automatic frequency 120 Hz control speed regulator Maximum Enable ASR frequency 200 Hz 4 3 E V f control with slip compensation inactive Under this control the inverter controls a motor with the voltage and frequency according to the V f pattern specified by function codes This control disables all automatically controlled features such as the slip compensation so no unpredictable output fluctuation enabling stable operation with constant output frequency E V f control with slip compensation active Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation The inverter s slip compensation function first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated a
209. e remote keypad or the multi function keypad and the inverter Possible Causes 1 Broken communications cable or poor contact What to Check and Suggested Measures Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Re insert the connector firmly gt Replace the cable Connecting many control wires hinders the front cover from being mounted lifting the keypad Check the mounting condition of the front cover gt Use wires of the recommended size 0 65 to 0 82 mm for wiring gt Change the wiring layout inside the unit so that the front cover can be mounted firmly Inverter affected by strong electrical noise Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of communication cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Appendix A 4 A keypad failure occurred 20 er3 CPU error Replace the keypad with another one and check whether a keypad communications error er 2 occurs gt Replace the keypad Problem A CPU error e g erratic CPU operation occurred Possible Causes 1 Inverter affected by strong electrical noise What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires communications cables and main circuit wires
210. e run command source Set F02 data to 1 gt Correct the assignment of commands FWD and REV with function codes E98 and E99 gt Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals FWD and REV correctly gt Make sure that the sink source slide switch SW1 on the control printed circuit board control PCB is properly configured 3 No Enable input Check the input status of terminal EN with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Correct the external circuit wiring to control circuit terminal EN No rotation direction command keypad operation Check the input status of the forward reverse rotation direction command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input the rotation direction F02 0 or select the keypad operation with which the rotation direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 The inverter could not accept any run commands from the keypad since it was in Programming mode Check which operation mode the inverter is in using the keypad gt Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run command Arun command with higher priority than the one attempted was active and the run command was stopped Referring to the block diagram of the frequency command block refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 6 check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Correct any inc
211. e same alarm occurs consecutively Multiple alarm 1 Simultaneously occurring alarm code 1 is displayed if no alarm has occurred Multiple alarm 2 Simultaneously occurring alarm code 2 is displayed if no alarm has occurred Table 3 16 Display Items in Alarm Information Continued LED monitor shows Description item No Terminal I O signal status under communications control displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals under RS 485 Terminal input signal communications control Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals status under under communications control in Section 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status communications control for details in hexadecimal Terminal output signal status under communications control in hexadecimal Error sub code Secondary error code for the alarm Running status 2 as four hexadecimal digits Running status 2 Refer to m Displaying running status 3 _07 and running status 2 3 2 3 in Section 3 4 4 Speed detected value Speed detected value nt When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession the alarm information for the first and the most A 3 p i Note recent occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences in between will be discarded The number of consecutive occurrences will be preserved as the first alarm
212. e signal from the the reference PG reference PG PG pulse rate Z phase signal from the reference PG Shows the pulse rate p s of the Z phase signal fed back from the reference PG PG pulse rate Shows the pulse rate p s of the A B phase signal fed back from A B phase signal from the the slave PG slave PG PG pulse rate Z phase signal from the slave PG Shows the pulse rate p s of the Z phase signal fed back from the slave PG used used used used used E Displaying control I O signal terminals The status of control I O signal terminals may be displayed with ON OFF of the LED segment or in hexadecimal e Displaying the I O signal status with ON OFF of each LED segment As shown in Table 3 12 and the figure below each of segments a to dp on LED1 and LED2 lights when the corresponding digital input terminal circuit FWD REV X1 to X7 is closed it goes OFF when it is open Each of segments a to e on LEDS lights when the circuit between output terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 and terminal CMY or between terminals Y5A and Y5C is closed respectively it goes OFF when the circuit is open Segment a on LED4 is for terminals 30A B C and lights when the circuit between terminals 30C and 30A is short circuited ON and goes OFF when it is open CTi If all terminal signals are OFF open segments g on all of LED1 to LED4 will
213. e switching connectors cannot drive the cooling fans causing a heat sink overheat alarm OAZ or a charger circuit alarm pbf E Location of the switching connectors The switching connectors are located on the power printed circuit board power PCB as shown below Keypad enclosure Power switching connectors CN UX Fan power supply switching connectors CN R and a CN W Auxiliary fan power input terminals A WARNING Power PCB Auxiliary power input terminals Figure 2 6 Location of Switching Connectors and Auxiliary Power Input Terminals nrinta To remove each of the jumpers pinch its Note A i aS upper side between your fingers unlock its CN UX 2 fastener and pull it up When mounting it fit the jumper over the connector until it snaps into place CN R CN W amp g Figure 2 7 Inserting Removing the Jumpers Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T three phase input The three phase input power lines are connected to these terminals 1 For safety make sure that the molded case circuit breaker MCCB or magnetic contactor MC is turned OFF before wiring the main circuit power input terminals 2 Connect the main
214. e transition paths between remote and local modes depend on the current mode and the value ON OFF of LOC as shown in the status transition diagram given below Also refer to above table for details LOC OFF Local Mode LOC ON Remote Mode LOC OFF LOC ON Transition between Remote and Local Modes by LOC 4 2 3 External run frequency command By factory default run and frequency commands are sourced from the keypad This section provides other external command source samples an external potentiometer variable resistor as a frequency command source and external run switches as run forward reverse command sources Set up those external sources using the following procedure 1 Configure the function codes as listed below Function code Factory default Frequency command 1 Analog voltage input to terminal 12 Operation method External digital input signal Terminal FWD function Run forward command FWD Terminal REV function Run reverse command REV Not If terminal FWD and REV are ON the F02 data cannot be changed First turn those terminals OFF and then change the F02 data 2 Wire the potentiometer to terminals across 13 12 and 11 3 Connect the run forward switch between terminals FWD and CM and the run reverse switch between REV and CM 4 To start running the inverter rotate the potentiometer to give a voltage to terminal 12 and then tur
215. e undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor is in an abnormal stop state e g tripped When this signal is ON a run command is disabled if given Torque polarity detected B D Function code data 4 The inverter issues the driving or braking polarity signal to this digital output judging from the internally calculated torque or torque command This signal goes OFF when the detected torque is a driving one and it goes ON when it is a braking one m Inverter output limiting IOL Function code data 5 Inverter output limiting with delay JOL2 Function code data 22 The output signal IOL comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the following actions minimum width of the output signal 100 ms The output signal OL2 comes ON when any of the following output limiting operation continues for 20 ms or more Torque limiting F40 F41 E16 and E17 e Current limiting by software F43 and F44 Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware H12 1 Automatic deceleration Anti regenerative control H69 N When the IOL signal is ON it may mean that the output frequency may have deviated from the o a DURY frequency specified by the frequency command because of this limiting function Auto restarting after momentary power failure PF Function code data 6 This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or durin
216. e used just before swi by the frequency command ching Reference frequency given by PID control PID PID control Cancel PID control Hz PID controller output Select multi frequency SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 Reference frequency given by the frequency command source used just before switching Reference frequency at the time of previous UP DOWN control Multi frequency Enable communications link Communications link livia RS 485 or fieldbus LE To enable the UP and DOWN terminal commands you need to set frequency command 1 F01 or frequency command 2 C30 to 7 beforehand D Qo E Enable data change with keypad WE KP Function code data 19 Turning this terminal command OFF disables changing of function code data from the keypad Only when this command is ON you can change function code data from the keypad according to the setting of function code F00 as listed below Terminal command WE KP F00 Function OFF Disable editing of all function code data except that of F00 aN 0 2 Enable editing of all function code data 1 3 Inhibit editing of all function code data except that of F00 f the WE KP command is not assigned to any terminal the inverter will interpret WE KP to be always ON by default If you mistakenly assign a WE KP terminal command you no longer edit or modify function code data In such a case temporarily turn this WE KP
217. e versa Digital input terminal X7 can be defined as a pulse train input terminal with the function codes Maximum wiring length 20m Maximum input pulse 30 kHz When connected to a pulse generator with open collector transistor output Needs a pull up or pull down resistor See notes on page 2 24 When connected to a pulse generator with complementary transistor outpu For the settings of the function codes refer to FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 100 kHz reverse command PLC lt Control circuit gt Item 24 VDC Operating ON level L lt 7 voltage SINK OFF level Operating ON level voltage SOURCE OFF level Operating current at SOURCE ON x7 REV Input voltage is at 0 V For X7 Allowable leakage current at OFF X1 to FWD ICM 1 6kQ for X7 Figure 2 13 Digital Input Circuit Safety stop function that is compliant with EN954 1 Category 3 This terminal allows the hardware circuit to stop the inserter s output transistor and coast the motor to a stop This terminal is exclusively used for the source mode input When it is short circuited with terminal PLC the Enable input is ON ready for inverter run when it is opened the inverter coasts the motor to a stop This terminal is not interlocked with the slide switch SW1 By factory default
218. e voltage is operation Cumulative printed circuit applied to the capacitors run time boards while correcting it according to the surrounding temperature Cooling fans Counts the run time of Exceeding 87 600 hours 10 years During ordinary 5 07 the cooling fans operation Cumulative run time 7 3 m Notes for the judgment on the service life of the DC link bus capacitor The service life of the DC link bus capacitor can be judged by the measurement of discharging time to or ON time counting The discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor depends largely on the inverter s internal load conditions e g options attached or ON OFF of digital I O signals If actual load conditions are so different from the ones at which the initial reference capacitance is measured that the measurement result falls out of the accuracy level required then the inverter does not perform measuring The capacitance measuring conditions at shipment are extremely restricted e g with the remote keypad mounted and all input terminals being OFF in order to stabilize the load and measure the capacitance accurately Those conditions are therefore different from the actual operating conditions in almost all cases If the actual operating conditions are the same as those at shipment shutting down the inverter power automatically measures the discharging time however if they are different no automatic measurement is
219. eak Speed valid Speed agreement Frequency speed arrival signal 3 PG error detected Positioning completion signal Maintenance timer Light alarm Alarm output for any alarm Enable circuit failure detected Enable input OFF Braking transistor broken For data 58 and 72 refer to the description of data 2 and 1 respectively _ Or Any negative logic Active OFF command cannot be assigned to the functions marked with in Note oar SS the Active OFF column Inverter running RUN Function code data 0 Inverter output on RUN2 Function code data 35 These output signals tell the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher If assigned in negative logic Active OFF these signals can be used to tell the Inverter being stopped state Output signal Operating condition 1 Operating condition 2 RUN Comes ON if the inverter output Comes OFF even during DC braking frequency exceeds the starting frequency Comes ON even during DC braking RUN2 and OFF if it drops below the stop pre exciting zero speed control or dew frequency condensation prevention E Frequency speed arrival signal FAR Function code data 1 Frequency speed arrival signal 3 FAR3 Function code data 72 These output signals come ON when the difference between the output frequency detected speed and r
220. ease output frequency DOWN Y Y Enable data change with keypad WE KP Y Y Cancel PID control Hz PID Ye oY 21 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS W N 2 1022 Interlock IL yYly 24 1024 Enable communications link via Y N L IXYJN JN Force to stop Yop a i EA B0 Active OFF 1030 AciveoN J Pre excitation EXITE NYY 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST kaa ies a 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD YO YOY 35 1035 Select local keypad operation LOC Ye ONE Y 36 1036 Select motor 3 M3 Yor YOpyY 37 1037 Select motor 4 M4 Yo Ye OY 39 ____Protect motor from dew condensation DWP _ _ _ vY yly 40 Enable integrated sequence to switch L to commercial power 50Hz ______isw50 __ __ YI NIN 4 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz terminal X7 E07 PIN yily y Pulse train sign available on terminals except X7 E01 to E06 SIGN yi yly 72 1072 Count the run time of commercial power driven Eee motort oruNm EN Count the run time of commercial power driven fond motor cru EN Count the run time of commercial power driven fdas motors CRU EN Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 4 CRUN M4 Y NIN 76 1076 Select droop control 7 7 _ DROoP J I
221. eceived O signals on the contro a command via RS 485 and optional communications Refer to circuit terminals under m Displaying control I O signal terminals and m Displaying communications control control I O signal terminals under communications control on the following pages for details O signals on the contro circuit terminals nput voltage on terminal 12 Shows the input voltage on terminal 12 in volts V nput current on terminal C1 Shows the input current on terminal C1 in milliamperes mA Output voltage on terminal FM1 Shows the output voltage on terminal FM1 in volts V Output voltage on terminal FM2 Shows the output voltage on terminal FM2 in volts V Input voltage on terminal V2 Shows the input voltage on terminal V2 in volts V Output current on terminal FM1 Shows the output current on terminal FM1 in milliamperes mA Output current on terminal FM2 Shows the output current on terminal FM2 in milliamperes mA Option control circuit terminal Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals on the digital 1 0 input and output interface cards Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals on options on page 3 18 for details Terminal X7 pulse input monitor Shows the pulse rate of the pulse train signal on terminal X7 PG pulse rate Shows the pulse rate p s of the A B phase signal fed back from A B phas
222. eck the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not Refer to Chapter 7 Section 7 3 1 Judgment on service life This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan 45 kW or above for 200 V class series or 75 kW or above for 400 V class series has locked m Reference loss detected REF OFF Function code data 33 This output signal comes ON when an analog input used as a frequency command source is in a reference loss state as specified by E65 due to a wire break or a weak connection This signal goes OFF when the normal operation under the analog input is resumed Refer to the description of E65 m Overload prevention control OLP Function code data 36 This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Refer to the description of H70 m Current detected ID Function code data 37 Current detected 2 ID2 Function code data 38 Current detected 3 ID3 Function code data 39 The output signal ID D2 or ID3 comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by E34 E37 or E55 Current detection Level for the period specified by E35 E38 or E56 Current detection Timer respectively The minimum ON duration is 100 ms The ID ID2 or ID3 goes OFF when the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level Two output signals ID and ID2 can be assigned to tw
223. ected to the power supply MCCB Disconnect or MC RCD ELCB etc Power __ supply FRENIC MEGA Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ACAUTION 7 Install UL certified fuses or circuit breaker between the power supply and the inverter referring to the table below Inverter type Power supply voltage Nominal applied motor FRNO 4G1 20 HD LD mode Class J fuse size Circuit Breaker Trip Size A Required torque Ib in N m FRNO 75G1 20 Main terminal FRN1 5G1 20 FRN2 2G1 20 FRN3 7G1 20 FRN5 5G1m 20 is FRN7 5G1 20 is is FRN11G1 20 FRN15G1 20 FRN18 5G1 20 Three phase 200 V FRN22G1 20 FRN30G1 20 FRN37G1 20 FRN45G1 20 FRN55G1m 20 e cA E md e H D a E A E ea a P E a e a a e a a G asd Ee o a a e A G ad Ee a d p o 9 09 9 09 9 0 9 09 9 0 9j ojojo rc iw Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination Aux Control Power Supply Aux Fan Power Supply Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada addition ACAUTION Wire size AWG mm Main terminal L1 R
224. ed Voltage at Base Frequency 3 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage N yo yiyly 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series b04 Maximum Output Voltage 3 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage N Y2 YININ for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series b05 Torque Boost 3 0 0 to 20 0 Y ha 3 Y NIN percentage with respect to b03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 3 b06 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling we Y 1 Y YY Protection for Motor 3 fan Select motor characteristics 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan b07 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable y Y1Y2 4 yiyly ae 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor b08 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 min W Y g YI YY b09 DC Braking 3 Braking starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Y Y oo Y Y Y b10 Braking level 0 to 100 HD mode 0 to 80 LD mode Y Y 0 e a E a a i b11 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s Y Y 000 Y Y Y b12 Starting Frequency 3 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Y Y 05 TYTYY b13 Load Selection 0 Variable torque load N Y 1 YINIY Auto Torque Boost 1 Constant torque load Auto Energy Saving Operation 3 2 Auto torque boost
225. ed by the un key F02 0 2 or 3 In Programming and Alarm modes however pressing the Gun key cannot run the inverter even if this indicator lights Unit LEDs 3 LEDs These three LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED monitor in Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of them Unit Hz A KW r min and m min Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status for details While the inverter is in Programming mode the LEDs of Hz and kW light E Hz OA mkw x10 LED Lights when the data to display exceeds 9999 When this LED lights the displayed value x 10 is the actual value Example If the LED monitor displays 7234 and the x10 LED lights it means that the actual value is 1 234 x 10 12 340 The USB port with a mini B connector enables the inverter to connect with a PC with a USB cable 3 2 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes FRENIC MEGA features the following three operation modes Table 3 2 Operation Modes Description Operation mode After powered ON the inverter automatically enters this mode This mode allows you to specify the reference frequency PID command value and etc and run stop the motor with the fun Ero keys It is also possible to monitor the running status in real time If a light alarm occurs the a appears on the LED monitor Programming mode This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a v
226. ed from the motor manufacturer E R1 P07 Enter the value calculated by the following expression R1 Cable R1 V 43x1 where R1 Primary resistance of the motor Q Cable R1 Resistance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V l Rated current of the motor A R1 x100 E X P08 Enter the value calculated by the following expression _ X1 X2x XM X2 XM Cable X AA V N3 x1 x 100 where X1 Primary leakage reactance of the motor Q X2 Secondary leakage reactance of the motor converted to primary Q XM Exciting reactance of the motor Cable X Reactance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V l Rated current of the motor A E Rated slip frequency P12 Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following expression and enter the converted value Note The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes shows a larger value Synchronous speed Rated speed Synchronous speed Rated slip frequency Hz x Base frequency For reactance choose the value at the base frequency 1 F04 P09 Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving P10 Slip compensation response time P11 Slip compensation gain for braking P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in for driving and braking individually Specification of 100 fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor Excessive compensation P09 P
227. ed in the order of function code groups and in numerical order However highly relevant function codes are collectively described where one of them first appears In this manual only basic function codes are described in detail For the function codes for vector control and applied functions refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual FOO Data Protection FOO specifies whether to protect function code data except F00 and digital reference data such as frequency command and PID command from accidentally getting changed by pressing the WO keys on the keypad Data for f F00 Function 3 Disable both data protection and digital reference protection allowing you to change both function code data and digital reference data with the O Q keys Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection 1 allowing you to change digital reference data with the WO keys But you cannot change function code data except F00 Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection 2 allowing you to change function code data with the WO keys But you cannot change digital reference data Enable both data protection and digital reference protection not allowing you to change function code data or digital reference data with the O Q keys Enabling the protection disables the S Q keys to change function code data To change F00 data simultaneous keying of from 0 to 1 or 6 from 1
228. edback Input 0 Pulse train sign Pulse train input N ey 2 N N Y s Pulse input property Forward rotation pulse Reverse rotation pulse 2 A B phase with 90 degree phase shift d15 Encoder pulse resolution 0014 to EA60 hex N My 0400 N N Y EA 20 to 60000 pulses 1024 d16 Pulse count factor 1 1 to 9999 N Y 1 NINTY _ d17 Pulse count factor 2 1 to 9999 N Y 1 NINTY d21 Speed Agreement PG Error 0 0 to 50 0 hi 100 N Y Y Hysteresis width d22 Detection timer 0 00 to 10 00 s yF Y 0 50 N YJ Y d23 PG Error Processing 0 Continue to run N Y 2 oll ia 4 1 Stop running with alarm 1 2 Stop running with alarm 2 5 19 Drive 5 control FR of Defaul Refi Code Name Data setting range oe aa Default efer to rang 25 a S setting VA w o w page PG PG d24 Zero Speed Control 0 Not permit at startup N Y 0 N YJY 1 Permit at startup d25 ASR Switching Time 0 000 to 1 000 s Y Y 0 000 N YJ Y d32 Torque control Speed limit 1 0 to 110 Ns Y 100 N Y Y d33 Speed limit 2 0 to 110 Y Y 100 N YJ Y d51 Reserved 9 0 to 500 N Y 12 gt d52 Reserved 9 0 to 500 N Y 12 d53 Reserved 9 0 to 500 N Ag 12 d54 Reserved 9 0 to 500 N NG 42 gt z d55 Reserved 9 0 Enable factorizat
229. eference frequency commanded speed comes within the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30 Refer to the description of E30 Output signal Operating condition 1 Operating condition 2 FAR Comes OFF when all the run commands Comes ON when difference between the are OFF or speed command value is 0 output frequency detected speed and Comes ON even if all the run commands the reference frequency commanded are OFF interpreting that the speed FAR3 speed comes within the frequency arrival command is 0 when the output frequency hysteresis width specified by E30 is within 0 the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30 E Frequency speed detected FDT Function code data 2 Frequency speed detected 2 FDT2 Function code data 31 Frequency speed detected 3 FDT3 Function code data 58 The output signal FDT FDT2 or FDT3 comes ON when the output frequency detected speed exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31 E36 or E54 respectively and it goes OFF when the output frequency detected speed drops below the Frequency detection level E31 E36 or E54 Hysteresis width E32 Em Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU Function code data 3 This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage level and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level This signal is ON also when th
230. en E64 0 e If you have set F01 data to 0 or 8 but have selected a frequency command source other than frequency command 1 i e frequency command 2 frequency command via communication or multi frequency command then the and keys are disabled to change the current frequency command even in Running mode Pressing either of these keys just displays the current reference frequency When you start specifying the reference frequency or any other parameter with the O Q key the least significant digit on the display blinks that is the cursor lies in the least significant digit Holding down the O Q key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry while the cursor remains in the least significant digit While the least significant digit is blinking by pressing the A Q key holding down the key for more than 1 second moves the cursor from the least significant digit to the most significant digit Further holding it down moves the cursor to the next lower digit This cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit and change the data in higher digits Setting F01 data to 8 enables the balanceless bumpless switching When the frequency command source is switched to the keypad from any other source the inverter inherits the current frequency that has applied before switching providing smooth switching and shockless running Using analog input F01 1 to 3 or 5 Applying the g
231. ent for C1 Offset 5 0 to 5 0 Y Y oo y Y Y C37 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 ve Yy j100 00 Y Y Y 5 40 C38 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00s Y Ni 0 05 Y Y Y C39 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 nas Y__ 100 00 Y Y Y 5 40 C41 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 Offset 5 0 to 5 0 Ne y oo Y YI Y C42 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 Y Y__ 100 00 Y Y Y 5 40 C43 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 s Y Y 0 05 Y Y Y C44 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 Ne Y_ 100 00 Y Y Y 5 40 C45 Polarity 0 Bipolar 1 Unipolar N Y 1 Y Y Y 5 40 C50 Bias Frequency command 1 Bias base point 0 00 to 100 00 y i 0 00 Y Y Y 5 40 C51 Bias PID command 1 Bias value 100 00 to 100 00 y X 0 00 Y Y Y C52 Bias base point 0 00 to 100 00 Ne Y 0 00 Y Y Y C53 Selection of Normal Inverse 0 Normal operation Y Y 0 Y Y Y Operation Frequency command 1 1 Inverse operation P codes Motor 1 Parameters Drive 5 control S2 o Code Name Data setting range gE oe Default Refer to eS a 8 setting vit w o w page 5 PG PG Motor 1 No of poles Rated capacity Rated current Auto tuning 2 to 22 poles 0 01 to 1000 kW when P99 0 2 3 or 4 0 01 to 1000 HP when P99 1 FETA 7 5 70 0 00 to 2000 A Y 1 Y2 T 5 70 0 Disable 1 Tune while the motor stops R1 X and rated slip frequency 2 Tune while the motor is rotating under V
232. eps 16 bit parallel e Pulse train input standard Pulse input X7 terminal Rotational direction One of the digital input terminals except X7 e Link operation Various buses option e Reference frequency switching Remote local mode switching Auxiliary frequency setting Proportional operation setting and Inverse operation Acceleration deceleration time 0 00 to 6000 s Linear S curve curvilinear Acceleration deceleration time settings 1 to 4 switchable Stop control Running continued at the stop frequency coast to stop or force to stop e DC braking Braking starting frequency up to 60 Hz time up to 30 0 s and operation level up to 100 e Zero speed control under vector control with speed sensor Auto restart after momentary power failure e Trip immediately trip after recovery from power failure trip after deceleration to stop e Continue to run restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred restart at the starting frequency restart after searching for idling motor speed Hardware current limiter e Current limiter operation level 20 to 200 e Overcurrent limiting by hardware This can be canceled Torque limiter Torque limit value 300 Torque limiter 1 2 torque limiter enabled disabled analog torque limit value Control functions Analog input adjustment gain offset filter time constant frequency limiter high and low bias frequency jum
233. er See Multi function keypad Remote keypad YES Setting up the load conditions in ordinary operation See Modify the measuring conditions applied at shipment NO Measuring under the conditions applied at shipment See Comparison with the initial Measurement under ordinary capacitance at shipment operating conditions when See 1 eee ral is turned OFF In a machine system where the inverter main power is rarely shut down the inverter does not measure the discharging time For such an inverter the ON time counting is provided The ON time counting result can be represented as elapsed time 5_ 26 and time remaining before the end of life 5_ 27 as shown in Table 7 3 On the LED monitor o When the inverter uses an auxiliary control power input the load conditions widely differ so that the discharging time cannot be accurately measured To prevent unintended measuring the discharging time measurement can be disabled with the function code H98 Bit 4 0 7 4 1 Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment When bit 3 of H98 data is 0 the measuring procedure given below measures the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment when the power is turned OFF The measuring result can be displayed on the keypad as a ratio to the initial capacitance
234. erage loss and Resistance These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking resistor Set the discharging capability allowable average loss and resistance to F50 F51 and F52 respectively These values are determined by the inverter and braking resistor models For the discharging capability allowable average loss and resistance refer to FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 4 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT The values listed in the manual are for standard models and 10 ED models of the braking resistors which Fuji Electric provides If you use a braking resistor of other maker confirm the corresponding values with the maker and set the function codes accordingly No e Depending on the thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor the electronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the overheat protection alarm dbh even if the actual temperature rise is not large enough If it happens review the relationship between the performance index of the braking resistor and settings of related function codes C Tip The standard models of braking resistor can output temperature detection signal for overheat Assign an Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR to any of digital input terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV and connect that terminal and its common terminal to braking resistor s terminals 2 and 1 5 49 Calculating the discharging cap
235. erated protectice device Magnetic Filter Boost Earth leakage circuit breaker reactor reactor PWM FRN G1S converter RP PO S contactor T NG NO Insulation transformer 100 VA Magnetic contactor Auxiliary B contacts Auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 and T1 The 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above are equipped with terminals R1 and T1 Only if the inverter works with the DC linked power input whose source is a PWM converter these terminals are used to feed AC power to the fans while they are not used in any power system of ordinary configuration In this case set up the fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals A WARNING In general the covers of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage i e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the cover might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock or an accident ACAUTION Noise may be emitted from the inverter motor and wires Take appropriate measures to prevent the near
236. ercial line Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For secondary side Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For primary side Select AX terminal function For MC on primary side AX Inverter output limiting with delay IOL2 Cooling fan in operation FAN Auto resetting TRY Universal DO U DO Heat sink overheat early warning OH Lifetime alarm LIFE Frequency speed detected 2 FDT2 Reference loss detected REF OFF Inverter output on RUN2 Overload prevention control OLP Current detected ID Current detected 2 ID2 Current detected 3 ID3 Low current detected IDL PID alarm PID ALM Under PID control PID CTL Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control PID STP Low output torque detected U TL Torque detected 1 TD1 Torque detected 2 TD2 Motor 1 selected SWM1 For data 22 31 and 35 refer to the description about data 5 2 and 0 respectively Motor 2 selected SWM2 Function code data Active ON Active OFF Functions assigned Motor 3 selected Motor 4 selected Running forward Running reverse In remote operation Motor overheat detected by thermistor Brake signal Frequency speed detected 3 Terminal C1 wire br
237. ermal time constant of the electronic thermal overload protection to match the motor rating E Brake motors For motors equipped with parallel connected brakes their power supply for braking must be supplied from the inverter input primary circuit If the power supply for braking is mistakenly connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit the brake may not work when the inverter output is shut down Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with series connected brakes E Geared motors If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil lubricated gearbox or speed changer reducer then continuous operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication Avoid such operation m Synchronous motors It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type Contact your Fuji Electric representative for details E Single phase motors Single phase motors are not suitable for inverter driven variable speed operation m High speed motors If the reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or higher to drive a high speed motor test run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand to check it for the safe operation Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER 2 1 Operating Environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Item Specifications Site location Indoors Surrounding 10 to 50 C Note 1 temperatu
238. error output signal DBAL on inverter s programmable output terminals to switch off the MC in the input circuit Magnetic contactor MC in the inverter output secondary circuit If a magnetic contactor MC is inserted in the inverter s output secondary circuit for switching the motor to a commercial power or for any other purposes it should be switched on and off when both the inverter and motor are completely stopped This prevents the contact point from getting rough due to a switching arc of the MC The MC should not be equipped with any main circuit surge killer Applying a commercial power to the inverter s output circuit breaks the inverter To avoid it interlock the MC on the motor s commercial power line with the one in the inverter output circuit so that they are not switched ON at the same time Surge absorber surge killer Do not install any surge absorber or surge killer in the inverter s output secondary lines m Noise reduction If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices or that generated from peripheral equipment causes the 1 inverter to malfunction follow the basic measures outlined below If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the grounding terminals of the inverter from those of the other devices Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires Isolate the power system of the other devices from that of the inverter wi
239. ervals to raise the motor temperature for preventing dew condensation Motor overload early warning When the inverter output current has exceeded the specified level this function issues the Motor overload early warning signal OL before the thermal overload protection function causes the inverter to trip for motor protection This function exclusively applies to the 1st motor Auto reset When the inverter has stopped because of a trip this function allows the inverter to automatically reset and restart itself The number of retries and the latency between stop and reset can be specified Forced stop Upon receipt of the Force to stop terminal command STOP this function interrupts the run and other commands currently applied in order to forcedly decelerate the inverter to a stop Surge protection This function protects the inverter from a surge voltage invaded between main circuit power lines and the ground 6 1 Oc1 Oc2 OC Table 6 1 Abnormal States Detectable Heavy Alarm and Light Alarm Objects Instantaneous overcurrent Heavy alarm objects 2 Light alarm objects Remarks Ref page ef Ground fault 30 kW or above 0u1 0u2 0u3 Overvoltage lu Undervoltage lin Input phase loss Opl Output phase loss Oh1 Heat sink overheat Oh2 External alarm Oh Inverter internal overheat 0h4 Motor protecti
240. etween the PG and the inverter gt Correct the wiring Check that the relationships between the PG feedback signal and the run command are as follows e For the FWD command the B phase pulse is in the High level at rising edge of the A phase pulse e For the REV commana the B phase pulse is in the Low level at rising edge of the A phase pulse gt If the relationship is wrong interchange the A and B phase wires 6 Wiring to the motor is incorrect Check the wiring to the motor gt Connect the inverter output terminals U V and W to the motor input terminals U V and W respectively 7 The motor speed does not rise due to the torque imiter operation 29 narb NTC wire break error Check the data of F40 Torque limiter 1 1 gt Correct the F40 data Or set the F40 data to 999 Disable if the torque limiter operation is not needed Problem A wire break is found in the NTC thermistor detection circuit Possible Causes 1 The NTC thermistor cable is broken What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the motor cable is broken gt Replace the motor cable 2 The temperature around the motor is extremely low lower than 30 C Measure the temperature around the motor gt Reconsider the use environment of the motor 3 The NTC thermistor is broken 30 err Mock alarm Measure the resistance of the NTC thermistor gt Replace the motor Problem T
241. exceeding the specified level If a large vibration or shock exceeding the specified level is applied to the inverter for example due to a carrier running on seam joints of rails or blasting at a construction site the inverter structure gets damaged Insert shock absorbing materials between the mounting base of the inverter and the panel for safe mounting Installation of an inverter panel ona carrier or self propelled machine Ventilating fan at a construction site or a press machine Fumigation for export packaging Halogen compounds such as methyl bromide used in fumigation corrodes some parts inside the inverter E Storage environment The storage environment in which the inverter is stored after purchase is different from the operation environment For details refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 2 When exporting an inverter built in a panel or equipment pack them in a previously fumigated wooden crate When packing an inverter alone for export use a laminated veneer lumber LVL 1 3 Exporting E Wiring precautions 1 Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit If more than one motor is to be connected to
242. f Neither an Alarm Code Nor Light Alarm Indication a Appears on the LED Monitor This section describes the troubleshooting procedure based on function codes dedicated to motor 1 which are marked with an asterisk For motors 2 to 4 replace those asterisked function codes with respective motor dedicated ones refer to Chapter 5 Table 5 7 For the function codes dedicated to motors 2 to 4 see Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 6 3 1 Abnormal motor operation 1 The motor does not rotate Possible Causes 1 No power supplied to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary gt If only the auxiliary control power input is supplied also supply the main power to the inverter 2 No run forward reverse command was inputted or both the commands were inputted simultaneously external signal operation Check the input status of the forward reverse command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a run command gt Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both commands are being inputted gt Correct th
243. f control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c 3 Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Available when the vector control is enabled 5 71 The shaded function codes HHH are applicable to the quick setup 7 The motor constant is automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table 5 3 5 9 Drive S control Cod N Data setti 32 se Default Refer to ode ame ata setting range S5 8 8 setting vy wie wi page 5 PG PG P06 No load current 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 YYY SA P07 R1 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y1Y2 7 Y YY 4 5 71 Pos X 0 00 to 50 00 Y 1Y2 7 YIYIYII P09 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 xe Yy 100 0 Y Y Y 5 72 P10 Slip compensation response time 0 01 to 10 00 s Y _ Y1Y2 0 12 Y N N 5 72 P11_ Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 YF Y_ 100 0 Y Y Y 5 72 Pi2 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 Hz N_ Y1Y2 7 YY LY 5 71 P13 Iro
244. f the braking torque Reverse rotation may result depending on the moment of inertia of the mechanical load and the coupling mechanism Output frequency Start of decelerating to stop Hz DC braking 1 Braking starting frequency F20 o gt Time DC braking 1 Braking time F22 lt gt DC Braking 1 DC braking current Braking level F21 0 eee Time DC braking Braking response mode H95 p It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as an Enable DC braking terminal Tip command DCBRK As long as the DCBRK command is ON the inverter performs DC braking regardless of the braking time specified by F22 Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates the DC braking This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque under V f control In general specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip frequency of motor If you set it at an extremely high value control may become unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases ACAUTION The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur C F23 Starting Frequency 1 F24 Starting Frequency 1 Holding time F25 Stop Frequency F39 Stop Frequency Holding time At the startup of
245. f the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Active ON Terminals Y5A and Y5C are closed excited if the signal is active and Active OFF Terminals Y5A and Y5C are opened non excited if the signal is active while they are normally closed Relay output Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Symbol Name Functions 30A B C Alarm rela 1 Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a protective function has been activated to y stop the motor output for any Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 5A error 2 Any one of output signals assigned to terminals Y1 to Y4 can also be assigned to this relay contact to use it for signal output 3 Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Active ON Terminals 30A and 30C are closed excited if the signal is active and Active OFF Terminals 30A and 30C are opened non excited if the signal is active while they are normally closed Relay output DX RS 485 A communications port transmits data through the RS 485 multipoint protocol between communi the inverter and a personal computer or other equipment such as a PLC cations port 2 For setting of the terminating resistor refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide Terminals switches on control
246. fety function shall be checked at intervals the loss of the safety function between suitable for the machinery the checks Requirements of Category 1 shall apply When the single fault occurs the Safety related parts shall be designed so that safety function is still maintained a single fault in any of these parts does not lead to Accumulation of undetected faults can the loss of the safety function and lead to the loss of the safety function a single fault is detected whenever reasonably practicable Requirements of Category 1 shall apply When faults occur the safety function Safety related parts shall be designed so that a is still maintained single fault is detected during or prior to the next demand on the safety function If this is not possible an accumulation of faults shall not lead to the loss of the safety function 9 6 3 Notes 1 Wiring for terminal EN When using terminal EN be sure to remove the short circuit wire from terminals EN and PLC which has been connected at the shipment EN amp PLC terminals are safety related wire connections and therefore careful installation practices shall be applied to ensure no short circuit s can occur to these connections For opening and closing the hardware circuit between terminals EN and PLC use safety approved components such as safety switches and safety relays that comply with EN954 1 Category 3 or higher to ens
247. figure function codes F50 F51 and F52 while actually measuring the surface temperature of the braking resistor 12 fus Fuse blown Problem The fuse inside the inverter blew Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The fuse blew due to short circuiting inside the inverter Check whether there has been any excess surge or noise coming from outside gt Take measures against surges and noise gt Have the inverter repaired 13 pbf Charger circuit fault Problem The magnetic contactor for short circuiting the charging resistor failed to work Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The control power was not Check that in normal connection of the main circuit not a connection via the supplied to the magnetic DC link bus the connector CN R on the power printed circuit board power contactor intended for PCB is not inserted to NC short circuiting the charging resistor gt Insert the connector CN R to FAN Check whether you quickly turned the circuit breaker ON and OFF to confirm safety after cabling wiring gt Wait until the DC link bus voltage has dropped to a sufficiently low level and then release the current alarm After that turn ON the power again Do not turn the circuit breaker ON and OFF quickly Turning ON the circuit breaker supplies power to the control circuit to the operation level lighting the LEDs on the keypad in a shor
248. flows and the output frequency decreases by this current limit that is undesired consider increasing the current limit level If F43 1 the current limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation If F43 2 the current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation Choose F43 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the output current during constant speed operation Em Mode selection F43 F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active Data for Running states that enable the current limiter F43 During acceleration During constant speed During deceleration 0 Disable Disable Disable 1 Disable Enable Disable 2 Enable Enable Disable m Level F44 F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated in ratio to the inverter rating E Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection H12 H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Under the current limit processing the inverter immediately turns OFF its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency Data for H12 Function 0 Disable An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level
249. formula m Three phase input Electric power W Power factor 3xVoltage V xCurrent A x 100 Table 7 4 Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit DC link bus Input primary side Output secondary side voltage Z P N g Voltage Current Voltage Current 5 AOA 3 i z ou og Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter DC voltmeter 5 2 Ar As AT Vr Vs VT Wr WT Au Av Aw Vu Vv Vw Wu Ww V Z 2 Moving iron reat eae Digital AC Digit AC Digitalac Moving coil Qa Be type type A power meter power meter power meter type 5 i E A o Ee a n Note It is not recommended that meters other than a digital AC power meter be used for measuring the output gt voltage or output current since they may cause larger measurement errors or in the worst case they may be damaged Power supply Figure 7 1 Connection of Meters 7 7 7 5 Insulation Test Since the inverter has undergone an insulation test before shipment avoid making a Megger test at the customer s site If a Megger test is unavoidable for the main circuit observe the following instructions otherwise the inverter may be damaged Awithstand voltage test may also damage the inverter if the test procedure is wrong When the withstand voltage test is necessary consult your Fuji Electric representative 1 Megger test of main circuit Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power
250. function Inverter FRENIC MEGA Instruction Manual First Edition October 2007 Second Edition December 2007 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC MEGA series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual OHH LUU eee Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd Mitsui Sumitomo Bank Ningyo cho Bldg 5 7 Nihonbashi Odemma cho Chuo ku Tokyo 103 0011 Japan Phone 81 3 5847 8011 Fax 81 3 5847 8172 URL http www fujielectric co jp fcs
251. fy those values to the new inverter s function codes Vibration that may occur when the motor s coupling is elastic can be regarded as normal vibration due to the output voltage pattern applied in tuning The tuning does not always result in an error however run the motor and check its running state 4 1 9 Function code basic settings lt 4 gt Driving a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control under the vector control with speed sensor F42 6 requires configuring the following basic function codes Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 LI For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Function Function code data Factory default code FRN___G1 2A 4A FRN___G1 4E 2 Motor characteristics 2 0 Motor characteristics 0 Molen hee cin VG motors Fuji standard 8 series motors Motor 1 Same as that of the applied motor Rated capacity capacity 3 Enable when NTC thermistor Thermistor for motor Also turn SW5 on the control Mode selection printed circuit board to the PTC NTC side Feedback input A B phase with 90 degree Pulse train input phase shift 2 A B phase Nominal applied motor capacity 0 Disable Feedback input Encoder pulse resolution 0400 1024 0400 1024 200 V class series 200 V class series 60 0 Hz 400 V class series 400 V class series Maximum frequency
252. g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures After pressing the key and releasing the alarm return the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands and PID commands specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands back to the original values and then restart the operation Check if er f occurs each time the power is turned ON gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your Fuji Electric representative Problem The LSI on the power printed circuit board malfunctions Possible Causes 1 The inverter capacity setting on the control printed circuit board is wrong What to Check and Suggested Measures It is necessary to set the inverter capacity correctly gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 2 Data stored in the power printed circuit board memory is corrupted It is necessary to replace the power printed circuit board gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 3 The control printed circuit board is misconnected to the power printed circuit board It is necessary to replace the power or control printed circuit board gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 28 ere Speed mismatch or excessive speed deviation Problem An excessive deviation appears between the speed command and the detected speed Possible Causes
253. g Operation 2 Gate Signal ON Gate turned OFF Gate tumed ON 4 Restart Factory default By factory default H13 is set to the value suitable for the standard motor see Table 5 2 Basically it is not necessary to change H13 data However if the long restart time causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem you might as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value In such a case make sure that no alarm occurs CNote Function code H13 Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time also applies to the switching operation between line and inverter refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 E Restart mode after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate H14 During restart after a momentary power failure if the inverter output frequency and the idling motor speed cannot be harmonized with each other an overcurrent will flow activating the overcurrent limiter If it happens the inverter automatically reduces the output frequency to match the idling motor speed according to the reduction rate Frequency fall rate Hz s specified by H14 Data for H14 Inverter s action for the output frequency fall 0 00 Follow the deceleration time specified 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s Follow data specified by H14 Follow the setting of the PI controller in the current limiter 999 are The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter Cote If the f
254. g Resistor DCR DC Reactor RCD Residual current operated protective device ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker MC Magnetic Contactor I MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker RS 485 COM port 1 RJ 45 connector for keypad USB connector 2 FRN__ MCCB or _G1 4E with SOURCE mode input by factory defau DBR 6 RCD ELCB Power supply 400 V class series 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Auxiliary control power input 3 L Auxiliary fan power input 4 RI Power switching connector CN UX 10 Fan power supply switching connector CN RY CN W 10 Main circuit Motor Control circuit 8 Contact outputs 9 Alarm output for any alarm AX terminal function Transistor outputs 9 Motor overload early warning i Frequency speed detected Frequency speed arrival Inverter running Common terminal Analog frequency meter Analog frequency meter Data transmission Grounding sil oC Se G x Dae ee ee er ee Analog input r i Potentiometer power supply 13 10 VDC _ OV 30C i Voltage input for 12 30B frequency setting jA pmp 30 30A l 0 to 10 VDC 14 4 0 to 10 VDC i Voltage input for v2 YSC frequency setting E
255. g and Connecting a Keypad 0 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD in the case of remote keypad ccceeee 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad Overview of Operation Modes Running Mode cceee 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status 3 3 2 Monitoring light alarms 3 4 Programming Mode 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting 0 3 9 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring 0008 3 10 Checking 1 O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking eee 3 14 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information 3 18 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information 0 3 22 Copying data Menu 7 Data Copying 3 5 Alarm Mode 3 6 USB Connectivit Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test 4 1 1 Test run procedure 4 1 2 Checking prior to powering on 4 1 3 Powering ON and checking 4 1 4 Switching between HD and LD drive modes 4 3 4 1 5 Selecting a desired motor drive control 4 1 6 Function code basic settings lt 1 gt 4 1 7 Function code basic settings AN TUNING lt 2 F eee A Function code basic settings lt 3 gt Function code basic settings lt 4 gt Running the inverter for motor operation check 4 1 11 Preparation for practical
256. g mode from the second time on the menu selected last in Programming mode will be displayed Table 3 4 Menus Available in Programming Mode Main functions Refer to Quick Setup Displays only basic function codes to customize the Section P inverter operation 3 4 1 F codes Fundamental functions E codes Extension terminal functions C codes Control functions P codes Motor 1 parameters H codes High performance functions Selecting each of A codes these function Secti ing ection Data Setting i Motor 2 parameters cones enanas 342 its data to be a displayed changed b codes Motor 3 parameters r codes Motor 4 parameters J codes Application functions 1 d codes Application functions 2 y codes Link functions o codes Optional functions Note Displays only function codes that have been changed Data Checking from their factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data Section 3 4 3 Displays the running information required for Section Drive Monitoring maintenance or test running 3 4 4 Section I O Checking fs Displays external interface information 3 45 Maintenance Displays maintenance information including cumulative Section Information run time 3 4 6 Displays the recent four alarm codes You can refer to the Section Alarm Information running information at the time when the alarm oc
257. g the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition shut down the output and wait until restart has been completed the output has reached the reference frequency Refer to the description of F14 m Motor overload early warning OL Function code data 7 This output signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning that enables you to take an corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm 0 Z and shuts down its output Refer to the description of E34 Cote Function code E34 is shared with another feature Function code Related feature 1 Related feature 2 E34 Motor overload early warning OL Current detected ID E Keypad operation enabled KP Function code data 8 This output signal comes ON when the Gun G08 keys are specified as the run command source m Inverter ready to run RDY Function code data 10 This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware preparation such as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the control circuit and no protective functions are activated m Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output SW88 SW52 2 and SW52 1 Function code data 11 12 and 13 Assigning these output signals to transistor output terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 and Y4 enables an ISW50 or ISW60 terminal command that controls the magnetic contactor for sw
258. gnal terminal status display however XF XR and RST are added as inputs Note that under communications control the I O display is in normal logic using the original signals not inverted QJ For details about input commands sent through the communications link refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual and the instruction manual of communication related options as well E Displaying control I O signal terminals on options The LED monitor can also show the signal status of the terminals on the optional digital input and output interface cards just like the signal status of the control circuit terminals Table 3 14 lists the assignment of digital I O signals to the LED segments Table 3 14 Segment Display for External Signal Information LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 Segment Pierce LA A L Input terminal Output terminal 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information Menu 5 Maintenance Information che contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter The menu transition in Menu 5 Maintenance Information is just like that in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Refer to Section 3 4 4 Basic key operation To view the maintenance information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode pres
259. gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 The automatic deceleration Anti regenerative control is enabled during deceleration Check the data of function code H69 Automatic deceleration Mode selection gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 E13 and E15 Overload Measure the output current gt Reduce the load For fans or pumps decrease the frequency limiter value F15 In winter the load tends to increase Torque generated by the motor was insufficient Check that the motor starts running if the value of the torque boost F09 is increased gt Increase the value of the torque boost F09 An external potentiometer is used for frequency setting Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the potentiometer or set a ferrite core on the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 6 8 Possible Causes 7 The output frequency is limited by the torque limiter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 F41 E16 and E17 is correctly configured and the TL2 TL1 terminal command Select torque limiter level 2 1 is correct gt Correct the data of F40
260. gt Review the running sequence to avoid input of a Run command when this error occurs If this was not intended check the setting of H96 Turn the run command OFF before releasing the alarm 3 The forced stop digital Check that turning the STOP OFF decelerated the inverter to stop input STOP was turned gt If this was not intended check the settings of E01 through E07 for OFF terminals X1 through X7 24 er 7 Tuning error Problem Auto tuning failed Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 A phase was missing gt Properly connect the motor to the inverter There was a phase loss in the connection between the inverter and the motor 2 V f or the rated current of the Check whether the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 through H53 motor was not properly set H65 H66 P02 and P03 matches the motor specifications 3 The wiring length between Check whether the wiring length between the inverter and the motor exceeds the inverter and the motor 50 m was too long Small capacity inverters are greatly affected by the wiring length gt Review and if necessary change the layout of the inverter and the motor to shorten the connection wire Alternatively minimize the wiring length without changing the layout gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 to 1 Possible Causes 4 The rated capacity of the motor was significantly different f
261. gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary 2 The power for the control PCB did not reach a sufficiently high level Check if the jumper bar has been removed between terminals P1 and P or if there is a poor contact between the jumper bar and those terminals gt Mount a jumper bar or a DC reactor between terminals P1 and P For poor contact tighten up the screws 3 The keypad was not properly connected to the inverter Check whether the keypad is properly connected to the inverter gt Remove the keypad put it back and see whether the problem recurs gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem recurs 2 The desired menu is not di Possible Causes 1 The menu display mode is not selected appropriately When running the inverter remotely ensure that the extension cable is securely connected both to the keypad and to the inverter gt Disconnect the cable reconnect it and see whether the problem recurs gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem per recurs splayed Check and Measures Check the data of function code E52 Keypad Menu display mode gt Change the E52 data so
262. h to reverse rotation or to select the terminal signal FWD or REV as a run command change the data of function code F02 The moment a run command is entered the display of 3 lights up and tuning starts with the motor being stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 s Next the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning starts Upon completion of measurements the motor will decelerate to a stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 20 s Deceleration time After the motor decelerates to a stop in above tuning will continue with the motor being stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 20 s The motor is again accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning starts Upon completion of measurements the motor will decelerate to a stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 20 s Deceleration time After the motor decelerates to a stop in above tuning will continue with the motor being stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 20 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command F02 1 end will appear upon completion of the measurements Turning the run command OFF completes the tuning If the run command has been given through the keypad or the communications link it automatically turns OFF upon completion of the measurements which completes the tuning Upon completion of the tuning the subsequent function code P06 appears on the keypad Fi
263. handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor This instruction manual has been prepared for the inverter versions to be destined for Asia FRN _ _ __ G1 2A 4A and EU FRN _ _ _ G1 4E The major differences from other inverter versions are factory defaults Have this manual delivered to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC MEGA Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary e FRENIC MEGA User s Manual e RS 485 Communication User s Manual These materials are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use E Safety precautions Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual j WARN N G Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to CAU T O N dangerous conditions possibly resulting in minor or light bodily inj
264. hapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Model 1 Basic Type 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V class series HD and LD mode inverters 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series HD and LD mode inverters 8 2 Standard Model 2 EMC Filter Built in Type 8 2 1 Three phase 200 V class series HD and LD mode inverters 8 3 8 2 2 Three phase 400 V class series HD and LD mode inverters 8 3 Common Specifications 8 4 External Dimensions 8 4 1 Standard models 8 4 2 DC reactor Chapter 9 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS 9 1 9 1 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL certification X 9 1 1 Genera nx 9 1 2 Considerations when using FRENIC MEGA in systems to be certified by UL and cUL 9 2 Compliance with European Standards 9 3 Compliance with EMC Standards 9 3 1 General 9 3 2 Recommended installation procedure 9 9 3 3 Leakage current of EMC filter built in type of invert 9 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU ig 9 4 1 General commoni iiaae 9 4 2 Compliance with the harmonic component FEQUIALION Zisa anset a 9 5 9 5 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive in the EU 9 5 1 General 9 5 2 Points for consideration when using the FRENIC MEGA series in a system to be certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU 9 6 Compliance with EN954 1 Category 3 9 6 1 General 9 6 2 EN954 1 9 6 3 Notes Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 Acce
265. has dropped below the undervoltage detection level Possible Causes 1 Amomentary power failure occurred What to Check and Suggested Measures gt Release the alarm gt If you want to restart running the motor without treating this condition as an alarm set F14 to 3 4 or 5 depending on the load type 2 The power to the inverter was switched back to ON too soon when F14 1 Check if the power to the inverter was switched back to ON while the control power was still alive Check whether the LEDs on the keypad light gt Turn the power ON again after all LEDs on the keypad go off 3 The power supply voltage did not reach the inverter s specification range Measure the input voltage gt Increase the voltage to within the specified range 4 Peripheral equipment for the power circuit malfunctioned or the connection was incorrect Measure the input voltage to find which peripheral equipment malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect gt Replace any faulty peripheral equipment or correct any incorrect connections 5 Any other loads connected to the same power supply has required a large starting current causing a temporary voltage drop Measure the input voltage and check the voltage fluctuation gt Reconsider the power supply system configuration 6 Inverter s inrush current caused the power voltage drop because the power supply transformer capacity was in
266. he LED displays the alarm err Possible Causes 1 The 0 keys were held down for more than 5 seconds What to Check and Suggested Measures gt To escape from this alarm state press the key 31 cof PID feedback wire break Problem The PID feedback wire is broken Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The PID feedback signal Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected correctly wire is broken gt Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected correctly Or tighten up the related terminal screws gt Check whether any contact part bites the wire sheath 2 PID feedback related Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g circuit affected by strong correct grounding and routing of signal wires communication cables and electrical noise main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures gt Separate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as possible 32 dba Braking transistor error Problem A braking transistor error is detected Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The braking transistor is broken Check whether resistance of the braking resistor is correct or there is a misconnection of the resistor gt Consult your Fuji Electric representative for repair 33 ero Positioning control error Problem An excessive positioning deviation has occurred when the servo lock func
267. he inverter output according to the integrated sequence LL For details refer to Chapter 5 in FRENIC MEGA User s Manual m Servo lock command LOCK Function code data 47 Turning this terminal command ON makes the inverter ready for servo lock operation When the actual speed becomes zero e g by turning the run command OFF the inverter starts the servo lock operation For details refer to the descriptions of J97 to J99 A WARNING Even if the run command is set to OFF voltage is output to inverter output terminals U V and W if the servo lock command is ON An electric shock may occur Pulse train input PIN available only on terminal X7 Function code data 48 Pulse train sign SIGN available on terminals except X7 Function code data 49 Assigning the command PIN to digital input terminal X7 enables the frequency command by the pulse train input Assigning the command SIGN to one of the digital input terminals except X7 enables the pulse train sign input to specify the polarity of frequency command Refer to the description of F01 For the pulse train input function codes d62 Command Pulse rate input Pulse count factor 1 and d63 Command Pulse rate input Pulse count factor 2 define the relationship between the input pulse rate and the frequency command Reference Frequency reference f Hz Pulse count factor 2 d63 Pulse train input rate 0 Np kp s Pulse cou
268. he inverter s primary circuit connect the primary circuit of the MC to these terminals RO and TO _ _ When introducing a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker Note ELCB connect its output secondary side to terminals RO and TO Connecting its input primary side to those terminals causes the RCD ELCB to malfunction since the input power voltage to the inverter is three phase but the one to terminals RO and TO is single phase To avoid such problems be sure to insert an insulation transformer or auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic contactor in the location shown in Figure 2 8 Residual current operated protectice devide P1 P Earth leakage AC reactor circuit breaker Radio noise filter Magnetic Power supply Noise tier contactor Insulation transformer Power supply for inverter control Magnetic contactor Auxiliary B contacts Figure 2 8 Connection Example of residual current operated protective device RCD Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker ELCB C Note When connecting a PWM converter with an inverter do not connect the power supply line directly SS to terminals RO and TO If a PWM is to be connected insert an insulation transformer or auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic contactor at the power supply side For connection examples at the PWM converter side refer to the PWM Converter Instruction Manual Molded case circuit breaker or Residual current op
269. he motor 2 Keypad Enables Gur 0 keys to run and stop the motor Note that this run command enables only the forward rotation Forward rotation There is no need to specify the rotation direction 3 Keypad Enables Gur E keys to run and stop the motor Note that this run command enables only the reverse rotation Reverse rotation There is no need to specify the rotation direction Cote e When function code F02 0 or 1 the Run forward FWD and Run reverse REV terminal commands must be assigned to terminals FWD and REV respectively When the FWD or REV is ON the F02 data cannot be changed When changing terminal command assignments to terminals FWD and REV from commands other than the FWD and REV to the FWD or REV with F02 being set to 1 be sure to turn the target terminal OFF beforehand otherwise the motor may unintentionally rotate In addition to the run command sources described above higher priority command sources including remote and local mode see Section 4 2 2 and communications link are provided For details refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 6 in FRENIC MEGA User s Manual F03 Maximum Frequency 1 F03 specifies the maximum frequency to limit the output frequency Specifying the maximum frequency exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Make sure that the maximum frequency setting matches the equipment r
270. he other mode H61 1 in which the reference frequency applied in the previous UP DOWN control applies as the initial value When H61 0 the reference frequency applied by the previous UP DOWN control has been cleared to 0 so at the next restart including powering ON use the UP terminal command to accelerate the speed as needed When H61 1 the inverter internally holds the current output frequency set by the UP DOWN control and applies the held frequency at the next restart including powering ON Cote At the time of restart if an UP or DOWN terminal command is entered before the internal frequency reaches the output frequency saved in the memory the inverter saves the current output frequency into the memory and starts the UP DOWN control with the new frequency Pressing one of these keys overwrites the frequency held in the inverter Frequency Frequency saved in internal memory Output frequency sonani ON OFF l ON UP terminal command ow Initial frequency for the UP DOWN control when the frequency command source is switched When the frequency command source is switched to the UP DOWN control from other sources the initial frequency for the UP DOWN control is as listed below Frequency command source Switching command Initial frequency for UP DOWN control H61 0 H61 1 Other than UP DOWN F01 C30 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Reference frequency given sourc
271. he phases will be lost In such a case this protection feature does not work Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor the factory default level or user setup level Note If the multi function keypad is mounted the inverter does not perform automatic capacitance measurement of the DC link bus capacitor using the factory default level since the inverter s conditions are different from the ones applied at shipment It is therefore necessary to select the user setup level Using the user setup level requires performing the setup procedure for the user ordinary operation beforehand Refer to Chapter 7 Section 7 3 1 Judgment on service life Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of time for discharging after power OFF The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter Therefore if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly the discharging time cannot be accurately measured and as a result it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached To avoid such an error you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor Since load may vary significantly in the following cases disable the judgment on the life during o
272. heir data that you changed Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 3 ROM version Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 a kwon Date of purchase cop Inquiries for example point and extent of breakage uncertainties failure phenomena and other circumstances 7 6 2 Product warranty To all our customers who purchase Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems products Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials please be aware that any items such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the contract catalog specifications or other materials will be as mentioned below In addition the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the place where they can be used etc and may require periodic inspection Please confirm these points with your sales representative or directly with this company Furthermore regarding purchased products and delivered products we request that you take adequate consideration of the necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management and maintenance even before receiving your products 1 Free of charge warranty period and warranty range 1 Free of charge warranty period 1 The product warranty period is 1 year from the date of purchase or 24 months from the manufacturing date imprinted on the name
273. hen pull it upward as shown below While pressing the wiring guide upward pull it out toward you After carrying out wiring see Sections 2 3 2 through 2 3 7 put the wiring guide and the front cover back into place in the reverse order of removal a While pressing the wiring guide upward pull it out toward you Front cover fixing screw Front cover Wiring guide Figure 2 4 Removing the Front Cover and the Wiring Guide FRN11G1m 40 Note A box in the above figure replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above figure replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 2 For inverters with a capacity of 30 to 75 kW Loosen the four front cover fixing screws hold the cover with both hands slide it upward slightly and pull it toward you as shown below After carrying out wiring see Sections 2 3 2 through 2 3 7 align the screw holes provided in the front cover with the screws on the inverter case then put the front cover back into place in the reverse order of removal Tip To expose the control printed circuit board control PCB open the keypad enclosure Front cover fixing screws Keypad enclosure Front cover 2 Front cover fixing screws Tightening torque Figure 2 5 Removing the Front Cover FRN30G1 40 Note A box W in the above figure replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above figure replaces A
274. ifies the acceleration time the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency F08 specifies the deceleration time the length of time the frequency decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz Acc time 1 Dec time 1 F07 Maximum F08 i frequency F03 Starting Stop frequency frequency 1 F25 Actual Actual acc time dec time Pa If you choose S curve acceleration deceleration or curvilinear acceleration deceleration in Note Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H07 the actual acceleration deceleration times are longer than the specified times e Specifying an improperly short acceleration deceleration time may activate the current limiter torque limiter or anti regenerative control resulting in a longer acceleration deceleration time than the specified one Four different acceleration time and deceleration time can be specified for each The combinations of ON OFF states of the two terminal commands RT2 and RT1 offer four choices of acceleration deceleration time 1 to 4 as listed below If no terminal command is assigned only the acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 is effective Terminal command Terminal command Acceleration deceleration time RT2 RT1 OFF OFF Acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 OFF ON Acceleration deceleration time 2 E10 E11 ON OFF Acceleration deceleration time 3 E12 E13 ON ON Acceleration deceleration ti
275. igate the cause referring to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Turn the power ON and check that the reference frequency 00 Hz is blinking on the LED monitor 2 Seta low reference frequency such as 5 Hz using WO keys Check that the frequency is blinking on the LED monitor 3 Press the key to start running the motor in the forward direction Check that the reference frequency is displayed on the LED monitor 4 To stop the motor press the key lt Check points during a test run gt Check that the motor is running in the forward direction Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration e Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration When no abnormality is found press the E key again to start driving the motor then increase the reference frequency using A keys Check the above points again If any problem is found modify the function code data again as described below Tip f event the speed limiting function is provided Depending on the settings of function codes the motor speed may rise to an unexpectedly high and dangerous level particularly under vector control with without speed sensor To avoid such an If the user is unfamiliar with the function code settings e g when the user starts up the inverter for the first time it is recommended that the frequency limiter high F15 and the torque control speed limit 1 2 d32 d33 be used At the start
276. igure 9 1 MIA _ rT lemme Hepes Bea S F Output grounding g D C J i Input grounding Input wires Output wires Figure 9 1 Wiring for EMC Filter Built in Type Inverters with a Capacity of 5 5 to 11 kW 9 2 2 For connection to inverter s control terminals and for connection of the RS 485 communication signal cable use shielded wires As with the motor clamp the shields firmly to a grounded panel 3 If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level enclose the inverter and its peripherals within a metal panel as shown in Figure 9 2 Note Connect the shielding layer of shielded cable to the motor and panel electrically and ground the Metal panel MECE Or x motor and panel Power RCD ELCB FRENIC MEGA supply N Three phase Shielded cable with overcurrent protection Figure 9 2 Mounting the Inverter in a Metal Panel m Incase an EMC compliant filter optional is externally used 1 Mount the inverter and the filter on a grounded panel or metal plate Use shielded wires for the motor cable and route the cable as short as possible Firmly camp the shields to the metal plate to ground them Further connect the shielding layers electrically to the grounding terminal of the motor 2 For connection
277. inery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting Otherwise an accident could occur E Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link bus voltage goes below the undervoltage detection level while the inverter is running If the load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted Upon recognizing a momentary power failure the inverter enters the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and prepares for restart When power is restored the inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready to run state When a momentary power failure occurs the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay sequence circuits may also drop so as to turn the run command OFF In consideration of such a situation the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run command input after the inverter enters a ready to run state If a run command is received within 2 seconds the inverter begins the restart processing in accordance with the F14 data Mode selection If no run command has been received within 2 second wait period the inverter cancels the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and needs to be st
278. inforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the sheath might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Doing so could cause an accident or an electric shock Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Otherwise an electric shock could occur ACAUTION The inverter motor and wiring generate electric noise Be careful about malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices To prevent them from malfunctioning implement noise control measures Otherwise an accident could occur Operation AWARNING Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON Do not remove the cover when the inverter power is ON Otherwise an electric shock could occur Do not operate switches with wet hands Doing so could
279. information 3 4 8 Copying data Menu 7 Data Copying Menu 7 Data Copying is used to read function code data out of an inverter for storing it in the keypad or writing it into another inverter It is also used to verify the function code data stored in the keypad with the one configured in the inverter The keypad serves as a temporary storage media In addition using Menu 7 allows you to store the running status information in the keypad detach the keypad from the inverter connect it to a PC running FRENIC Loader at an office or off site place and check the inverter running status without removing the inverter itself To store the inverter running status information into the keypad use Read data read or Read inverter running information chec function For details on how to connect the keypad to a PC and check the inverter running status information stored in the keypad refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual Figure 3 6 shows the menu transition in Menu 7 Data Copying The keypad can hold function code data for a single inverter t i i i i i ae i Le l A 5 to List of copying functions Data copying status i i j i oa i TPS eo gt EA gt ER moo 5 f 4 aa End of read Ate eor z ie J End of write ia Ern RA Write error Incompatible or cod
280. ing would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the tuning results or any error in the tuning process it displays er 7 and discards the tuning data Listed below are possible causes that trigger tuning errors Possible tuning error causes Details An interphase voltage unbalance or output phase loss has been detected Error in tuning results Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter due to the output circuit opened Output current error An abnormally high current has flown during tuning During tuning a run command has been turned OFF or STOP Force to stop BX Sequence error Coast to a stop DWP Protect from dew condensation or other similar terminal command has been received During tuning any of the operation limiters has been activated Error limitation 2 8 a f ordue te lila The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter high has limited tuning operation Other errors An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred If any of these errors occurs remove the error cause and perform tuning again or consult your Fuji Electric representative Cote If a filter other than the Fuji optional output filter OFL DA is connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit the tuning result cannot be assured
281. inst the continuous current level decreases For the rated current level see Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS The LD mode inverter is subject to restrictions on the function code data setting range and internal processing as listed below Function codes HD mode DC braking Braking level Setting range 0 to 100 LD mode Remarks In the LD mode a value Setting range 0 to 80 out of the range if ing range Motor sound Setting range Carrier frequency specified automatically Setting range changes to the 0 75 to 16 kHz 0 4 to 22 kW 0 75 to 16 kHz 0 4 to 18 5 kW maximum value 0 75 to 16 kHz 30 to 55 kW 0 75 to 10 kHz 22 to 55 kW allowable in the LD 0 75 to 10 kHz 75 to 630 kW 0 75 to 6 kHz 75 to 630 kW mode Current limiter Level Initial value 160 Switching the drive mode between HD and LD with function code Initial value 130 F80 automatically initializes the F44 data to the value specified at left frequency Upper limit 500 Hz Current indication and output level for HD mode Based on the rated current Based on the rated current In the LD mode if the maximum frequency Maximum Setting range 25 to 500 Hz Setting range 25 to 500 Hz exceeds 120 Hz the Upper limit 120 Hz actual output frequency is internally limited to 120 Hz level for LD mode Switching to the LD mode does not automatically change the motor rated capacity P02 to th
282. integral component select local keypad operation protect the motor from dew condensation enable internal sequence to commercial lines 50 Hz enable internal sequence to commercial lines 60 Hz pulse train input pulse train sign switch to commercial power operation motor 1 to 4 select droop control servo lock command under PG vector control cancel PG alarm under PG vector control 8 6 Item Explanation Control Transistor output Inverter running frequency arrival signal 1 3 frequency detected 3 points undervoltage detected inverter stopped torque polarity detected inverter output limiting auto restarting after momentary power failure motor overload early warning keypad operation inverter ready to run switch motor power between commercial line and inverter output inverter input output commercial power select the AX terminal function primary side MC inverter output limiting with delay cooling fan in operation auto resetting universal DO heat sink overheat early warning service lifetime alarm reference loss detected inverter output on overload prevention control current detected 3 points low level current detected PID alarm under PID control PID control stopped due to slow flowrate low output torque detected torque detected 2 points switched to motor 1 to 4 run forward signal run reverse signal inverter in remote operation PTC status detection enabled brake signal analog f
283. ion 1 Disable factorization N Y 0 d59 Command Pulse Rate Input 0 Pulse train sign Pulse train input N Y 0 Yo poy F Pulse input property 1 Forward rotation pulse Reverse rotation pulse 2 _A B phase with 90 degree phase shift d61 Filter time constant 0 000 to 5 000 s Y Y 0 005 Y Y Y d62 Pulse count factor 1 1 to 9999 N Y 1 You YOY d63 Pulse count factor 2 1 to 9999 N Y ba iia ai a d67 Starting Mode Auto search 0 Disable N Y 2 NI YIN 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure 2 Enable At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start d68 Reserved 9 0 0 to 10 0 Hz N Y 40 d99 Reserved 9 0to7 Y bg 0 y codes LINK Functions Drive 5 control S21 of Code Name Data setting range ge w Default Refer to 25 a 8 setting vit w o w page 5 PG PG y01 RS 485 Communication 1 1 to 255 N y 1 YIY Y Station address y02 Communications error processing 0 Immediately trip with alarm er 8 Y y 0 HTE Y 1 Trip with alarm er 8 after running for the period specified by timer y03 2 Retry during the period specified by timer y03 If the retry fails trip with alarm er 8 If it succeeds continue to run 3 Continue to run y03 Timer 0 0 to 60 0 s Y Y 2 0 YIY Y y04 Baud rate 0 2400 bps Y N 3 b AS ae g 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps y05 Data length 0 8 bits 1 7 bits Y y IY y06 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits
284. ions see Figures 2 6 and 2 7 CN UX red CN UX red y 380 to 398 V 50 Hz 380 to 430 V 60 Hz Connector configuration Power source 398 to 440 V 50 Hz 430 to 480 V 60 Hz voltage Factory default Note The allowable power input voltage fluctuation is within 15 to 10 of the power source voltage m Fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W for 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above The standard FRENIC MEGA series accepts DC linked power input in combination with a PWM converter The 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above however contain AC driven components such as AC fans To supply AC power to those components exchange the CN R and CN W connectors as shown below and connect the AC power line to the auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 T1 For the switching instructions see Figures 2 6 and 2 7 CN R red CNW white CNW white g CN R red Connector 5 E configuration Use conditions When not using terminal R1 or T1 when ans terminals Rang TI Factory default e Feeding the DC linked power Combined with a PWM converter Note By factory default the fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W are set on FAN and NC positions respectively Do not exchange them unless you drive the inverter with a DC linked power supply Wrong configuration of thes
285. ires gt Implement noise control measures gt Separate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as possible 18 erZ Memory error Problem Error occurred in writing the data to the memory in the inverter Possible Causes 1 When writing data especially initializing or copying data the inverter was shut down so that the voltage to the control PCB has dropped What to Check and Suggested Measures Initialize the function code data with H03 1 After initialization check if pressing the key releases the alarm gt Revert the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation Inverter affected by strong electrical noise when writing data especially initializing or copying data Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires Also perform the same check as described in 1 above gt Implement noise control measures Revert the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation The control PCB failed Initialize the function code data by setting H03 to 1 then reset the alarm by pressing the key and check that the alarm goes on gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your Fuji Electric representative 19 er2 Keypad communications error Problem Acommunications error occurred between th
286. is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state 4 Turn OFF the main circuit power 2 The inverter automatically starts the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Make sure that appears on the LED monitor Cote If does not appear on the LED monitor the measurement has not started Check the conditions listed in 1 6 After has disappeared from the LED monitor turn ON the main circuit power again 7 Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and note the reading relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor 7 5 2 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions When bit 3 of H98 data is 1 the inverter automatically measures the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is turned OFF This measurement requires setting up the load conditions for ordinary operation and measuring the reference capacitance when the inverter is introduced to the practical operation using the setup procedure given below Reference capacitance setup procedure 1 Set function code H98 Protection maintenance function to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 1 refer to function code H98 2 Turn OFF all run commands 3 Make
287. itches with wet hands Otherwise an electric shock could occur Turn the power ON and check the following points The following is a case when no function code data is changed from the factory defaults 1 Check that the LED monitor displays 00 indicating that the reference frequency is 0 Hz that is blinking See Figure 4 3 If the LED monitor displays any number except 00 press O key to set 00 2 Check that the built in cooling fans rotate Inverters with a capacity of 1 5 kW or below are not equipped with a cooling fan Figure 4 3 Display of the LED Monitor after Power on 4 2 4 1 4 Switching between HD and LD drive modes The FRENIC MEGA series of inverters is applicable to two ratings high duty HD for heavy load applications and low duty LD for light load ones Function code F80 switches the FRENIC MEGA between the HD and LD modes F80 data Application Continuous current rating level Overload capability Hei HD High Duty default mode Capable of driving a motor whose Heavy load capacity is the same as the inverter s one 150 for 1 min 200 for 3 s Capable of driving a motor whose LD Low Duty mode Light load capacity is one rank higher than 120 for 1 min the inverter s one The LD mode inverter brings out the continuous current rating level which enables the inverter to drive a motor with one rank higher capacity but its overload capability aga
288. itching is realized by this IVS terminal command e When the inverter is driven by an external analog frequency command sources terminals 12 C1 and V2 Switching normal inverse operation can apply only to the analog frequency command sources terminals 12 C1 and V2 in frequency command 1 F01 and does not affect frequency command 2 C30 or UP DOWN control As listed below the combination of the Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency command 1 C53 and the IVS terminal command determines the final operation Combination of C53 and IVS Data for C53 IVS Final operation i OFF Normal 0 Normal operation ON Inverse i OFF Inverse 1 Inverse operation ON Normal E Interlock IL Function code data 22 In a configuration where a magnetic contactor MC is installed in the power output secondary circuit of the inverter the momentary power failure detection feature provided inside the inverter may not be able to accurately detect a momentary power failure by itself Using a digital signal input with the interlock command IL assures the accurate detection For details refer to the description of F14 Terminal command IL Meaning OFF No momentary power failure has occurred A momentary power failure has occurred ON f Restart after a momentary power failure enabled m Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus option LE Function code d
289. itching the motor drive source between the commercial power and the inverter output according to the integrated sequence Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 Function code data 40 and 41 Em Select AX terminal function AX Function code data 15 In response to a run command FWD this output signal controls the magnetic contactor on the commercial power supply side It comes ON when the inverter receives a run command and it goes OFF after the motor decelerates to stop with a stop command received This signal immediately goes OFF upon receipt of a coast to stop command or when an alarm occurs L1 RtoL3T UVW Power sauce Si al OY oe a a Y5A AX FWD FRENIC MEGA Run command FWD ON AX 52 1 ON Preparation for running E g Charging of capacitor i Inverter status Running Motor speed m Cooling fan in operation FAN Function code data 25 Under the cooling fan ON OFF control enabled H06 1 this output signal is ON when the cooling fan is in operation and OFF when it is stopped This signal can be used to make the cooling system of peripheral equipment interlocked for an ON OFF control E Auto resetting TRY Function code data 26 This output signal comes ON when auto resetting resetting alarms automatically is in progress Refer to the descriptions of H04 and H05 m Universal DO U DO Function code data 27 Assigning this out
290. iven by single phase power The input phase loss protection can be disabled with the function code H98 Protection Maintenance 6 Op Output phase loss Problem Output phase loss occurred Possible Causes 1 Inverter output wires are broken What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the output current gt Replace the output wires 2 The motor winding is broken Measure the output current gt Replace the motor 3 The terminal screws for inverter output were not tight enough Check if any screws on the inverter output terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque 4 A single phase motor has been connected 7 Oh Heat sink overheat gt Single phase motors cannot be used Note that the FRENIC MEGA only drives three phase induction motors Problem Temperature around heat sink has risen abnormally Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded the inverter s specification range What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted 2 Ventilation path is blocked Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink 3 Cooling fan s airflow volum
291. l Table 3 7 Running Status 3_ 07 Bit Assignment Notation Content it Notation Content when function code data is being written 1 under voltage limiting control Always 0 1 under torque limiting control 1 when the DC link bus voltage is higher Always 0 than the undervoltage level 1 when communication is enabled when ready for run and frequency commands 1 during braking via communications link 1 when an alarm has occurred 1 when the inverter output is shut down 1 during deceleration 1 during DC braking 1 during acceleration 1 during running in the reverse direction 1 under current limiting control 1 during running in the forward direction Table 3 8 Running Status 2 3_ 23 Bit Assignment Notation Content it Notation Content Speed limiting under torque control Not used Motor selection 00 Motor 1 01 Motor 2 10 Motor 3 11 Motor 4 Inverter drive control 0000 V f control with slip compensation inactive 0001 Dynamic torque vector control 0010 V f control with slip compensation active 0011 V f control with speed sensor 0100 Dynamic vector control with speed sensor 0101 Vector control without speed sensor 0110 Vector control with speed sensor 1010 Torque control Vector control without speed sensor Torque control Vector control with speed sensor Not used Table
292. l cooling the heat sink which dissipates about 70 of the nemal a T total heat total loss generated into air is situated outside the radiation x cooling equipment or the panel The external cooling therefore significantly 80 reduces heat radiating inside the equipment or panel To employ external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or Internal below use the external cooling attachment option for those with a Aea EE Heat capacity of 30 kW or above simply change the positions of the Max 50 C sink mounting bases Internal External air intake air intake Figure 2 2 External Cooling ACAUTION Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink Otherwise a fire or accident could occur To utilize external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above change the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases from the edge to the center of the inverter as illustrated in Figure 2 3 Screws differ in size length and count for each inverter Be sure to refer to the table below Table 2 3 Screw Count and Tightening Torque Base fixing screw Case fixing screw Tightening torque Inverter type Screw type and q ty Screw type and q ty er M6 x 20 M6 x 20 5 pcs for upper side FRN30G1 40 to FRN55G1 40 3 pes for lower side 2 pcs for upper side FRN45G1 20 FRN55G1 20 M6 x 20 M6 x 12
293. l measures For refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Appendix A gt Enable the Auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any causing noise details 2 ef Ground fault Problem A ground fault current flew from the output terminal of the inverter Possible Causes 1 3 Inverter output terminal s grounded ground fault Oun Overvoltage What to Check and Suggested Measures Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals U V and W and perform a Megger test gt Remove the grounded parts including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor Problem The DC link bus voltage was over the detection level of overvoltage Oul Overvoltage occurred during acceleration Ou2 Overvoltage occurred during deceleration Ou3 Overvoltage occurred during running at constant speed Possible Causes 1 The power supply voltage exceeded the inverter s specification range What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Decrease the voltage to within the specified range 2 A surge current entered the input power supply In the same power line if a phase advancing capacitor is turned ON OFF or a thyristor converter is activated a surge momentary large increase in the voltage or current may be caused in the input power gt Install a DC reactor The deceleration time was too short for the
294. lay for any fault ALM The THR command is self held and is reset when an alarm reset takes place Ti Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in peripheral equipment m Ready for jogging JOG Function code data 10 This terminal command is used to jog or inch the motor for positioning a work piece Turning this command ON makes the inverter ready for jogging Simultaneous keying o A keys on the keypad is functionally equivalent to this command however it is restricted by the run command source as listed below When the run command source is the keypad F02 0 2 or 3 Tomina gonmang O keys on the keypad Inverter running state ON Ready for jogging ake Pressing these keys toggles between the normal Normal operation operation and ready for jogging Ready for jogging When the run command source is digital input F02 1 Terminal commana A keys on the keypad Inverter running state ON Ready for jogging Disable OFF Normal operation Jogging operation Pressing the fuy key or turning the FWD or REV terminal command ON starts jogging For the jogging by the keypad the inverter jogs only when the fuy key is held down Releasing the key decelerates to stop During jogging the frequency specified by C20 Jogging Frequency and the acceleration deceleration
295. le integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz ISW60 Servo lock command LOCK Pulse train input available only on terminal X7 PIN Pulse train sign available on terminals except X7 SIGN Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 1 CRUN M1 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 2 CRUN M2 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 3 CRUN M3 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 4 CRUN M4 Select droop control DROOP Cancel PG alarm Run forward Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals by E98 and E99 Run reverse Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals by E98 and E99 For data 36 and 37 refer to the description about data 12 p ON Any negative logic Active OFF command cannot be assigned to the functions marked with in KNote the Active OFF column The Enable external alarm trip and Force to stop are fail safe terminal commands For example when data 9 in Enable external alarm trip Active OFF alarm is triggered when OFF when data 1009 Active ON alarm is triggered when ON Terminal function assignment and data setting m Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 Function code data 0 1 2 and 3 The combination of the ON OFF states of digital input signals SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 selects one of 16 different frequency command
296. lled voltage for 400 V class series Acceleration Time 1 0 00 to 6000 s Y Y 2 Y Y Y 5 30 Deceleration Time 1 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring Y Y 4D YIYIY 5 30 external soft start Torque Boost 1 0 0 to 20 0 percentage with respect to Rated Voltage Y Y 3 Y NY N YJ 5 30 at Base Frequency 1 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling Y Y 1 Y YJ Y 5 32 Protection for Motor 1 fan Select motor characteristics 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan Overload detection level 0 00 Disable Y Y1Y2 4 YIYIY 5 32 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor F12 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 min Y Y 5 MYON 5 32 Restart Mode after Momentary 0 Trip immediately Y y 1 Y YY 5 35 Power Failure Mode selection 1 Trip after a recovery from power failure 2 Trip after decelerate to stop 3 Continue to run for heavy inertia or general loads 4 Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads 5 Restart at the starting frequency F15 Frequency Limiter High 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 70 0 Y Y Y 5 40 Low 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 0 0 YJYJ Y 540 F18 Bias Frequency command 1 100 00 to 100 00 kai Y 0 00 Y Y Y 5 40 F20 DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz y Y 0 0 Y Y Y 5 42 F21 Braking level
297. log input Assuming the full scale 10 VDC of analog input as 100 10 50 100 Bias Gain base base point point C50 C34 Point A To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V set the bias to 0 F18 0 Since 1 V is the bias base point and it is equal to 10 of 10 V full scale of terminal 12 set the bias base point to 10 C50 10 Point B To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being at 5 V set the gain to 100 C32 100 Since 5 V is the gain base point and it is equal to 50 of 10 V full scale of terminal 12 set the gain base point to 50 C34 50 The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any base points is the Note same as that of Fuji conventional inverters of FRENIC5000G11S P11S series FVR E11S series etc 5 41 E Inthe case of bipolar input terminal 12 with C35 0 terminal V2 with C45 0 Setting C35 and C45 data to 0 enables terminal 12 and V2 to be used for bipolar input 10 V to 10 V respectively When both F18 Bias and C50 Bias base point are set to 0 the negative and positive voltage inputs produce reference frequencies symmetric about the origin point as shown below Reference frequency Terminal 12 input Terminal V2 input 10V i Gain 10 V base point C34 F20 to F22 DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency Braking level
298. lti frequency 0 to 7 steps SS4 3 1003 Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps SS8 4 1004 Select ACC DEC time 2 steps RT1 5 1005 Select ACC DEC time 4 steps RT2 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 7 1007 Coast to a stop BX 8 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 9 Active OFF 1009 Active ON 10 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 1 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 2 1012 Select motor 2 M2 13 Enable DC braking DCBRK 4 1014 TL2 TL1 17 1017 UP Increase output frequency 18 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN 19 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 21 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 22 1022 Interlock IL 24 1024 Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus LE 25 1025 Universal DL naana U D Enable auto search for idling motor Locos Specdiatstarting 222 2222 5 STM _ Force to stop STOP _ 30 Active OFF 1030 Active ON Pi itation to commercial power 60 Hz ISW60 Count the run time of commercial power driven 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential _ components PID RST 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 35 1035 Select local keypad operation LOC 36 1036 Select motor 3 M3 37 1037 Select motor 4 M4 39 ____ Protect motor from dew condensation__ DWP 40 Enable
299. m Environment 1 Check the surrounding temperature humidity vibration and atmosphere dust gas oil mist or water drops 2 Check that tools or other foreign materials or dangerous objects are not left around the equipment How to inspect 1 Check visually or measure using apparatus 2 Visual inspection Evaluation criteria 1 The standard specifications must be satisfied 2 No foreign or dangerous objects are left Input voltage Check that the input voltages of the main and control circuit are correct Measure the input voltages using a multimeter or the like The standard specifications must be satisfied 1 Check that the display is clear 2 Check that there is no missing part in the displayed characters Keypad 1 2 Visual inspection 1 2 The display can be read and there is no fault Check for 1 Abnormal noise or excessive vibration 2 Loose bolts at clamp sections 3 Deformation and breakage 4 Discoloration caused by overheat 5 Contamination and accumulation of dust or dirt Structure such as frame and cover 7 1 1 Visual or auditory inspection 2 Retighten 3 4 5 Visual inspection 1 2 3 4 5 No abnormalities Check part Common Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Continued Check item 1 Check that bolts and screws are tight and not missing 2 Check the devices and insulators for deformation
300. m Enable 3 wire operation HLD Function code data 6 Turning this terminal command ON self holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command to enable 3 wire inverter operation Short circuiting the terminals between HLD and CM i e when HLD is ON self holds the first FWD or REV command at its rising edge Turning HLD OFF releases the self holding When HLD is not assigned 2 wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect Output frequency REV ON HLD ON ON m Coast to a stop BX Function code data 7 Turning this terminal command ON immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarms 5 54 m Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state alarm output for any fault Turning it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state When you turn the RST command ON keep it ON for 10 ms or more This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation An alarm occurrence i Inverter Turning alarm display on and No alarm displayed running status holding alarm status Stop and ready to run Aamoutout ALN i tr Min 10 ms i Reset alarm E Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop displays the alarm 0 2 and outputs the alarm re
301. m Information amp a Press the gt key to proceed to a list of alarm codes e g O 1 In the list of alarm codes the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history Each time the O or Q key is pressed the last 4 alarms are displayed beginning with the most recent one in the order of and Press the Gas key with an alarm code being displayed The item number e g 6_ OO and the inverter status information e g Output frequency at the time of the alarm occurrence alternately appear at approx 1 second intervals Pressing the AandX keys displays other item numbers e g 6_ OZ and the status information e g Output current for that alarm code Press the key to return to the list of alarm codes Press the amp key again to return to the menu LED monitor shows item No Table 3 16 Display Items in Alarm Information Output frequency Description Output frequency before slip compensation Output current Output current Output voltage Output voltage Calculated torque Calculated motor output torque Reference frequency Frequency specified by frequency command Rotational direction Shows the rotational direction currently specified f forward r reverse stop Running status Running status as four hexadecimal digits Refer to E Displaying running status 3 07 and running status 2 3 23 in Section 3 4 4 Cu
302. m the motor and deactivating the safety devices 3 Tuning Set function code P04 to 1 or 2 and press the key The blinking of Z or 2 on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command The factory default is key on the keypad for forward rotation To switch to reverse rotation or to select the terminal signal FWD or REV as a run command change the data of function code F02 The moment a run command is entered the display of Z or 2 lights up and tuning starts with the motor being stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 s If P04 2 after the tuning in above the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning starts Upon completion of measurements the motor will decelerate to a stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 20 s Deceleration time If P04 2 after the motor decelerates to a stop in above tuning will continue with the motor being stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 20 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command F02 1 end will appear upon completion of the measurements Turning the run command OFF completes the tuning If the run command has been given through the keypad or the communications link it automatically turns OFF upon completion of the measurements which completes the tuning Upon completion of the tuning the subsequent function code P06 appears on the keypad Tuning errors Improper tun
303. mand Inverter driven motor selected Output signal M2 M3 M4 Function code group enabled SWM1 SWM2 SWM3 swma OFF OFF OFF 1st Motor Default codes ON OFF OFF OFF ON 2nd Motor A codes OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 3rd Motor b codes OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 4th Motor r codes OFF OFF OFF ON Switching the motors automatically switches the applicable function code group The inverter drives the motor with those function codes For details of precautions for switching motors and of applicable function codes refer to the description of A42 m Enable DC braking DCBRK Function code data 13 This terminal command gives the inverter a DC braking command through the inverter s digital input Refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22 for DC braking m Select torque limiter level 2 1 TL2 TL1 Function code data 14 This terminal command switches between torque limiter F40 and F41 and torque limiter 2 E16 and E17 as listed below If no TL2 TL1 terminal command is assigned torque limiter levels 1 1 and 1 2 F40 and F41 take effect by default Terminal command TL2 TL1 Torque limiter level OFF Torque limiter levels 1 1 and 1 2 F40 and F41 ON Torque limiter levels 2 1 and 2 2 E16 and E17 m Switch to commercial power for 50 Hz or 60 Hz SW50 and SW60 Function code data 15 and 16 When an external sequence switches the motor drive power from the commercial line to the inverter i
304. me 4 E14 E15 F09 Torque Boost 1 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 F09 specifies the torque boost level in order to assure sufficient starting torque F37 specifies V f pattern torque boost type and auto energy saving operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load Data for Auto energy F F37 V f pattern Torque boost saving Applicable load 0 Variable torque Torq s boost Variable torque load V f pattern u General purpose fans and pumps p specified by F09 purp pumps 1 Disable Constant torque load Linear Constant torque load 2 V f pattern Auto torque boost To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load 3 Variable torque Variable torque load V f pattern Torque boost General purpose fans and pumps specified by F09 4 Enable Constant torque load Linear Constant torque load 5 V f pattern Auto torque boost To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load Note If a required load torque acceleration toque is more than 50 of the constant torque it is recommended to select the linear V f pattern factory default E V f characteristics The FRENIC MEGA series of inverters offers a variety of V f patterns and torque boosts which include V f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps and for constant torque load including special pumps requiring high
305. mes Y Y 0 100 Y F F J04 Integral time 0 0 to 3600 0 s Y Wh 0 0 A TE J05 D Differential time 0 00 to 600 00 s Y b 000 YJYJ Y J06 Feedback filter 0 0 to 900 0 s Y Y 0 5 YYYY J08 Pressurization starting frequency 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y oo Y YI Y J09 Pressurizing time 0 to 60 s Y Y 0 YJIYJ Y J10 Anti reset windup 0 to 200 Y Y 200 Yu Y Y J11 Select alarm output 0 Absolute value alarm Y Y 0 XA YY 1 Absolute value alarm with Hold 2 Absolute value alarm with Latch 3 Absolute value alarm with Hold and Latch 4 Deviation alarm 5 Deviation alarm with Hold 6 Deviation alarm with Latch 7 Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch J12 Upper level alarm AH 100 to 100 Y y 100 Y Y Y J13 Lower level alarm AL 100 to 100 Y Y 0 a al ee Gl Oe d J15 Stop frequency for slow flowrate 0 0 Disable 1 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Vi 0 0 ENE 7 The motor constant is automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table 5 3 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 5 18 Drive 5 contr
306. mon to all inverter types jE E Y3 Y4 V2 FM1 FM2 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 EN OO v4 I l ES 30A 308 30C Y1 Y2 CMY 11 12 13 C1 11 CM FWD REVPLC PLC DX 0x SD 688 slelelelolelele 2 5 2 3 3 Recommended wire sizes Tables 2 5 and 2 6 list the recommended wire sizes Use crimp terminals covered with an insulation sheath or with an insulation tube The recommended wire sizes for the main circuits are examples of using a single HIV wire JIS C3317 for 75 C at a surrounding temperature of 50 C Table 2 5 Recommended Wire Sizes Terminals common to all inverters Recommended wire size mm2 Control circuit terminals 0 65 to 0 82 mm AWG19 or AWG18 1 Auxiliary power input terminals for the control circuit RO and TO Auxiliary power input terminals for the fans 2 0 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and R1 and T1 400 V class series with 75 kW or above 2 0 1 Using wires exceeding the recommended sizes may lift the front cover depending upon the number of wires used impeding keypad normal operation Table 2 6 Recommended Wire Sizes Recommended wire size mm Nominal Main circuit applied Inverter type Main circuit power motor input Grounding kW L1 R L2 S L3 T EG w DCR w o DCR Inverter Braking output resistor U V W P DB voltage Power supply FRNO0 4G1m 20 FRNO 75G1m 20 FRN
307. motor is also switched to the one corresponding to the motor Terminal command Inverter driven motor selected Motor parameter Output signal M2 M3 m4 Function code group enabled switching code turned ON OFF OFF OFF 1st Motor Default codes SWM1 ON 2nd Motor A codes A42 SWM2 OFF ON 3rd Motor b codes b42 SWM3 OFF OFF ON 4th Motor r codes r42 SWM4 C Note From the point of view of signal timing a combination of M2 M3 and M4 must be determined at L least 2 ms before the signal of a run command is established Data setting of function codes A42 b42 or r42 selects the object of switching by a combination of M2 M3 and M4 between the motor 2nd 3rd or 4th and the particular parameters A codes b codes or r codes Data for A42 b42 or r42 Function Switching is available when the inverter is Motor Switch to the 2nd 3rd or 4th In a stopped state all the run commands are OFF 0 motor Parameter Switch to particular A codes Runni b codes or r codes unning If data of function code A42 b42 or r42 is set to 0 Motor Switch to the 2nd 3rd or 4th motor a combination of M2 M3 and M4 switches the motor to any of the 2nd to 4th motors and also switches the function code group enabled to the one corresponding to the selected motor as listed in Table 5 8 Note that however the functions listed in Table 5 9 are unavailable when any of the 2nd
308. mulative run time Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Counter range 0 to 65 535 hours Display Upper 2 digits and lower 3 digits are displayed alternately Example 0 lt 535h 535 hours 65 lt 535h 65 535 hours The lower 3 digits are displayed with hour When the count exceeds 65 535 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again No of startups Shows the content of the motor startup counter i e the number of run commands issued Counter range 0 to 65 530 times Display range 0 to 9999 If the count exceeds 10 000 the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value When the count exceeds 65 530 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again DC link bus voltage Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit Unit V volts Temperature inside the inverter Shows the temperature inside the inverter Unit C Max temperature of heat sink Shows the temperature of the heat sink Unit C Terminal I O signal status displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Terminal input signal status in hexadecimal Terminal output signal status in hexadecimal Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals in Section 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status for details No of consecutive occurrences Shows the number of times th
309. n if the pre excitation command is not assigned specifying H85 Pre excitation Time data to other than 0 00 enables the inverter to automatically start pre exciting of the motor when it is turned ON Refer to the descriptions of H84 and H85 m Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST Function code data 33 Turning this terminal command ON resets the integral and differential components of the PID processor For details refer to the descriptions of J codes m Hold PID integral component PID HLD Function code data 34 Turning this terminal command ON holds the integral components of the PID processor For details refer to the descriptions of J codes E Select local keypad operation LOC Function code data 35 This terminal command switches the source of the run command and frequency command between remote and local by an external digital input signal E Protect motor from dew condensation DWP Function code data 39 Turning this terminal command ON supplies a DC current to the motor that is on halt in order to generate heat preventing dew condensation For details refer to the description of J21 m Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz and 60 Hz ISW50 and ISW60 Function code data 40 and 41 With the terminal command ISW50 or ISW60 assigned the inverter controls the magnetic contactor that switches the motor drive source between the commercial power and t
310. n is called Cursor movement Cip It is possible to change or add function code items subject to quick setup For details consult your Fuji Electric representatives 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 1 Data Setting f__ through y__ in Programming mode allows you to set up all function codes To set function codes in this menu it is necessary to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The menu transition in Menu 1 Data Setting is just like that in Menu 0 Quick Setup Basic key operation The basic key operation in Menu 1 Data Setting is just like that in Menu 0 Quick Setup 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears Use the A and Q keys to display the desired function code group from the choices f__ through y _ Press the key to proceed to the list of function codes for the selected function code group Use the A and Q keys to display the desired function code then press the key The data of this function code appears Change the function code data using the amp and Q keys Press the Gas key to establish the function code data The saue appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code Pressing the amp key
311. n loss factor 1 0 00 to 20 00 Y Y 1Y2 7 aaa Rs P14 Iron loss factor 2 0 00 to 20 00 Y_ 1 Y2 0 00 Y Y Y P15 Iron loss factor 3 0 00 to 20 00 Y_ 1 Y2 0 00 Y Y Y P16 Magnetic saturation factor 1 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 YIYLY P17 Magnetic saturation factor 2 0 0 to 300 0 Y_ 1Y2 7 YYY P18 Magnetic saturation factor 3 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 YIYIY P19 Magnetic saturation factor 4 0 0 to 300 0 Y_ 1Y2 7 YIYLY P20 Magnetic saturation factor 5 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 Y YY P21 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 TEY factor a P22 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Yi Ya 7 Y IYI Y factor b P23 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Yiya 7 Y Y Y factor c P53 X correction factor 1 0 to 300 Yy Y1Yy2 100 Y Y Y P54 X correction factor 2 0 to 300 Y Y1Y2 100 Y Y Y P55_ Torque current under vector control 0 00 to 2000 A N_ Y1Y2 7 N Y Y P56 Induced voltage factor under 50 to 100 N Y1Y2 85 N Y Y vector control P57 _ Reserved 9 0 000 to 20 000 s Y_ Y 1 Y2 0 082 Motor 1 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series N Y1Y2 0 Y 5 72 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 2 Motor characteristics 2 Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6
312. n power is restored if a run command has been input restart begins at the output frequency saved during the power failure processing This setting is ideal for fan applications with a large moment of inertia Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter saves the output frequency at that time and shuts down the output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state When power is restored if a run command has been input restart begins at the output frequency saved during the power failure processing This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly such as fans even after the motor enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure Restart at the starting frequency After a momentary power failure restoring power and then entering a run command restarts the inverter at the starting frequency specified by function code F23 This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure 5 35 Fn When the motor restarts after a momentary power failure the auto search mode can apply which
313. n the run forward or reverse switch ON short circuit 4 For precautions in wiring refer to Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 Function Code Tables Function codes enable the FRENIC MEGA series of inverters to be set up to match your system requirements Each function code consists of a 3 letter alphanumeric string The first letter is an alphabet that identifies its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the group The function codes are classified into twelve groups Fundamental Functions F codes Extension Terminal Functions E codes Control Functions C codes Motor 1 Parameters P codes High Performance Functions H codes Motor 2 3 and 4 Parameters A b and r codes Application Functions 1 and 2 J and d codes Link Functions y codes and Option Functions o codes To determine the property of each function code set data to the function code This manual does not contain the descriptions of Option Function o codes For Option Function o codes refer to the instruction manual for each option The following descriptions supplement those given in the function code tables on page 5 3 and subsequent pages m Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is running Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the inverter is running Change when Not
314. nce This function exclusively applies to the 1st motor Operating the keypad can display the cumulative run time of motor 1 This feature is useful for management and maintenance of the mechanical system H94 allows you to set the cumulative run time of the motor to the desired value For example specifying 0 clears the cumulative run time of the motor Even when a motor is driven by commercial power not by the inverter it is possible to count the cumulative run time of the motor by detecting the ON OFF state of the auxiliary contact of the magnetic contactor for switching to the commercial power line To enable this function assign CRUN M1 through CRUN M4 Commercial power driving status of motor 1 through 4 function code data 72 through 75 to one of the digital input terminals Cote H94 data is in hexadecimal notation It appears however in decimal notation on the keypad H79 Preset Startup Count for Maintenance M1 H44 Startup Counter for Motor 1 H79 Preset startup count for maintenance M1 specifies the number of inverter startup times to determine the next maintenance timing e g for replacement of a belt When the count of the startup counter for motor 1 H44 reaches the number specified by H79 Preset startup count for maintenance M1 the inverter outputs the maintenance timer signal MNT to remind the user of the need of system maintenance To enable this function assign the maintenance timer signal MNT to one of
315. nd delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or service costs Depending on the request these can be discussed separately 6 Applicable scope of service Above contents shall be assumed to apply to transactions and use of the country where you purchased the products Consult the local supplier or Fuji for the detail separately Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Model 1 Basic Type 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V class series HD and LD mode inverters Item Po Specifications O OO OS S S O Specifications Type FRN___G1S 20 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 55 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 Nominal applied motor kW Rated capacity kVA HD R y 14 45 55 68 81 ia 16 55 68 81 107 Three phase 200 to 230 V with AVR function 5 8 11 18 37 76 90 119 146 180 215 Rated current A 4 F 2 _ L Jats 462 88 115 146 180 215 283 42 80 107 Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function Output ratings 150 1 min 200 3 0 s 120 1 min Hz 200 to 220 V 50 Hz 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Allowable voltage frequ Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 Frequency 5 to 5 Required capacity 06 1 2 22 31 5 2 7 4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 with DCR kVA 6 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 20 10 to 15 70 15 7 to 12 Braking
316. nd raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation This prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip That is this function is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy The compensation value is specified by combination of function codes P12 Rated slip frequency P09 Slip compensation gain for driving and Pit Slip compensation gain for braking H68 enables or disables the slip compensation function according to the motor driving conditions Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone H68 data Accl Decel Constant speed Base frequency Above the base or below frequency Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Disable m Dynamic torque vector control To get the maximal torque out of a motor this control calculates the motor torque for the load applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation function This control is effective for improving the system response to external disturbances such as load fluctuation and the motor speed control accuracy Note that the inverter may not respond to a rapid load fluctuation since this control is an open loop V f control that does not perform the current control unlike the vector control The advantages of this cont
317. necting an optional braking unit or DC braking resistor DBR For inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above both a braking unit and DBR are necessary Connect the terminals P and N of a braking unit to those on the inverter Arrange the inverter and the braking unit so that the wiring length comes to 5 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel Next connect the terminals P and DB of a DBR to those on the braking unit Arrange the braking unit and DBR so that the wiring length comes to 10 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel For details about the wiring refer to the Braking Unit Instruction Manual 2 Connecting other external devices A DC link bus of other inverter s or a PWM converter is connectable to these terminals When you need to use the DC link bus terminals P and N consult your Fuji Electric representative Switching connectors m Power switching connectors CN UX for 400 V class series with 75 kW or above The 400 V class series with 75 kW or above is equipped with a set of switching connectors male which should be configured according to the power source voltage and frequency By factory default a jumper female connector is set to U1 If the power supply to the main power inputs L1 R L2 S L3 T or the auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 T1 matches the conditions listed below change the jumper to U2 For the switching instruct
318. ner Approx 50 of the base frequency Tuning operation Cote The default value of the speed regulator is set low to prevent causing a system oscillation hunting However hunting may occur during tuning due to machinery related conditions which may cause a tuning error er 7 If hunting occurs reduce the gain for the speed regulator and perform the tuning again E If tuning while the motor is rotating cannot be selected If the tuning while the motor is rotating under vector control P04 3 cannot be selected due to restrictions on the machinery perform the tuning with the motor stops P04 1 by following the procedure below Compared to the former tuning the latter may show rather inferior performance in the speed control accuracy or stability perform sufficient tests beforehand by connecting the motor with the machinery 1 For Fuji standard motors 8 series 6 series or Fuji VG motors exclusively designed for vector control Specify the P99 data according to the motor type Initialize the motor 1 parameters by setting H03 data to 2 Specify the F04 FO5 P02 and P03 data according to the motor rated values Perform the tuning while the motor stops P04 1 2 For motors whose motor ratings are unknown such as ones made by other manufacturers Specify the F04 F05 P02 and P03 data according to the motor rated values printed on the motor s nameplate Specify motor ratings the da
319. netic Moet ammod Sete Nea as nox ste S saturation saturation kW motor A A frequency factor 1 factor 2 kW Hz P02 P03 P06 P07 P08 P12 P13 P16 P17 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 40 0 37 11 40 9 71 1 77 14 00 93 8 87 5 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 62 0 50 10 74 10 50 1 77 14 00 93 3 86 1 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 1 18 0 97 10 69 10 66 2 33 12 60 89 7 81 9 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 2 10 1 52 8 47 11 34 2 40 9 88 88 7 81 3 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 3 29 2 11 7 20 8 94 2 33 7 40 88 3 77 7 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 5 56 2 76 5 43 9 29 2 00 5 85 92 1 82 8 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 8 39 4 45 5 37 9 09 1 80 5 91 85 1 74 6 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 13 67 7 03 4 80 9 32 1 93 5 24 86 0 76 9 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 20 50 10 08 4 37 11 85 1 40 4 75 88 6 79 2 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 26 41 11 46 3 73 12 15 157 4 03 87 7 80 0 11 00 to 14 99 11 38 24 16 23 3 13 12 49 1 07 3 92 91 3 83 3 15 00 to 18 49 15 50 05 18 33 2 69 13 54 1 13 3 32 90 5 83 5 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 60 96 19 62 2 42 13 71 0 87 3 34 90 7 83 0 22 00 to 29 99 22 70 97 23 01 2 23 13 24 0 90 3 28 89 7 81 3 30 00 to 36 99 30 97 38 35 66 2 18 12 38 0 80 3 10 90 2 81 6 37 00 to 44 99 37 118 2 38 04 2 28 13 56 0 80 2 30 88 7 78 9 45 00 to 54 99 45 141 9 43 54 2 09 13 36 0 80 2 18 89 0 79 7 55 00 to 74 99 55 172 8 53 72 1 94 13 39 0 94 2 45 89 2 79 3 75 00 to 89 99 75 236 5 76 27 1 64 13 97 0 80 2 33 88 1 78 0 90 00 to 109 9 90 282 0 90 93 1 43 13 26 0 80 2 3 88 8 79 0 110 0 or above 110 342 0 83 60 1 65 17 25 0 66 1 73 90 5 82 6 i 3 Magnetic Magnetic M
320. ng of speed limit function d32 and d33 gt Disable the speed limit function d32 and d33 Insufficient gain of the speed controller Check whether the actual speed overshoots the commanded one in higher speed operation gt Increase the speed controller gain d03 Depending on the situations reconsider the setting of the filter constant or the integral time Noises superimposed on the PG wire 17 pg PG wire break Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Appendix A details Problem The pulse generator PG wire has been broken somewhere in the circuit Possible Causes 1 The wire between the pulse generator PG and the option card has been broken What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the pulse generator PG is correctly connected to the option card or any wire is broken gt Check whether the PG is connected correctly Or tighten up the related terminal screws gt Check whether any joint or connecting part bites the wire sheath gt Replace the wire PG related circuit affected by strong electrical noise Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires communication cables and main circuit w
321. nputting the terminal command SW50 or SW60 at the specified timing enables the inverter to start running the motor with the current commercial power frequency regardless of settings of the reference output frequency in the inverter A running motor driven by commercial power is carried on into inverter operation This command helps you smoothly switch the motor drive power source when the motor is being driven by commercial power from the commercial power to the inverter power LL For details refer to Chapter 5 in FRENIC MEGA User s Manual m UP Increase output frequency and DOWN Decrease output frequency commands UP and DOWN Function code data 17 and 18 Frequency setting When the UP DOWN control is selected for frequency setting with a run command ON turning the UP or DOWN terminal command ON causes the output frequency to increase or decrease respectively within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as listed below UP DOWN Function Data 17 Data 18 OFF OFF Keep the current output frequency ON OFF Increase the output frequency with the acceleration time currently specified OFF ON Decrease the output frequency with the deceleration time currently specified ON ON Keep the current output frequency The UP DOWN control is available in two modes one mode H61 0 in which the initial value of the reference frequency is fixed to 0 00 at the start of the UP DOWN control and t
322. ns of J15 through J17 Low output torque detected U TL Function code data 45 This output signal comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter or torque command drops below the level specified by E80 Detect low torque Level for the period specified by E81 Detect low torque Timer The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Refer to the descriptions of E80 and E81 Torque detected 1 TD1 Function code data 46 Torque detected 2 TD2 Function code data 47 This output signal TD1 or TD2 comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter or torque command exceeds the level specified by E78 or E80 Torque detection Level for the period specified by E79 or E81 Torque detection Timer respectively The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Refer to the descriptions of E78 through E81 CNote The function codes listed below are shared with another feature Related feature 2 Torque detected 2 TD2 Related feature 1 Low output torque detected U TL Function code E80 E81 Motor 1 2 3 and 4 selected SWM1 SWM2 SWM3 and SWM4 Function code data 48 49 50 and 51 The output signal SWM1 SWM2 SWM3 or SWM4 comes ON when motor 1 2 3 or 4 is selected respectively Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 Function code data 12 36 and 37 Running forward FRUN Function code data 52 Running reverse RRUN Function code data 53 Outpu
323. nsportation Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink When changing the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases use only the specified screws Otherwise a fire or an accident might result Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts Doing so could cause fire an accident or injuries Wiring AWARNING If no zero phase current earth leakage current detective device such as a ground fault relay is installed in the upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system s shutdown undesirable to factory operation install a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB individually to inverters to break the individual inverter power supply lines only Otherwise a fire could occur When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the recommended devices within the recommended current capacity Use wires in the specified size Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise a fire could occur When there is more than one combinati
324. nt factor 1 d62 Relationship between the Pulse Train Input Rate and Frequency Command Reference As shown in the figure above enter the pulse train input rate into function code d62 Command Pulse rate input Pulse count factor 1 and enter the frequency reference defined by d62 into d63 Command Pulse rate input Pulse count factor 2 The relationship between the pulse train input rate kp s inputted to the PIN terminal and the frequency reference f Hz or soeed command is given by the expression below Pulse count factor 2 d63 f Hz Np kp s Hz p Kp S x Pulse count factor 1 d62 where f Hz Frequency reference Np kp s Pulse train rate inputted to the PIN terminal The terminal input SIGN defines the polarity of the pulse train input to the PIN terminal Combination of the input SIGN and the FWD REV command determines the rotational direction of the motor The table below shows the relationship between them Plus Minus polarity gt polarity gt SIGN OFF ON PIN Switching the Pulse Train Input Polarity Pulse train input polarity and motor rotation direction Pulse train polarity Run command Motor rotation direction Plus FWD Run forward command Forward Plus REV Run reverse command Reverse Minus FWD Run forward command Reverse Minus REV Run reverse command Forward Note Mounting an optional PG interface card automatically
325. o Ltd Technical Information site On the Fuji website shown above select Technical Information Drive Control Equipment Inverters Software libraries Before downloading you are requested to register as a member free of charge Cnote Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions Fix the control circuit wires with a cable tie inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches A WARNING Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual electric charge in the DC bus capacitor even after the power has been turned OFF Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB allows you to customize the operation mode of the analog output terminals
326. o different digital output terminals independently if necessary The function codes listed below are shared with another feature Note Function code Related feature 1 Related feature 2 E34 Current detected ID Motor overload early warning OL E37 E38 Current detected 2 ID2 Low level current detected IDL Low current detected IDL Function code data 41 This output signal comes ON when the output current drops below the low current detection level specified by E37 and remains at the low level for the low current detection period specified by E38 This signal goes OFF when the output current exceeds the low current detection level specified by E37 by at least 5 of the inverter rated current The minimum ON duration is 100 ms m PID alarm PID ALM Function code data 42 Assigning this output signal enables PID control specified by J11 through J13 to output absolute value alarm and deviation alarm Refer to the descriptions of J11 through J13 m Under PID control PID CTL Function code data 43 This output signal comes ON when PID control is enabled Cancel PID control Hz PID OFF and a run command is ON Refer to the descriptions of J codes 5 67 m Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control PID STP Function code data 44 This output signal is ON when the inverter is in a stopped state due to the slow flowrate stopping function under PID control Refer to the descriptio
327. o each bit and a conversion example below Bit Function Bit data 0 Bit data 1 Factory default Lower the carrier frequency 7 0 automatically Disable Enable Enable 1 Detect input phase loss Continue to run Enter alarm 2 enter alarm processing processing 2 Enter alarm g i 2 Detect output phase loss Continue to run processing Continue to run Select life judgment threshold of DC User defined 3 link bus capacitor Factory default setting Factory default 4 Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor Disable Enable Enable 5 Detect DC fan lock Enter aam Continue to run Erter alarm processing processing 6 Detect braking transistor error Continue to run Enter alarm Enter aam processing processing 7 Switch IP20 IP40 enclosure IP20 IP40 0 IP20 An example of conversion from binary to decimal for the number configured by the factory default setting shown above Decimal Bit 7 x 2 Bit 6 x 2 Bit 5 x 2 Bit 4 x 2f Bit 3 x 2 Bit 2 x 2 Bit 1 x 2 Bit 0 x 2 Bit 7 x 128 Bit 6 x 64 Bit 5 x 32 Bit 4 x 16 Bit 3 x 8 Bit 2 x 4 Bit 1 x 2 Bit O x 1 0x128 1x64 0x32 1x16 0x8 0x4 1x2 1x1 64 16 2 1 83 os Dte Motor Parameter Switching 2 3 and 4 Mode selection The combination of digital input terminal commands M2 M3 and M4 switches to any of the 1st to 4th motors When the motor is switched the function code group with which the inverter drives the
328. o powering on Check the following before powering on the inverter 1 Check that the wiring is correct Especially check the wiring to the inverter input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T and output terminals U V and W Also check that the grounding wires are connected to the grounding terminals G correctly See Figure 4 2 A WARNING Never connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U V and W Doing so and turning the power ON breaks the inverter Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes Otherwise an electric shock could occur 2 Check the control circuit terminals and main circuit terminals for short circuits or ground faults inverter 3 Check for loose terminals connectors and screws SG LR Las 3T U 4 Check that the motor is separated from mechanical equipment 5 Make sure that all switches of devices connected to the inverter are turned OFF Powering on the inverter with any of those switches being ON may cause an unexpected motor operation A 6 Check that safety measures are taken against runaway of the equipment e g a defense to prevent people from access to the equipment Figure 4 2 Connection of Main Circuit Terminals 4 1 3 Powering ON and checking AWARNING Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON Do not remove the cover when the inverter power is ON Do not operate sw
329. o secure a space for thick main circuit wiring Clip off sections Clip off sections Before removal of clip off sections After removal of clip off sections Wiring Guide FRN15G1 40 Note A box W in the above figure replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above figure replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 2 8 8 In some types of inverters the wires from the main circuit terminal block cannot be straight routed Route such wires as shown below so that the front cover is set into place PUAN E HO ee poe IES d D O d J q ea Cm a Poll fM AWARNING e When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the recommended devices within the recommended current capacity Be sure to use wires in the specified size Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise a fire could occur e When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Doing so could cause a fire e Ground the inver
330. o y20 with those of the host equipment gt Correct any settings that differ 2 Even though no response error detection time y08 y18 has been set communications is not performed within the specified cycle Check the host equipment gt Change the settings of host equipment software or disable the no response error detection y08 y18 0 3 The host equipment did not operate due to defective software settings or defective hardware Check the host equipment e g PLCs and personal computers gt Remove the cause of the equipment error 4 The RS 485 converter did not operate due to incorrect connections and settings or defective hardware Check the RS 485 converter e g check for poor contact gt Change the various RS 485 converter settings reconnect the wires or replace hardware with recommended devices as appropriate 5 Broken communications cable or poor contact Check the continuity of the cables contacts and connections gt Replace the cable 6 Inverter affected by strong electrical noise Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of communications cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures gt Implement noise reduction measures on the host side gt Replace the RS 485 converter with a recommended insulated one 7 Terminating resistor not properly configured
331. ock diagram of the frequency command block refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 6 gt Correct any incorrect function code data e g cancel the higher priority run command 10 The upper and lower frequencies for the frequency limiters were set incorrectly Check the data of function codes F15 Frequency limiter High and F16 Frequency limiter Low gt Change the settings of F15 and F16 to the correct ones The coast to stop command was effective Broken wires incorrect connection or poor contact with the motor Check the data of function codes E01 through E07 E98 and E99 and the input signal status using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Release the coast to stop command setting Check the wiring Measure the output current gt Repair the wires to the motor or replace them Overload Measure the output current gt Reduce the load In winter the load tends to increase Check whether any mechanical brake is activated gt Release the mechanical brake if any Torque generated by the motor was insufficient Check that the motor starts running if the value of torque boost F09 is increased gt Increase the value of torque boost F09 and try to run the motor Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 H51 H52 H53 H65 and H66 gt Change the V f pattern to match the motor s characteristics Check that the motor switching signal
332. ode on the LED monitor and causes the inverter to trip the light alarm detection function which displays the alarm code but lets the inverter continue the current operation and other warning signal output functions If any problem arises understand the protective functions listed below and follow the procedures given in Sections 6 2 and onwards for troubleshooting Protective function Heavy alarm detection Description This function detects an abnormal state displays the corresponding alarm code and causes the inverter to trip The heavy alarm codes are check marked in the Heavy alarm object column in Table 6 1 For details of each alarm code see the corresponding item in the troubleshooting The inverter retains the last four alarm codes and their factors together with their running information applied when the alarm occurred so it can display them Related function code Light alarm detection This function detects an abnormal state categorized as a light alarm displays a and lets the inverter continue the current operation without tripping It is possible to define which abnormal states should be categorized as a light alarm using function codes H81 and H82 The light alarm codes are check marked in the Light alarm object column in Table 6 1 For how to check and release light alarms see Section 6 5 If the Light Alarm Indication a Appears on the LED Monitor Stall prevention When
333. odes P03 P06 through P23 P53 through P56 and H46 Note P03 Motor 1 Rated current P03 specifies the rated current of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor Data setting range 0 00 to 2000 A P04 Motor 1 Auto tuning The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory Basically it is not necessary to perform tuning when using a Fuji standard motor with a standard connection with the inverter In any of the following cases perform auto tuning since the motor parameters are different from those of Fuji standard motors so that the best performance cannot be obtained under any of these controls auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving operation torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector control droop control or overload stop The motor to be driven is a non Fuji motor or a non standard motor Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long Generally 20 m or longer Areactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter LJ For details of auto tuning refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test Data for P04 Auto tuning Operation Motor parameters to be tuned 0 Disable N A N A Primary resistance R1 P07 1 Tune while the motor The inverter perform
334. of the load Twice the rated motor load meter Twice the rated output of the 6 Input power Input power of the inverter inverter 7 Bat Feedback amount under PID control 100 of the feedback amount PG feedback value Speed detected through the PG i s 5 speed interface or estimated speed Maximum speed as 100 1 500 V for 200 V class series 9 DC link bus voltage DC link bus voltage of the inverter 1000 V for 400 V class series Command via communications link 10 Universal AO Refer to the RS 485 Communication 20000 as 100 User s Manual 13 Motor output Motor output kW Twice the rated motor output Pee ae This always outputs the 14 Calibration Full scale output of the meter calibration full scale 100 15 PID command SV Command value under PID control 100 of the feedback amount Output level of the PID controller under i 16 PID output MV PID control Frequency command Maximum frequency F03 A If F31 F35 16 PID output J01 3 Dancer control and J62 2 or 3 Ratio compensation Chote enabled the PID output is equivalent to the ratio against the primary reference frequency and may vary within 300 of the frequency The monitor displays the PID output in a converted absolute value To indicate the value up to the full scale of 300 set F30 F34 data to 33 F40 F41 Torque Limiter 1 1 Torque Limiter 1 2 E16 E17 Torque Limiter 2 1 Torque Limiter 2 2 H73 H76 Torque Limiter Operating conditions Frequency incremen
335. ogramming mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode m In Alarm mode Pressing this key after removing the alarm factor will switch the inverter to Running mode Function Data key which switches the operations you want to do in each mode as follows m In Running mode Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the inverter output frequency Hz output current A output voltage V etc Operation i o n Keys When a light alarm is displayed holding down this key resets the light alarm and switches back to Running mode E In Programming mode Pressing this key displays the function code or establishes the data entered with and Q keys E In Alarm mode Pressing this key displays the details of the problem indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED monitor RUN key Press this key to run the motor STOP key Press this key to stop the motor UP and DOWN keys Press these keys to select the setting items and change the function code data displayed on the LED monitor 3 1 LED Indicators LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators RUN LED Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Continued Functions Lights when running with a run command entered by the 0 key by terminal command FWD or REV or through the communications link KEYPAD CONTROL LED Lights when the inverter is ready to run with a run command enter
336. ol 22 of Defaul Ref Code Name Data setting range ge aa Default efer to 999 25 a S setting vir W o w page 5 PG PG J16 PID Control Slow flowrate level stop latency 0 to 60 s Y y 30 Y Y Y J17 Starting frequency 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 00 D a h aa D d J18 Upper limit of PID process output 150 to 150 999 Depends on setting of F15 Y Y BIT Y TIPY J19 Lower limit of PID process output 150 to 150 999 Depends on setting of F16 YX ve g99 Y Y Y J21 Dew Condensation Prevention 1 to 50 Y Y 1 Y Y Y Duty J22 Commercial Power Switching 0 Keep inverter operation Stop due to alarm N Y 0 Y Y Y Sequence 1 Automatically switch to commercial power operation J56 PID Control Speed command filter 0 00 to 5 00 s Y y O10 Y YY J57 Dancer reference position 100 to 0 to 100 Y Y 0 Y YY J58 Detection width of dancer 0 Disable switching PID constant x F 0 b A E ile a position deviation 1 to 100 Manually set value J59 P Gain 2 0 000 to 30 000 times Y Y 0 100 Y Y Y J60 Integral time 2 0 0 to 3600 0 s Y N 0 0 YNE Y J61 D Differential time 3 0 00 to 600 00 s Y Y 0o00 Y Y Y J62 PID control block selection 0 to 3 N Y 0 N EE bit 0 PID output polarity 0 Plus add 1 Minus subtract bit 1 Select compensation factor for PID output 0 Ratio relative to the main setting 1 Speed command relative to maximum frequency J68 Brake Signal Brake
337. ol or overload stop In any of the following cases the full control performance may not be obtained from the inverter because the motor parameters differ from the factory defaults so perform auto tuning Refer to Section 4 1 7 e The motor to be driven is not a Fuji product or is a non standard product e The wiring distance between the inverter and the motor is too long generally 20 m or more A reactor is inserted between the inverter and the motor 4 6 4 1 7 Function code basic settings and tuning lt 2 gt Under the V f control F42 0 or 2 or dynamic torque vector control F42 1 any of the following cases requires configuring the basic function codes given below and auto tuning Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 Driving a non Fuji motor or non standard motor Driving a Fuji general purpose motor provided that the wiring distance between the inverter and motor is long or a reactor is connected Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values For the motor ratings check the ratings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them 4 For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Factory default FRN___G1 2A 4A FRN___G1 4E 200 V class series 200 V class series 60 0 Hz ET 400 V class series 400 V
338. oltage Inverter Inverter power supply 1 KW or 1 KW or below below L The inverter connected here is E The inverter connected subject to the harmonics here is not subject to the regulation If the harmonics harmonics regulation flowing into the power source exceeds the regulated level permission by the local power supplier will be needed Figure 9 4 Power Source and Regulation 9 4 2 Compliance with the harmonic component regulation Table 9 2 Compliance with Harmonic Component Regulation Applicable DC reactor type FRNO 4G1 20 DCR2 0 4 FRNO 75G1 20 DCR2 0 75 FRNO 4G1 40 DCR4 0 4 FRNO 75G1 40 DCR4 0 75 Power supply voltage Inverter type w o DC reactor w DC reactor Three phase 200 V Three phase 400 V When supplying three phase 200 VAC power stepped down from a three phase 400 VAC power line using a transformer the level of harmonic flow from the 400 VAC line will be regulated Note 1 A box in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination Note 2 Inverter types marked with V in the table above are compliant with the EN61000 3 2 A14 so they may be connected to public low voltage power supply unconditionally Conditions apply when connecting models marked with To connect them to public low voltage power supply you need to obtain permission from the local electric power supplie
339. ommunications Link Function Frequency command Run command Y Y 0 s e al E Mode selection 0 F01 C30 F02 1 RS 485 Port 1 F02 2 F01 C30 RS 485 Port 1 3 RS 485 Port 1 RS 485 Port 1 4 RS 485 Port 2 F02 5 RS 485 Port 2 RS 485 Port 1 6 F01 C30 RS 485 Port 2 7 RS 485 Port 1 RS 485 Port 2 8 RS 485 Port 2 RS 485 Port 2 H42 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Indication for replacement of DC link bus capacitor Y N YIY Y Capacitor 0000 to FFFF hex H43 Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan Indication for replacement of cooling fan Y N YIY Y in units of 10 hours H44 Startup Counter for Motor 1 Indication of cumulative startup count Y N Y Y Y 575 0000 to FFFF hex H45 Mock Alarm 0 Disable Y N 0 Y Y Y 5 78 1 Enable Once a mock alarm occurs the data automatically returns to 0 H46 Starting Mode 0 1 to 10 0 s Y Y 1Y2 7 Y YIN Auto search delay time 2 H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Indication for replacement of DC link bus capacitor E N Y Y Y Capacitor 0000 to FFFF hex H48 Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors Indication for replacement of capacitors w N Y Y Y on Printed Circuit Boards The cumulative run time can be modified or reset in units of 10 hours H49 Starting Mode 0 0 to 10 0 s M Y 00 F Y YY Auto search delay time 1 H50 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency 0 0 Cancel 0 1 to 500 0 Hz N Y 8 Y N N j 5 28 H51 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an
340. on PTC NTC thermistor dbh Braking resistor overheat ejeje a a 2 2 lt 2 lt 22 kW or below fu5 Fuse blown 200 V class series with 75 kW or above 400 V class series with 90 kW or above pbf Charger circuit fault 200 V class series with 37 kW or above 400 V class series with 75 kW or above Ol 1to O14 Overload of motor 1 through 4 Inverter overload Overspeed PG wire break Memory error Keypad communications error CPU error Option communications error Option error Operation protection Tuning error RS 485 communications error COM port 1 RS 485 communications error COM port 2 Data saving error during undervoltage ej ejej2 2 2 2 2 22 2 22 Hardware error 200 V class series with 37 kW or above 400 V class series with 45 kW or above Speed mismatch or excessive speed deviation NTC wire break error Mock alarm PID feedback wire break Braking transistor broken Positioning control error Enable circuit failure Light alarm DC fan locked 200 V class series with 45 kW or above 400 V class series with 75 kW or above Motor overload early warning Heat sink overheat early warning Lifetime alarm Reference command loss detected PID alarm Low torque output PTC thermistor activated Inverter life Motor cumulative run time Inverter life N
341. on of an inverter and motor do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output Secondary circuit Doing so could cause a fire Be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity Otherwise a fire could occur A WARNING Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Be sure to ground the inverter s grounding terminals G Otherwise an electric shock or a fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF Otherwise an electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit Otherwise an electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise a fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals U V and W When connecting a DC braking resistor DBR never connect it to terminals other than terminals P and DB Doing so could cause fire or an accident In general sheaths of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage i e re
342. ontents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Number of option errors 1 Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in the option being connected to the A port Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 Inverter s ROM version Shows the inverter s ROM version as a 4 digit code Keypad s ROM version Shows the keypad s ROM version as a 4 digit code Number of RS 485 communications errors COM port 2 Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in RS 485 communication COM port 2 connection to terminal block after the power is turned ON Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 Content of RS 485 communications error COM port 2 Shows the latest error that has occurred in RS 485 communication COM port 2 connection to terminal block in decimal For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Option s ROM version 1 Shows the ROM version of the option to be connected to A Port as a 4 digit code If the option has no ROM appears on the LED monitor Option s ROM version 2 Shows the ROM version of the option to be connected to B Port as a 4 digit code If the option has no ROM appears on the LED monitor Option s ROM version 3 Shows the ROM version of the option to be connected to C Port as a 4 digit code If the option has no ROM appears on the LED monitor
343. onventional Inverter Safety circuit breakers complying FRENIC MEGA Power supply Safety switch complying with EN954 1 Category 3 Enable input Safety switch complying with EN954 1 Category 3 Enable input 9 6 2 EN954 1 European Standard EN954 1 Safety of machinery Safety related parts of control systems prescribes the basic safety requirements for machinery categorized according to the requirement level Category 3 represents the requirements that the machinery shall be designed with redundancy so that a single fault does not lead to the loss of the safety function Table 9 3 shows an outline of the category levels and their safety requirements For detailed requirements refer to EN 954 1 9 6 Table 9 3 Category Summary of requirements System behavior Safety related parts of control systems and or their The occurrence of a fault can lead to safety devices and their components shall be the loss of the safety function designed constructed selected assembled and combined in accordance with the relevant standards so that they can withstand the expected influence Requirements of Category B shall apply The occurrence of a fault can lead to Well tried safety principles and well tried components the loss of the safety function but the shall be used probability of occurrence is lower than for Category B Requirements of Category 1 shall apply The occurrence of a fault can lead to The sa
344. operation Make sure that F43 Current limiter Mode selection is set to 2 and check the data of F44 Current limiter Level gt Correct the F44 data Or if the current limiter operation is not needed set F43 to 0 disabled Decrease the value of torque boost F09 then run the motor again and check if the speed increases gt Adjust the value of the torque boost F09 Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 H51 H52 H53 H65 and H66 to ensure that the V f pattern setting is right gt Match the V f pattern setting with the motor ratings 9 The output frequency does not increase due to the torque limiter operation Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 F41 E16 and E17 is correctly configured and the Select torque limiter level terminal command TL2 TL1 is correct gt Correct data of F40 F41 E16 and E17 or reset them to the factory defaults disable gt Set the TL2 TL1 correctly 10 Bias and gain incorrectly specified Check the data of function codes F18 C50 C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 gt Readijust the bias and gain to appropriate values 6 6 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command Possible Causes 1 Wiring to the motor is incorrect What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the wiring to the motor gt Connect terminals U V and W of the inverter to the U V and W terminals of
345. operation 4 2 Special Operations 4 2 1 Jogging operation 4 2 2 Remote and local modes 4 2 3 External run frequency command 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 3 5 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 4 5 3 4 6 3 4 7 3 4 8 4 1 8 4 1 9 4 1 10 xiv Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 Function Code Tables 5 2 Details of Function Codes Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 Protective functions 6 2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting 6 3 If Neither an Alarm Code Nor Light Alarm Indication a Appears on the LED Monitor 6 4 6 3 1 Abnormal motor operation cccccceeeeees 6 4 6 3 2 Problems with inverter settings 6 10 6 4 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 11 6 5 If the Light Alarm Indication a Appears on the LED Momitr c ccccecssessssvsneseventerees 6 25 6 6 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while Neither an Alarm Code nor Light Alarm Indication a is Displayed 6 26 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7 1 7 1 Daily Inspection 7 2 Periodic Inspection 7 1 7 3 List of Periodic Replacement Parts 7 3 7 3 1 Judgment on service life 7 3 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Circuit 7 5 Insulation Test 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 6 1 When making an inquiry 7 6 2 Product warranty C
346. or E depending on the shipping destination 2 3 2 3 2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications The table and figures given below show the terminal screw sizes tightening torque and terminal arrangements Note that the terminal arrangements differ depending on the inverter types In each of the figures two grounding terminals G are not exclusive to the power supply wiring primary circuit or motor wiring secondary circuit 1 Arrangement of main circuit terminals Table 2 4 Main Circuit Terminal Properties Power Nominal HD LD Terminal Tightening Grounding Tightening supply applied motor Inverter type mode screw torque screw torque Refer to voltage kW size Nm size N m 4 FRNO 4G1 20 0 0 4a M3 5 1 2 M3 5 1 2 Figure A 0 75 FRNO 75G1 20 1 5 FRN1 5G1 20 HD 2 2 FRN2 2G1 20 M4 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure B 3 7 FRN3 7G1 20 23 FRN5 5G1m 20 ie 7 5 HD FRN7 5G1 20 D M5 3 5 M5 3 5 Figure C 11 HD FRN11G1m 20 1 LD Three 5 HD phase FRN15G1m 20 LD 200 V 18 5 HD FRN18 5G1m 20 M6 5 8 M6 5 8 Figure D LD R HD FRN22G1m 20 D 30 FRN30G1m 20 HD M8 13 5 Figure E LD a HD FRN37G1 20 D 45 Do M8 13 5 FRN45G1m 20 LD M10 27 Figure F 55 FRN55G1m 20 a 75 LD 4 FRNO 4G1 40 049 M3 5 1 2 M3 5 1 2 Figure A 0 75 FRNO 75G1 40 1 5 FRN1 5G
347. or inverter enclosure Two grounding terminals G are not exclusive to the power supply wiring primary circuit or motor wiring secondary circuit Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction The inverter is designed for use with safety grounding to avoid electric shock fire and other disasters The grounding terminal for inverter enclosure should be grounded as follows 1 Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code 2 Use a thick grounding wire with a large surface area and keep the wiring length as short as possible note An EMC filter built in type of inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 11 kW both 200 V and 400 V class series has three grounding terminals For effective noise suppression connect grounding wires to the specified grounding terminals Refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 3 2 Recommended installation procedure Inverter output terminals U V and W and secondary grounding terminals G for motor Inverter s output terminals should be connected as follows 1 Connect the three wires of the 3 phase motor to terminals U V and W aligning the phases each other 2 Connect the secondary grounding wire to the grounding terminal 9G Note When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together Inverter 1 Motor 1 Multicore cable DC reactor
348. orrect function code data settings in H30 y98 etc or cancel the higher priority run command No analog frequency command input Check whether the analog frequency command reference frequency is correctly inputted using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 C1 and V2 correctly gt When terminal C1 is used check the slider position of terminal C1 property switch SW5 and the setting of the thermistor mode selection H26 6 4 Possible Causes 8 The reference frequency was below the starting or stop frequency What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that a reference frequency has been entered correctly using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Set the reference frequency at the same or higher than that of the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 gt Reconsider the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 and if necessary change them to the lower values Inspect the external potentiometer for frequency setting signal converters switches and relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 C1 and V2 correctly A frequency command with higher priority than the one attempted was active Check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad referring to the bl
349. out speed sensor Otherwise the inverter may not control the motor due to decrease of the current detection resolution The wiring distance between the inverter and motor should be 50 m or less If it is longer the inverter may not control the motor due to leakage current flowing through stray capacitance to the ground or between wires Especially small capacity inverters whose rated current is also small may be unable to control the motor correctly even when the wiring is less than 50 m In that case make the wiring length as short as possible or use a wire with small stray capacitance e g loosely bundled cable to minimize the stray capacitance E Performance comparison for drive controls summary Each drive control has advantages and disadvantages The table below compares the drive controls showing their relative performance in each characteristic Select the one that shows high performance in the characteristics that are important in your machinery In rare cases the performance shown below may not be obtained due to various conditions including motor characteristics or mechanical rigidity The final performance should be determined by adjusting the speed control system or other elements with the inverter being connected to the machinery load If you have any questions contact your Fuji Electric representative Output Speed Speed Drive control frequency control control stability accuracy response Maximum Load Current Torque
350. ower 24 VDC allowable range 22 to 27 VDC 100 mA max through the PLC terminal Short circuit between the terminals CMY and CM in this case 3 2 3 fo o Bu a iw E CMY Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signals output This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM and 11 s common Cip m Connecting programmable logic controller PLC to terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 Figure 2 17 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example a the input circuit of the PLC serves as a SINK for the control circuit output whereas in example b it serves as a SOURCE for the output lt Control circuit gt Programmable lt Control circuit gt a ea logic controller gt logic controller Photocoupler Current Photocoupler Current 31 to 35V SOURCE input a PLC serving as SINK b PLC serving as SOURCE Figure 2 17 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit Y5A C General 1 A general purpose relay contact output usable as well as the function of the purpose transistor output terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 a Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3 A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 5Al utpu 2 Switching o
351. owing measures may be necessary Mount the inverter in a sealed panel Place the panel in a room free from influence of the conductive dust Paper manufacturing sewage disposal sludge treatment tire manufacturing metal processing anda particular process in textile factories Wiredrawing machines metal processing extruding machines printing presses combustors and industrial waste treatment A lot of fibrous or paper dust Fibrous or paper dust accumulated on the heat sink lowers the cooing effect Entry of dust into the inverter causes the electronic circuitry to malfunction Any of the following measures may be necessary Mount the inverter in a sealed panel that shuts out dust Ensure a maintenance space for periodical cleaning of the heat sink in panel engineering design Employ external cooling when mounting the inverter in a panel for easy maintenance and perform periodical maintenance Textile manufacturing and paper manufacturing High humidity or dew condensation In an environment where a humidifier is used or where the air conditioner is not equipped with a dehumidifier high humidity or dew condensation results which causes a short circuiting or malfunction of electronic circuitry inside the inverter Put a heating module such as a space heater in the panel Outdoor installation Film manufacturing line pumps and food processing Vibration or shock
352. p between the inverter and peripheral equipment has been established e g by connecting an analog cascade connection of a current output device is not available Keep the connection wire length as short as possible E Voltage adjustment F30 and F34 F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage within the range of 0 to 300 4 F30 300 F30 200 F30 100 F30 50 Terminals FM1 and FM2 output voltage OV 0 33 50 100 Meter scale Em Function F31 and F35 F31 specifies what is output to analog output terminals FM1 and FM2 Data for Function Meter scale F31 F35 FM1V FM2 output Monitor the following Full scale at 100 Output frequency Output frequency of the inverter 0 before slip Equivalent to the motor synchronous Maximum frequency F03 compensation speed Output frequency 1 after slip Output frequency of the inverter Maximum frequency F03 compensation 2 Output current Output current RMS of the inverter Twice the inverter rated current 250 V for 200 V class series 500 V for 400 V class series 4 Output torque Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque 3 Output voltage Output voltage RMS of the inverter 5 45 Data for FM1 FM2 output Function Meter scale F31 F35 Monitor the following Full scale at 100 Load factor 5 Load factor Equivalent to the indication
353. p frequency jogging operation pre excitation switch to commercial power commercial power switching sequence cooling fan ON OFF control select motor 2 to 4 protect motor from dew condensation universal DI universal DO universal AO rotational direction limitation Overload prevention control auto search slip compensation automatic deceleration anti regenerative control droop control PID process control PID dancer control Deceleration characteristics improving braking capability auto energy saving function Offline tuning Life early warning cumulative inverter run time cumulative motor run time Light alarm retry command loss detection Digital input Run forward command run reverse command select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps select ACC DEC time ACC DEC time 1 to 4 enable 3 wire operation coast to a stop reset alarm enable external alarm trip ready for jogging select frequency command 2 1 select motor 1 to 4 enable DC braking select torque limiter level switch to commercial power 50 Hz switch to commercial power 60 Hz UP increase output frequency DOWN decrease output frequency enable data change with keypad cancel PID control switch normal inverse operation interlock enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus option universal DI enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting force to stop pre excitation reset PID integral and differential components hold PID
354. pany shall not be liable for any loss of opportunity loss of profits or damages arising from special circumstances secondary damages accident compensation to another company or damages to products other than this company s products whether foreseen or not by this company which this company is not be responsible for causing 3 Repair period after production stop spare parts supply period holding period Concerning models products which have gone out of production this company will perform repairs for a period of 7 years after production stop counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs In addition we will continue to supply the spare parts required for repairs for a period of 7 years counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs However if it is estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is short and it will be difficult to procure or produce those parts there may be cases where it is difficult to provide repairs or supply spare parts even within this 7 year period For details please confirm at our company s business office or our service office 4 Transfer rights In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application program the products shall be transported to and transferred to the customer and this company shall not be responsible for local adjustments or trial operation 5 Service contents The cost of purchased a
355. peration Either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the operating conditions matching the actual ones e Auxiliary input for control power is used e An option card or multi function keypad is used Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to terminals of the DC link bus DC fan lock detection Bit 5 200 V class series 45 kW or above 400 V class series 75 kW or above An inverter of 45 kW or above 200 V class series or of 75 kW or above 400 V class series is equipped with the internal air circulation DC fan When the inverter detects that the DC fan is locked by a failure or other cause you can select either continuing the inverter operation or entering into alarm state Entering alarm state The inverter issues the alarm O J and coasts to stop the motor Continuing operation The inverter does not enter the alarm mode and continues operation of the motor Note that however the inverter turns ON the OH and LIFE signals on the transistor output terminals whenever the DC fan lock is detected regardless of your selection on operating condition of the inverter In this case the DC fan lock detection feature is considered normal e g the cooling fan is normally stopped by the stop fan command so that the inverter may turn OFF the LIFE or OH signal output or enable to cancel the alarm O AZ
356. peration state and ready to jog state with the Gio A keys is possible only when the inverter is stopped BS Jogging the motor Hold down the key during which the motor continues jogging To decelerate to stop the motor release the key g Exiting the ready to jog state and returning to the normal operation state Press the 09 keys simultaneously 4 2 2 Remote and local modes The inverter is available in either remote or local mode In the remote mode that applies to ordinary operation the inverter is driven under the control of the data settings stored in the inverter whereas in the local mode that applies to maintenance operation it is separated from the control system and is driven manually under the control of the keypad Remote mode Run and frequency commands are selected by function codes or source switching signals except Select local keypad operation LOC Local mode The command source is the keypad regardless of the settings specified by function codes The keypad takes precedence over the settings specified by communications link operation signals Run commands from the keypad in the local mode The table below shows the input procedures of run commands from the keypad in the local mode When F02 data run command is Input procedures of run commands from keypad Enable 9 keys on keypad Pressing the 2 key runs the motor in the direction specified by Motor rotational direction from digi
357. ptance Inspection Unpack the package and check the following 1 An inverter and instruction manual this book are contained in the package Pomme The inverter is not equipped with a keypad when it is shipped Mount a separately ordered note keypad on the inverter This manual describes the inverter with a remote keypad For inverters with a multi function keypad read the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual in conjunction with this manual e Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DC reactor DCR to be connected Be sure to connect a separately ordered DCR to those inverters 2 The inverter has not been damaged during transportation there should be no dents or parts missing 3 The inverter is the type you ordered You can check the type and specifications on the main nameplate Main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter and are located as shown on the next page For inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above the mass is printed on the main nameplate TYPE FRN5S 5G1S 2A Ly High Duty J SOURCE 3PH aa 50 602 TYPE FRN5 5G1S 2A OUTPUT aPN 70 20N O 1 300 1 120 SER No 8X 1284900067 K A 2 IMIN KYA min SER No 6X1234S0006Z 5 C C 100kA Fuji Electric FA Made in Japan a Main Nameplate b Sub Nameplate Figure 1 1 Nameplates TYPE Type of inverter FRN 5 5 G1S 2A Code Series name E Code Shipping destination A Instruction manual
358. ptions of H81 and H82 Section 3 3 2 Monitoring light alarms in Chapter 3 and Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Alarm output for any alarm ALM Function code data 99 This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 5 Alarm Mode and Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING m Enable circuit failure detected DECF Function code data 101 This output signal comes ON when the inverter judges that the terminal EN status detection circuit is faulty Refer to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING m Enable input OFF EN OFF Function code data 102 This output signal comes ON when the terminal EN input is turned OFF Braking transistor broken DBAL Function code data 105 Breakdown of the braking transistor could lead to the secondary breakdown of the braking resistor and inverter s internal units Use this output signal DBAL to detect abnormal operation of the built in braking transistor and to cut off power to the magnetic contactor in inverter primary circuits for preventing spread of the damage If the inverter detects a breakdown of the braking transistor it issues the braking transistor alarm dba and also the output signal DBAL Detection of braking transistor broken can be cancelled by H98 Refer to the description of H98 200 V class series 400 V class series 22 kW or below 5 69 P codes Motor 1 parameters The FRE
359. put signal to an inverter s output terminal and connecting the terminal to a digital input terminal of peripheral equipment via the RS 485 communications link or the fieldbus allows the inverter to send commands to the peripheral equipment The universal DO can also be used as an output signal independent of the inverter operation LL For the procedure for access to Universal DO via the RS 485 communications link or fieldbus refer to the respective instruction manual m Heat sink overheat early warning OH Function code data 28 This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take a corrective action before an overheat trip OAZ actually happens This signal comes ON when the temperature of the heat sink exceeds the overheat trip temperature minus 5 C and it goes OFF when it drops down to the overheat trip temperature minus 8 C This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan 45 kW or above for 200 V class series or 75 kW or above for 400 V class series has locked m Lifetime alarm LIFE Function code data 30 This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards and cooling fan has expired This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan If this signal comes ON use the specified maintenance procedure to ch
360. put voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied The function code marked with N is not subject to the Verify operation either Note For details of how to set up or edit function codes refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 5 1 a Using negative logic for programmable I O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to the inverted ON OFF logical value 1 true 0 false state of input or output signal An active ON signal the function takes effect if the terminal is short circuited in the normal logic system is functionally equivalent to active OFF signal the function takes effect if the terminal is opened in the negative logic system An active ON signal can be switched to active OFF signal and vice versa with the function code data setting To set the negative logic system for an I O terminal enter data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code Example Coast to a stop command BX assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X7 using any of function codes E01 through E07 Function code data Description 7 Turning BX ON causes the motor to coast to a stop Active ON 1007 Turning BX OFF causes the motor to coast to a stop Active OFF Some signals cannot
361. quency becomes higher than the base frequency the auto energy saving operation will be invalid e Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 rote Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower If the base frequency is F10 to F12 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Select motor characteristics Overload detection level and Thermal time constant F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor F10 selects the motor cooling mechanism to specify its characteristics F11 specifies the overload detection current and F12 specifies the thermal time constant Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the overload early Cote warning Even if you need only the overload early warning set these characteristics data to these function codes To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set F11 data to 0 00 5 32 Em Select motor characteristics F10 F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor shaft driven or separately powered cooling fan Data for F10 Function
362. r s current running status information which can be checked by FRENIC Loader such as information of I O system alarm and running status Pressing the key during a read operation when r ead is blinking immediately aborts the operation and displays err blinking If this happens the entire contents of the memory of the keypad will be completely cleared Write data Writes data stored in the keypad memory into the inverter s memory If you press the E key during a write operation when copy is blinking the write operation that is under way will be aborted and err will appear blinking If this happens the contents of the inverter s memory i e function code data have been partly updated and remain partly old Therefore do not operate the inverter Instead perform initialization or rewrite the entire data If this function does not work refer to E If data copying does not work on page 3 27 Verify data Verifies collates the data stored in the keypad memory with that in the inverter s memory If any mismatch is detected the verify operation will be aborted with the function code in disagreement displayed blinking Pressing the key again causes the verification to continue from the next function code Pressing the amp key during a verify operation when veri is blinking immediately aborts the operation and displays err blinking err appears blinking also when the keypad does not contain any valid data
363. r In general you will need to provide the supplier with the harmonics current data of the inverter To obtain the data contact your Fuji Electric representative 9 5 9 5 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive in the EU 9 5 1 General General purpose inverters are regulated by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Fuji Electric states that all our inverters with CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 9 5 2 Points for consideration when using the FRENIC MEGA series in a system to be certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU If you want to use the FRENIC MEGA series of inverters in systems equipment in the EU refer to the guidelines on pages vi to viii 9 6 Compliance with EN954 1 Category 3 9 6 1 General In FRENIC MEGA series of inverters opening the hardware circuit between terminals EN and PLC stops the output transistor coasting the motor to a stop EN Enable input This is the safety stop function prescribed in EN60204 1 Category 0 Uncontrolled stop and compliant with EN954 1 Category 3 Note Depending on applications additional measures may be necessary for end user to apply such as brake function to prevent movement and motor terminal protection against possible electrical hazard s Use of terminals EN and PLC eliminates the need of external safety circuit breakers while conventional inverters need those breakers to configure the EN954 1 Category 3 compliant safety system C
364. r and an optional PG interface card to be mounted on a motor shaft and an inverter respectively The inverter detects the motor s rotational position and speed from PG feedback signals and uses them for speed control In addition it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components and controls each of components in vector The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants PI constants and using the speed regulator PI controller This control enables the speed control with higher accuracy and quicker response than the vector control without speed sensor A recommended motor for this control is a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control 4 4 Not Since slip compensation dynamic torque vector control and vector control with without speed sensor ole Use motor parameters the following conditions should be satisfied otherwise full control performance may not be obtained A single motor should be controlled per inverter e Motor parameters P02 P03 PO6 to P23 P55 and P56 are properly configured Or auto tuning P04 is performed A Fuji VG motor requires no auto tuning just requires selecting a Fuji VG motor with function code P99 2 e The capacity of the motor to be controlled should be two or more ranks lower than that of the inverter under the dynamic torque vector control it should be the same as the inverter under the vector control with with
365. r a momentary power failure 50 V for 200 V class series and 100 V for 400 V class series If the DC link bus voltage drops below the allowable voltage the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting Canin The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of undervoltage until Note it reaches the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure greatly varies depending on the inverter capacity the presence of options and other factors E Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time H13 H13 specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter reacts for restarting process If the inverter starts the motor while motor s residual voltage is still in a high level a large inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurrence of temporary regeneration For safety therefore it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that the restart will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level Note that even when power is restored restart will not take place until the restart time H13 has elapsed Power Failure Recovery i t DC Link Bus Voltage E T A Undervoltage Level State of the Inverter Operation 1 Running Ready to Run Run Command ON ON H13 State of the Inverter i Start Runnin
366. r05 Torque Boost 4 0 0 to 20 0 Y Y 3 Y NIN percentage with respect to r03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 4 1 The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table 5 1 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table 5 2 The motor constant is automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table 5 3 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 5 16 Drive S control D gt 22 we i t Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range eel oe g rang 2s a S setting vie Wo w page 5 PG PG r06 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling Y Y 1 Y YY Protection for Motor 4 fan Select motor characteristics 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan r07 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable Y Y1Y2 4 Yip CY c 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor r08 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 min Y X T s ai a Ai I 5 r09 DC Braking 4 Braking starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Y Y 00 LYNE r10 Braking level
367. re Relative 5 to 95 No condensation humidity Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive gases flammable gases oil mist vapor or water drops Pollution degree 2 IEC60664 1 Note 2 The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt 0 01 mg cm2 or less per year The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Altitude 1 000 m max Note 3 Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa pressure Vibration 3 mm Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz 9 8 m s2 9 to less than 20 Hz 2 m s2 20 to less than 55 Hz 1 m s2 55 to less than 200 Hz 2 2 Installing the Inverter 1 Mounting base Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally A WARNING Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material Otherwise a fire could occur 2 Clearances Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure 2 1 are maintained at all times When installing the inverter in the panel of your system take extra care with ventilation inside the panel as the surrounding temperature easily rises Do not install the inverter in a small panel with poor ventilation Em When mounting two or more inverters When mounting two or more inverters in the same unit or panel basically lay them out side by side When mounting them necessarily one above the
368. re given below To ensure the compliance it is recommended that inverters be mounted in a metal panel Cri Ti Our EMC compliance test is performed under the following conditions LL Wiring length of the shielded cable between the inverter EMC filter built in type and motor 5m no t To use Fuji inverters in combination with a PWM converter the basic type of inverters having no built in Note EMC filter should be used Use of an EMC filter built in type may increase heat of capacitors in the inverter resulting in a break In addition the effect of the EMC filter can no longer be expected 9 3 2 Recommended installation procedure To make the machinery or equipment fully compliant with the EMC Directive have certified technicians wire the motor and inverter in strict accordance with the procedure described below E In the case of EMC filter built in type of inverter 1 Mount the inverter on a grounded panel or metal plate Use shielded wires for the motor cable and route the cable as short as possible Firmly camp the shield to the metal plate to ground it Further connect the shielding layer electrically to the grounding terminal of the motor For the inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 11 kW connect the input grounding to the grounding terminal at the front left hand side and the output grounding to that on the main circuit terminal block Use wiring guides to separate the input and output wires as far as possible Refer to F
369. rection of the machinery P04 data Tune while the motor stops Motor parameters subjected to tuning Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 Tuning type Tuning with the motor being stopped Selection condition of tuning type Cannot rotate the motor Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c P16 to P23 X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 Tuning the R1 and X with the motor being stopped Tuning the no load current and magnetic saturation factor with the motor running at 50 of the base frequency Tuning the rated slip frequency with the motor being stopped Can rotate the motor provided that it is safe Note that little load should be applied during tuning Tuning with load applied decreases the tuning accuracy The tuning results of motor parameters will be automatically saved into their respective function codes If P04 tuning is performed for instance the tuning results will be saved into P codes Motor 1 parameters 4 7 2 Preparation of machinery Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling fro
370. requency fall rate is too high regeneration may take place at the moment the motor rotation L matches the inverter output frequency causing an overvoltage trip On the contrary if the frequency fall rate is too low the time required for the output frequency to match the motor speed duration of current limiting action may be prolonged triggering the inverter overload prevention control Frequency Limiter High and Low F15 F16 H63 Low Limiter Mode selection F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency respectively H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the reference frequency drops below the low level specified by F16 as follows If H63 0 the output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16 e If H63 1 the inverter decelerates to stop the motor Output frequency Output frequency Maximum frequency ___________________ Maximum frequency _ _ F03 F03 Frequency limiter Frequency limiter 7 High F 15 High F15 Frequency limiter Frequency limiter Low F16 L F16 Low EAS Reference frequency Reference i 100 frequency 100 H63 0 H63 1 When you change the frequency limiter High F15 in order to raise the reference frequency A Note be sure to change the maximum frequency F03 accordingly Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control F15 gt
371. requency reference loss on the terminal C1 inverter keeping speed output speed arrived PG error detected maintenance timer light alarm alarm relay contact output for any fault braking resistor broken positioning completion signal Enable circuit failure detected Analog output Terminals FM1 and FM2 Output a selected signal with analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V or analog DC current 4 to 20 mA Selectable output signals Output frequency before slip compensation after slip compensation output current output voltage output torque load factor input power PID feedback amount PV speed PG feedback value DC link bus voltage universal AO motor output calibration PID command SV PID output MV Indication Running stopping Speed monitor reference frequency Hz output frequency motor speed load shaft speed line speed speed in Output current output voltage torque calculation value input power PID command value PID feedback amount PID output load factor motor output torque current flux command analog signal input monitor input watt hour Life early warning cumulative inverter run time cumulative motor run time input watt hour number of startups O checking energy saving monitor input power input power x coefficient charges for input power Trip mode Trip history Saves and displays the last 4 trip factors and their detailed description Other features Communi
372. rm data and then returns to 0 Change when running lt Data copying Drive control Default setting w PG w o Vif PG y Refer to page 5 78 H98 Protection Maintenance Function Mode selection A codes Motor 2 Parameters Code A01 Name Maximum Frequency 2 0 to 255 Display data in decimal format Bit 0 Lower the carrier frequency automatically 0 Disabled Detect input phase loss 0 Disables nabled Detect output phase loss 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor 0 Factory default level 1 User setup level Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Detect DC fan lock 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Detect braking transistor error for 22 kW or below 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Switch IP20 IP40 enclosure 0 IP20 1 IP40 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Data setting range 25 0 to 500 0 Hz Change when running z Data copying 83 Default setting M Drive control w PG w o Vif PG 5 79 Refer to page A02 Base Frequency 2 25 0 to 500 0 Hz 50 0 lt lt lt A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series 160 to 500 Ya
373. rmation in Programming mode Refer to Table 3 16 in Section 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Pressing the key while the running status information is displayed returns to the alarm code display Note When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause pressing the Gs key __ twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm state This means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this time m Switching to Programming mode You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing Gio keys simultaneously with the alarm displayed and modify the function code data Figure 3 7 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items Running mode Alarm occurs y Running status info at the time an alarm occurred kis Item Switching at approx Output frequency Current alarm code R 1 second intervals aaa iii gt DLL fl aot OHO f Item Switching at approx Output current 5 0 1 second intervals gt 254 i 1 OLIO 1 Item Switching at approx Speed detected value i 3 i 5_03 1 second intervals gt 500 j i 3rd last alarm code gt Same as above E g 3049 Te List of alarm codes Figure 3 7 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode 3 28 3 6
374. rol include larger maximum torque per output current than that the vector control E Vector control without speed sensor This control estimates the motor speed based on the inverter s output voltage and current to use the estimated speed for speed control In addition it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components and controls each of those components in vector No PG pulse generator interface card is required It is possible to obtain the desired response by adjusting the control constants PI constants using the speed regulator PI controller Since this control controls the motor current it is necessary to secure some voltage margin between the voltage that the inverter can output and the induced voltage of the motor by keeping the former lower than the latter Although the voltage of the general purpose motor has usually been adjusted to match the commercial power keeping the motor terminal voltage low is necessary in order to secure the voltage margin If the motor is driven under this control with the motor terminal voltage being kept low however the rated torque cannot be obtained even when the rated current originally specified for the motor is applied To secure the rated torque therefore it is necessary to use a motor with higher rated current This also applies to the vector control with speed sensor Em Vector control with speed sensor This control requires an optional PG pulse generato
375. rom that of the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the rated capacity of the motor is three or more ranks lower or two or more ranks higher than that of the inverter gt Replace the inverter with one with an appropriate capacity gt Manually specify the values for the motor parameters P06 P07 and P08 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 to 1 5 The motor was a special type such as a high speed motor gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 to 1 6 A tuning operation involving motor rotation P04 2 or 3 was attempted while the brake was applied to the motor gt Specify the tuning that does not involve the motor rotation P04 1 gt Release the brake before tuning that involves the motor rotation P04 2 or 3 EI For details of tuning errors refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 1 7 Function code basic settings and tuning lt 2 gt E Tuning errors Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 25 er8 RS 485 communications error COM port 1 erp RS 485 communications error COM port 2 Problem A communications error occurred during RS 485 communications Possible Causes 1 Communications conditions of the inverter do not match that of the host equipment What to Check and Suggested Measures Compare the settings of the y codes y01 to y10 y11 t
376. roperly functions To make the inverter compliant with EN954 1 Category 3 it is necessary to install the inverter on a control panel with the enclosure rating of IP54 or above This safety stop function coasts the motor to a stop When a mechanical brake is used to stop or hold the motor for the sake of the product safety system of whole system do not use the inverter s control signals such as output from terminal Y Using control signals does not satisfy the safety standards because of software intervention Use safety components complying with EN954 1 Category 3 or higher to activate mechanical brakes The safety shutdown circuit between terminal EN input section and inverter s output shutdown section is dual configured redundant circuit so that an occurrence of a single fault does not detract the safety stop function If a single fault is detected in the safety shutdown circuit the inverter coasts the motor to a stop even with the terminal EN PLC state being ON as well as outputting an alarm to external equipment Note that the alarm output function is not guaranteed to all of single faults This safety stop function may not completely shut off the power supply to the motor electrically Before performing wiring or maintenance jobs be sure to disconnect isolate the input power to the inverter and wait at least 5 minutes for 22 kW or below of inverters and at least 10 minutes for 30 kW or above 9 8 High Performance Multi
377. rtual physical value of the object to be controlled e g temperature Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details PID output 3 4 PID output in as the maximum frequency F03 being at 100 Load factor 6 Load factor of the motor in as the rated output being at 100 Motor output Motor output in kW Analog input monitor 8 An analog input to the inverter in a format suitable for a desired scale Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details Torque current 9 Torque current command value or calculated torque current Magnetic flux command 9 Magnetic flux command value Input watt hour Input watt hour kWh 100 1 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed as is on the 4 digit LED monitor screen so the LED monitor displays one tenth of the actual value with the x10 LED lit 2 When the LED monitor displays an output voltage the 7 segment letter u in the lowest digit stands for the unit of the voltage V 3 These PID related items appear only when the inverter drives the motor under the PID process control specified by function code J01 1 2 or 3 4 When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter blinks 5 When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter lights 6 When
378. s 4 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 5 380 to 440 V 50 Hz 380 to 480 V 60 Hz 6 Max voltage V Min voltage V 67 IEC 61800 3 Three phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR Voltage unbalance 7 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 8 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 9 ADC reactor DCR is an option However inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Note A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 8 2 8 2 Standard Model 2 EMC Filter Built in Type 8 2 1 Three phase 200 V class series HD and LD mode inverters Item Specifications Type FRN___G1E 20 Nominal applied motor kW 1 Rated capacity kVA HD 14 1 9 3 0 4 2 6 8 10 14 18 24 28 34 45 55 68 81 2lipn 7 11 7 16 20 25 30 43 55 68 81 107 an Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function hehe 230V i HD 3 5 8 11 18 27 37 49 63 76 90 119 146 180 215 amp Rated current A 4 pl 2 2 2 _ 818 462 59 4 74 8 88 115 146 180 215 283 fe F 29 42 55 68 80 107 G HD 150 1 min 200
379. s etc If the slider is in an ambiguous position the circuit is unclear whether it is turned ON or OFF and the digital input remains in an undefined state Be sure to place the slider so that it contacts either side of the switch 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad You can mount a keypad on the panel wall or install one at a remote site e g for operation on hand RJ 45 connectors Panel Keypad fixing screw Inverter Keypad rear Remote operation extension cable Figure 2 20 Mounting a Keypad on the Panel Wall To mount install a keypad on a place other than in an inverter the parts listed below are needed Extension cable Note 1 CB 5S CB 3S and CB 1S 3 types available in length of 5 m 3 m and 1 m Fixing screw M3 x O Note 2 Two screws needed Purchase off the shelf ones separately Note 1 When using an off the shelf LAN cable use a 10BASE T 100BASE TX straight type cable compliant with US ANSI TIA EIA 568A Category 5 Less than 20m Recommended LAN cable Manufacturer Sanwa Supply Inc Model KB 10T5 01K 1 m KB STP 01K 1 m Shielded LAN cable Note 2 When mounting on a panel wall use the screws with a length suitable for the wall thickness Depth of the screw holes on the keypad is 11 mm m Removing and mounting a keypad To remove the keypad pull it toward you while holding down the hook pointed by the arrow in Figure 2 21 When mounting it put the keypad back into place in the re
380. s are used throughout this manual Cote This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents Gip This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations AR This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU If installed according to the guidelines given below inverters marked with CE are considered as compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC ACAUTION 1 The ground terminal G should always be connected to the ground Do not use only a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB as the sole method of electric shock protection Be sure to use ground wires whose size is greater than power supply lines With overcurrent protection 2 When used with the inverter a molded case circuit breaker MCCB residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB or magnetic contactor MC should conform to the EN or IEC standards 3 When you use a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB for protection from electric shock in direct or indirect contact power lines or nodes be sure to install type B of RCD ELCB on the input primary
381. s defined beforehand by 15 function codes C05 to C19 Multi frequency 0 to 15 With this the inverter can drive the motor at 16 different preset frequencies The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 In the Function code to specify multi frequency column Other than multi frequency represents the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 or others SS8 SS4 SS2 SS1 Function code to specify multi frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF None Other than multi frequency OFF OFF OFF ON C05 Multi frequency 1 OFF OFF ON OFF C06 Multi frequency 2 OFF OFF ON ON C07 Multi frequency 3 OFF ON OFF OFF C08 Multi frequency 4 OFF ON OFF ON C09 Multi frequency 5 OFF ON ON OFF C10 Multi frequency 6 OFF ON ON ON C11 Multi frequency 7 ON OFF OFF OFF C12 Multi frequency 8 ON OFF OFF ON C13 Multi frequency 9 ON OFF ON OFF C14 Multi frequency 10 ON OFF ON ON C15 Multi frequency 11 ON ON OFF OFF C16 Multi frequency 12 ON ON OFF ON C17 Multi frequency 13 ON ON ON OFF C18 Multi frequency 14 ON ON ON ON C19 Multi frequency 15 m Select ACC DEC time RT1 and RT2 Function code data 4 and 5 These terminal commands switch between ACC DEC times 1 to 4 F07 F08 and E10 through E15 For details refer to the descriptions of F07 and F08
382. s the gt key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the and keys to display Maintenance Information che 3 Press the key to proceed to the list of maintenance items e g 5_ 00 4 Use the A and Q keys to display the desired maintenance item then press the key The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears 5 Press the amp key to return to the list of maintenance items Press the key again to return to the menu LED Monitor shows Table 3 15 Display Items in Maintenance Information Cumulative run time Description Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Counter range 0 to 65 535 hours Display Upper 2 digits and lower 3 digits are displayed alternately Example 0 lt 535h 535 hours 65 lt 535h 65 535 hours The lower 3 digits are displayed with hour When the count exceeds 65 535 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again DC link bus voltage Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit Unit V volts Max temperature inside the inverter Shows the maximum temperature inside the inverter for every hour Unit C Temperatures below 20 C are displayed as 20 C Max temperature of heat sink Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour Unit C Temperatures below 20 C are displayed as 20 C Max effective output current
383. s tuning Leakage reactance X P08 stops while the motor is stopped Rated slip frequency P12 X correction factors 1 and 2 P53 and P54 No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P07 After tuning while the motor Leakage reactance X P08 Tune while the motor is stopped the inverter Rated slip frequency P12 2 is rotating under V f performs tuning again with Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 control the motor running at 50 of P16 through P20 the base frequency Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c P21 through P23 X correction factors 1 and 2 P53 and P54 No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P07 After tuning while the motor Leakage reactance X P08 Tune while the motor is stopped the inverter Rated slip frequency P12 3 is rotating under performs tuning with the Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 vector control motor running at 50 of the P16 through P20 base frequency twice Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c P21 through P23 X correction factors 1 and 2 P53 and P54 P06 P07 POS P12 Motor 1 No load current R1 X and Rated slip frequency P06 through P08 and P12 specify no load current R1 X and rated slip frequency respectively Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor Performing auto tuning automatically sets these parameters Em No load current P06 Enter the value obtain
384. s turned ON gt Turn OFF both FWD and REV changed Possible Causes 6 The function code s to be changed does not appear What to Check and Suggested Measures If Menu 0 Quick Setup fn is selected only the particular function codes appear gt With Menu 0 Quick Setup f n being selected press the A key to call up the desired menu from f__ to y__ Then select the desired function code and change its data For details refer to Chapter 3 Table 3 4 Menus Available in Programming Mode 6 4 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 1 Ocn Instantaneous overcurrent Problem The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level Oc1 Overcurrent occurred during acceleration Oc2 Overcurrent occurred during deceleration Oc3 Overcurrent occurred during running at a constant speed Possible Causes 1 The inverter output lines were short circuited What to Check and Suggested Measures Disconnect the wiring from the inverter output terminals U V and W and measure the interphase resistance of the motor wiring Check if the resistance is too low gt Remove the short circuited part including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor Ground faults have occurred at the inverter output lines Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals U V and W and perform a Megger test gt Remove the grounded parts including replacemen
385. seconds or more cpy gt proT gt read While running the Data Copying cpy function holding down the key for 5 seconds or more displays read after displaying pr o7for 5 seconds to complete disabling the data protection e Enabling the disabled data protection ees Hold key down aes for 5 seconds or more cpy gt read gt proT While running the Data Copying cpy function holding down the key for 5 seconds or more displays pr oTafter displaying read for 5 seconds to complete enabling the data protection The followings are restrictions and special notes concerning Data Copying E If data copying does not work Check whether err or cper is blinking 1 If err is blinking a write error any of the following problems has arisen No data exists in the keypad memory No data read operation has been performed since shipment or a data read operation has been aborted e Data stored in the keypad memory contains any error e The models of copy source and destination inverters are different A data write operation has been performed while the inverter is running The copy destination inverter is data protected function code F00 1 e In the copy destination inverter the Enable write from keypad command WE KP is OFF A Read data operation has been performed for the inverter whose data protection was enabled 2 If cper is
386. series 4 Other motors H codes High Performance Functions Drive 5 control 22 we i oe gt Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range BE 8 R setting J wo w page 5 PG PG H03 Data Initialization 0 Disable initialization N N 0 y y Y 5 73 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults 2 Initialize motor 1 parameters 3 Initialize motor 2 parameters 4 Initialize motor 3 parameters 5 __Initialize motor 4 parameters H04 Auto reset Times 0 Disable 1 to 10 Y Y 0 Y Y Y H05 Reset interval 0 5 to 20 0 s Y Y 5 0 EY Y H06 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control 0 Disable Always in operation Y Yy 0 WY Y 1 __ Enable ON OFF controllable H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern 0 Linear Y 0 YIY Y 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Arbitrary according to H57 to H60 data 3 _ Curvilinear H08 Rotational Direction Limitation 0 Disable N Y 0 Y Y Y _ 1 Enable Reverse rotation inhibited 2 Enable Forward rotation inhibited H09 Starting Mode Auto search 0 Disable N Y 0 YINJN 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure 2 Enable At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start H11 Deceleration Mode 0 Normal deceleration 1 Coast to stop Y Y 0 YET H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting 0 Disable Y Y 1 Y N N 5 48 Mode selection 1 _ Enable H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time 0 1 to 10 0 s Y IYTY2 3 YI YY 5 35 H14 Frequen
387. series 400 V class series H50 6 0 Hz 5 0 Hz 5 0 Hz H51 22 V 42 V 40 V Note A box m in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure m Maximum Output Voltage 1 F06 Set the voltage for the maximum frequency 1 F03 Cote If FO5 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 is set to 0 settings of H50 through H53 H65 H66 Note and F06 do not take effect When the non linear point is below the base frequency the linear V f pattern applies when it is above the output voltage is kept constant When the auto torque boost F37 is enabled the non linear V f pattern takes no effect Examples Em Normal linear V f pattern Output voltage V Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 gt Output frequency Hz Base Maximum frequency 1 frequency 1 F04 F03 E V f pattern with three non linear points Output voltage V 4 Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Non linear V f pattern 3 Voltage H66 Non linear V f pattern 2 Voltage H53 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 Output frequency Hz Non linear Non linear Non linear Base Maximum Vif pattern 1 V f pattern 2 V f pattern 3 frequency 1 frequency 1 Frequency Frequency Frequency F04 F03 H50 H52 H65 F07 E10 E12 E14 Acceleration Time 1 2 3 and 4 F08 E11 E13 E15 Deceleration Time 1 2 3 and 4 F07 spec
388. ssible Causes 1 When PID control had What to Check and Suggested Measures Make sure that when you wish to view other monitor items E43 is not set to been disabled J01 0 you changed E43 LED Monitor Item selection to 10 or 12 With the PID being enabled J01 1 2 or 3 you disabled PID control J01 0 when the LED monitor had been set to display the PID command or PID feedback amount 10 PID command or 12 PID feedback amount gt Set E43 to a value other than 10 or 12 Make sure that when you wish to view a PID command or a PID feedback amount J01 PID control is not set to 0 Disable gt Set J01 to 1 Enable Process control normal operation 2 Enable Process control inverse operation or 3 Enable Dancer control by pressing the amp key 2 The keypad was poorly Prior to proceed check that pressing the key does not change the connected display on the LED monitor Check continuity of the extension cable for the keypad used in remote operation gt Replace the cable 2 ____ under bar appears Problem Although you pressed the key or entered a run forward command FWD or a run reverse _ appeared on the LED monitor command REV the motor did not start and an under bar _ Possible Causes 1 The voltage of the DC link What to Check and Suggested Measures Select 5_ 07 under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming bus was low mode on the keypa
389. starting torque Two types of torque boosts are available manual and automatic Output voltage V Output voltage V R l 100 Rated voltage 100 Rated voltage Torque Output Torque Output boost le frggency boost o frequency Base ee Base Hz requency frequency 1 F04 F04 Variable torque V f pattern F37 0 Linear V f pattern F37 1 Py When the variable torque V f pattern is selected F37 0 or 3 the output voltage may be low ata Tip low frequency zone resulting in insufficient output torque depending on the characteristics of the motor and load In such a case it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using the non linear V f pattern Recommended value H50 1 10 of the base frequency H51 1 10 of the voltage at base frequency Output voltage V Variable torque output using non linear V f pattern Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Variable torque output Non linear not using non linear V pattern Vf patternd f Voltage H51 5 Output frequency 0 Non inear Vif pattern 1 Base Hz Frequency frequency 1 H50 F04 E Torque boost Manual torque boost F09 In torque boost using F09 constant voltage is added to the basic V f pattern regardless of the load To secure a sufficient starting torque manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09 Specify an appropriate level that guarantees smooth start
390. status Running status in 4 digit hexadecimal format Refer to m Displaying running status 3 07 and running status 2 3_ 23 on the next page Motor speed 120 No of poles Display value Output frequency Hz x If the value is 10000 or lager the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value Load shaft speed PID command value Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 Coefficient for speed indication If the value is 10000 or lager the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID command value using function code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID command value x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears PID feedback amount Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID feedback amount using function code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID feedback amount x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears Torque limit value Driving torque limit value A based on motor rated torque Torque limit value Braking torque limit value B based on motor rated torque Ratio setting When this setting is 100
391. sufficient 5 n Input phase loss Problem Possible Causes 1 Breaks in wiring to the main power input terminals Check if the alarm occurs when a molded case circuit breaker MCCB residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or magnetic contactor MC is turned ON gt Reconsider the capacity of the power supply transformer Input phase loss occurred or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Repair or replace the main circuit power input wires or input devices MCCB MC etc 2 The screws on the main power input terminals are loosely tightened Check if the screws on the main power input terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque 3 Interphase voltage unbalance between three phases was too large Measure the input voltage gt Connect an AC reactor ACR to lower the voltage unbalance between input phases gt Increase the inverter capacity 4 Overload cyclically occurred Measure the ripple wave of the DC link bus voltage gt If the ripple is large increase the inverter capacity 5 Single phase voltage was input to the three phase input inverter Note Function Check the inverter type gt Apply three phase power The FRENIC MEGA of three phase input cannot be dr
392. switches the pulse train input source to the card and disables the input from the terminal X7 PIN E Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 1 2 3 and 4 CRUN M1 CRUN M2 CRUN M3 and CRUN M4 Function code data 72 73 74 and 75 Each of these terminal commands allows the inverter to count the run time of the corresponding motor being driven by a commercial power as well as counting the run time of the motor being driven through the inverter When any of these terminal commands is ON the inverter interprets it as the corresponding motor being driven by a commercial power and counts its run time m Select droop control DROOP Function code data 76 This terminal command DROOP is to switch enabling or disabling the droop control DROOP Droop control Remarks If H28 data is other than 0 the droop control is enabled even if DROOP is not assigned ON Enable OFF Disable Refer to the description of H28 m Cancel PG alarm PG CCL Function code data 77 When this terminal command is ON the PG wire break alarm is ignored Use this terminal command when switching PG wires for switching motors for example to prevent it from being detected as PG wire break m Run forward FWD Function code data 98 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop g a This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99
393. t breaker with lower sensitivity than the one has tripped currently used With overcurrent protection 4 Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that features measures against the high frequency current component Fuji SG and EG series Decrease the carrier frequency An external thermal relay 1 Decrease the carrier frequency was activated 2 Increase the current setting of the thermal relay 3 Use the electronic thermal overload protection built in the inverter instead of the external thermal relay E Selecting inverter capacity 1 To drive a general purpose motor select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor rating listed in the standard specifications table When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or deceleration is required select an inverter with one rank higher capacity than the standard 2 Special motors may have larger rated current than general purpose ones In such a case select an inverter that meets the following condition Inverter rated current gt Motor rated current 1 3 2 Precautions in running inverters Precautions for running inverters to drive motors or motor driven machinery are described below m Motor temperature When an inverter is used to run a general purpose motor the motor temperature becomes higher than when it is operated with a commercial power supply In the low speed range the motor cooling effect will be weakened so decrease the output torqu
394. t is recommended that the following parts be replaced at the specified intervals When the replacement is necessary consult your Fuji Electric representative Table 7 2 Replacement Parts Part name Standard replacement intervals See Note below DC link bus capacitor 10 years Electrolytic capacitors on printed circuit boards 10 years Cooling fans 10 years Fuse 10 years 90 kW or above Note These replacement intervals are based on the inverter s service life estimated at a surrounding temperature of 40 C at 100 HD mode inverters or 80 LD mode inverters of full load In environments with a surrounding temperature above 40 C or a large amount of dust or dirt the replacement intervals may be shorter Standard replacement intervals mentioned above are only a guide for replacement not a guaranteed service life 7 3 1 Judgment on service life The inverter has the life prediction function for some parts which measures the discharging time or counts the voltage applied time etc The function allows you to monitor the current lifetime state on the LED monitor and judge whether those parts are approaching the end of their service life The life prediction function can also issue early warning signals if the life time alarm command LIFE is assigned to any of the digital output terminals Refer to 3 Early warning of lifetime alarm later in this section Table 7 3 lists the parts whose service life can be predicted and de
395. t limit for braking If the inverter s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the torque limiters F40 F41 E16 and E17 the inverter controls the output frequency and limits the output torque for preventing a stall H73 specifies whether the torque limiter is enabled or disabled during acceleration deceleration and running at constant speed In braking the inverter increases the output frequency to limit the output torque Depending on the conditions during operation the output frequency could dangerously increase H76 Frequency increment limit for braking is provided to limit the increasing frequency component m Torque limiter 1 1 1 2 2 1 and 2 2 F40 F41 E16 and E17 These function codes specify the operation level at which the torque limiters become activated as the percentage of the motor rated torque Function code Name Torque limit feature F40 Torque limiter 1 1 Driving torque current limiter 1 F41 Torque limiter 1 2 Braking torque current limiter 1 E16 Torque limiter 2 1 Driving torque current limiter 2 E17 Torque limiter 2 2 Braking torque current limiter 2 Torque current limit Equivalent to limiting torque current flowing across the motor The graph below shows relationship between the torque and the output frequency at the constant torque current limit Torque Constant torque limit A Constant output current limit Output frequency Base frequency g 7 To
396. t of the wires relay terminals and motor Overload Measure the motor current with a measuring device to trace the current trend Then use this data to judge if the trend is over the calculated load value for your system design gt If the load is too heavy reduce it or increase the inverter capacity Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes in the current gt If there are any sudden changes make the load fluctuation smaller or increase the inverter capacity gt Enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting H12 1 Excessive torque boost specified when F37 0 1 3 or 4 Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 decreases the output current but does not stall the motor gt If no stall occurs decrease the torque boost F09 The acceleration deceleration time was too short Check that the motor generates enough torque required during acceleration deceleration That torque is calculated from the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 and H56 gt Enable the current limiter F43 and torque limiter F40 F41 E16 and E17 gt Increase the inverter capacity Malfunction caused by noise Check if noise control measures are appropriate e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise contro
397. t period Immediately turning it OFF even retains the control circuit power for a time while it shuts down the power to the magnetic contactor intended for short circuiting the charging resistor since the contactor is directly powered from the main power Under such conditions the control circuit can issue a turn on command to the magnetic contactor but the contactor not powered can produce nothing This state is regarded as abnormal causing an alarm 6 16 14 O n Overload of motor 1 through 4 Problem Electronic thermal protection for motor 1 2 3 or 4 activated Possible Causes 0 1 Motor 1 overload 0 2 Motor 2 overload 0 3 Motor 3 overload O 4 Motor 4 overload What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The electronic thermal Check the motor characteristics characteristics do not match the motor overload gt Reconsider the data of function codes P99 F10 and F12 characteristics gt Use an external thermal relay 2 Activation level for the Check the continuous allowable current of the motor electronic thermal y protection was gt Reconsider and change the data of function code F11 inadequate 3 The specified acceleration Recalculate the acceleration deceleration torque and time needed for the deceleration time was too load based on the moment of inertia for the load and the short acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08
398. t setting of function code data What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR has been assigned to an unavailable terminal with E01 through E07 E98 or E99 gt Correct the assignment Check whether the normal negative logic of the external signal matches that of the THR command specified by any of E01 through E07 E98 and E99 gt Ensure the matching of the normal negative logic Oh Inverter internal overheat Problem Temperature inside the inverter has exceeded the allowable limit Possible Causes 1 The surrounding temperature exceeded the inverter s specification limit What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the surrounding temperature gt Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted 10 0h4 Motor protection PTC NTC thermistor Problem Temperature of the motor has risen abnormally Possible Causes 1 The temperature around the motor exceeded the motor s specification range What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the motor gt Lower the temperature Cooling system for the motor defective Check if the cooling system of the motor is operating normally gt Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor Overload Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the heat sink overheat early warning
399. t signal Running forward Running reverse Inverter stopped FRUN ON OFF OFF RRUN OFF ON OFF E In remote operation RMT Function code data 54 This output signal comes ON when the inverter switches from local to remote mode Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 2 2 Remote and local modes Motor overheat detected by thermistor THM Function code data 56 Even when the PTC thermistor on the motor detects an overheat the inverter turns this signal ON and continues to run without entering the alarm O 4 state This feature applies only when H26 data is set to 2 Refer to the descriptions of H26 and H27 E Brake signal BRKS Function code data 57 This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake Refer to the descriptions of J68 through J72 m Terminal C1 wire break C1OFF Function code data 59 This output signal comes ON when the inverter detects that the input current to terminal C1 drops below 2 mA interpreting it as the terminal C1 wire broken Em Speed valid DNZS Function code data 70 This output signal comes ON when the speed command or the detected speed exceeds the stop frequency specified by function code F25 It goes OFF when the speed is below the stop frequency for 100 ms or longer F38 selects the decision criteria between the speed command and the detected speed Refer to the descriptions of F25 and F38 E Speed agreement DSAG Function code data
400. ta of P06 P16 to P23 by obtaining the appropriate values on the datasheet issued from the motor manufacturer For details of conversion from data on the datasheet into ones to be entered as function code data contact your Fuji Electric representative Perform the tuning with the motor stops P04 1 3 Tuning Tune while the motor stops Set function code P04 to 1 and press the B key The blinking of Z on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command The factory default is key on the keypad for forward rotation To select the terminal signal FWD or REV as a run command change the data of function code F02 The momenta run command is entered the display of Z lights up and tuning starts with the motor being stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command F02 1 end will appear upon completion of the measurements Turning the run command OFF completes the tuning If the run command has been given through the keypad or the communications link it automatically turns OFF upon completion of the measurements which completes the tuning Upon completion of the tuning the subsequent function code P06 appears on the keypad E Tuning errors Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the tuning
401. tails the life prediction function The predicted values should be used only as a guide since the actual service life is influenced by the surrounding temperature and other usage environments Table 7 3 Life Prediction Object ot lite Prediction function End of life criteria Prediction timing on the LED prediction monitor DC link bus Measurement of 85 or lower of the initial capacitance at At periodic 5_05 capacitor discharging time shipment inspection Capacitance Measures the See 1 Measuring the capacitance of H98 Bit 3 0 discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor in comparison with DC link bus capacitor initial one at shipment on page 7 5 when the main power is 85 or lower of the reference During ordinary 5 05 shut down and capacitance under ordinary operating operation Capacitance peared the conditions at the user site H98 Bit 3 1 capacitance papi See 2 Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions on page 7 6 ON time counting Exceeding 87 600 hours 10 years During ordinary 5 26 Counts the time elapsed operation Elapsed time when the voltage is 5 27 applied to the DC link Time bus capacitor while remaining correcting it according to before the end the capacitance of life measured above Electrolytic Counts the time elapsed Exceeding 87 600 hours 10 years During ordinary 5 06 capacitors on when th
402. tal command FWD or REV assigned to terminal FWD or REV terminals FWD REV respectively Pressing the key stops the motor Enable terminal command FWD REV Pressing the amp vy key runs the motor in the forward direction only Pressing the key stops the motor Enable keys on keypad Forward y vpad Forward No specification of the motor rotational direction is required Pressing the UN key runs the motor in the reverse direction only e RUN 0 keys on keypad Reverse Pressing the key stops the motor No specification of the motor rotational direction is required 4 16 Switching between remote and local modes The remote and local modes can be switched by a digital input signal provided from the outside of the inverter To enable the switching you need to assign LOC as a digital input signal to any of terminals X1 to X7 by setting 35 to any of E01 to E07 E98 and E99 Switching from remote to local mode automatically inherits the frequency settings used in remote mode If the motor is running at the time of the switching from remote to local the run command will be automatically turned ON so that all the necessary data settings will be carried over If however there is a discrepancy between the settings used in remote mode and ones made on the keypad e g switching from the reverse rotation in remote mode to the forward rotation only in local mode the inverter automatically stops Th
403. tegral time 4 1 11 Preparation for practical operation After verifying normal motor running with the inverter in a test run connect the motor with the machinery and perform wiring for practical operation 1 Configure the application related function codes that operate the machinery 2 Check interfacing with the peripheral circuits 1 2 gt 3 5 aS 2 Note Mock alarm Generate a mock alarm by pressing the Gros keys on the keypad for 5 seconds or more and check the alarm sequence The inverter should stop and issue an alarm output signal for any fault Judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor When the multi function keypad is used it is necessary to set up the judgment reference level to be applied for the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor When the remote keypad is used the same setting up is also necessary in order to judge the life of the DC link bus capacitor under the practical operating conditions For details refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION VO checking Check interfacing with peripherals using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad in Programming mode For details refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Analog input adjustment Adjust the analog inputs on terminals 12 C1 and V2 using the function codes related to the offset filter and gain that minimize analog input errors For details refer to Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES
404. ter in compliance with the national or local electric code Be sure to ground the inverter s grounding terminals G Otherwise an electric shock or fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF Otherwise electric shock could occur e Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur e Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise a fire or an accident could occur e Do not connect the power source wires to inverter output terminals U V and W Doing so could cause fire or an accident 2 9 2 3 5 Wiring of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals This section shows connection diagrams with the Enable input function used 1 FRN_ MCCBor 4 Power supply RCD ELCB 200 V class series _ _G1 2A 4A with SINK mode input by factory default DBR 6 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 400 V class series 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Auxiliary control power input 3 L Auxiliary fan power input 4 RI I Grounding termina p t9 Oc c Grounding terminal 7 iN el i ia Jed te 6 ri E alt E Analog input Potentiometer power supply Voltage input for
405. teristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 Note the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity the maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable In such cases do not use auto torque boost but choose manual torque boost per F09 F37 0 or 1 m Auto energy saving operation This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power loss of motor and inverter Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the motor or load characteristics Check the advantage of energy saving before you actually apply this feature to your machinery This feature applies to constant speed operation only During acceleration deceleration the inverter will run with manual torque boost F09 or auto torque boost depending on the F37 data If auto energy saving operation is enabled the response to a motor speed change from constant speed operation may be slow Do not use this feature for such machinery that requires quick acceleration deceleration ote set at 60 Hz or higher you may get a little or no energy saving advantage The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the frequency lower than the base frequency If the fre
406. ters Laboratories Inc as private criteria for inspections investigations pertaining to fire accident insurance in the USA Later these standards were authorized as the official standards to protect operators service personnel and the general populace from fires and other accidents in the USA cUL certification means that UL has given certification for products to clear CSA Standards cUL certified products are equivalent to those compliant with CSA Standards 9 1 2 Considerations when using FRENIC MEGA in systems to be certified by UL and cUL If you want to use the FRENIC MEGA series of inverters as a part of UL Standards or CSA Standards cUL certified certified product refer to the related guidelines described on pages vi to xiii 9 2 Compliance with European Standards The CE marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 EC and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC which are issued by the Council of the European Communities The products comply with the following standards Basic type EMC filter built in type a Depends upon a filter dedicated EN61 800 3 2004 EMC Directives to Fuji inverters Immunity Second environment Industrial Emission Category C3 Low Voltage Directive EN50178 1997 Safety Standard EN954 1 Category 3 If connected with an external EMC filter dedicated to Fuji inverters th
407. tes for motors of 22 kW or below and 10 minutes for motors of 30 kW or above by factory default Example When the F12 data is set at 5 minutes As shown below the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm condition alarm code 0 1 when the output current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for 5 minutes and 120 for approx 12 5 minutes The actual time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the specified value taking into account the time period from when the output current exceeds the rated current 100 until it reaches 150 of the overload detection level Example of Operating Characteristics 1 Specified with F12 Motor overload detection time min 0 50 100 150 200 Actual output current Overload detection level x 100 F14 H13 H14 H16 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Mode selection Restart time Frequency fall rate and Allowable momentary power failure time F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a momentary power failure E Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection F14 Data for F14 Mode Description 0 Trip immediately As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm u and shuts down its output so that th
408. th an insulated transformer Decrease the inverter s carrier frequency F26 If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit pipe and connect the pipe to the ground near the inverter Install the inverter into the metal panel and connect the whole panel to the ground Connect a noise filter to the inverter s power wires Decrease the inverter s carrier frequency F26 3 When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment For inverter s control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of the control circuit Connect a surge absorber in parallel with magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any E Leakage current A high frequency current component generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors IGBTs switching on off inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitance of inverter input and output wires or a motor If any of the problems listed below occurs take an appropriate measure against them Problem Measures An earth leakage circuit 1 breaker that is connected 2 Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter to the input primary side 3 Use an earth leakage circui
409. that the desired menu appears 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed Possible Causes 1 An attempt was made to change function code data that cannot be changed when the inverter is running What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the inverter is running with Menu 3 Drive Monitoring using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be changed when the motor is running by referring to the function code tables gt Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes 2 The data of the function codes is protected Check the data of function code F00 Data Protection gt Change the F00 data from Enable data protection 1 or 3 to Disable data protection 0 or 2 3 The WE KP terminal command Enable data change with keypad is not entered though it has been assigned to a digital input terminal Check the data of function codes E01 through E07 E98 and E99 and the input signal status with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a WE KP command through a digital input terminal 4 The amp key was not pressed Check whether you have pressed the key after changing the function code data gt Press the gs key after changing the function code data gt Check that save is displayed on the LED monitor 5 The data of function codes F02 E01 through E07 E98 and E99 cannot be Either one of the FWD and REV terminal commands i
410. the built in DBR using the steps below 1 For inverters with a capacity of 0 4 to 3 7 kW disconnect the wiring of the built in DBR from terminals P and DB for inverters with a capacity of 5 5 and 7 5 kW disconnect the wiring from terminal DB and the internal relay terminal see the figure below Insulate the terminals of the disconnected wires with insulating tape or other materials UEU 5 Pen Teee EEEERRRERREE Terminal Be E AE Relay terminal Wires from the built in DC braking resistor DBR 2 Connect an optional DBR to terminals P and DB The internal relay terminal on inverters with a capacity of 5 5 and 7 5 kW is left unused 3 Arrange the DBR and inverter so that the wiring length comes to 5 m or less and twist the two DBR wires or route them together in parallel AWARNING When connecting a DC braking resistor DBR never connect it to terminals other than terminals P and DB Otherwise a fire could occur DC link bus terminals P and N ny ity paio PAER E pany Optional devices Devices and terminals 3010 75 Braking unit Inverter Braking unit P and N DC braking resistor DBR Braking unit DBR P and SD 1 Con
411. tion was activated Possible Causes 1 What to Check and Suggested Measures Readjust the settings of J97 Servo lock Gain and d03 Speed control 1 P Gain 2 Incorrect control Check whether the setting of J99 Servo lock Completion width is correct completion width gt Correct the setting of J99 Insufficient gain in positioning control system 34 ecf Enable circuit failure Problem The circuit that detects the status of the enable circuit safety stop circuit is broken Possible Causes 1 Circuit related to the Enable circuit affected by strong electrical noise What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires communication cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures gt Separate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as possible C Note The Reset alarm terminal command RST cannot reset this alarm ecf If even a power off reset cannot restore the inverter state the inverter needs to be repaired 6 5 If the Light Alarm Indication a Appears on the LED Monitor If the inverter detects a minor abnormal state light alarm it can continue the current operation without tripping while displaying the light alarm indication a on the LED monitor In addition to the indication a the inverter blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED and outp
412. to the first menu item 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 0 Quick Setup in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of function codes specified in Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables To use Menu 0 Quick Setup you need to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter 3 7 Figure 3 2 shows the menu transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup and function code data changing procedure Programming mode Menu List of function codes Function code data Menu 0 alto alte Oza data Z T Ta amp ON t OQ corre Save data and go aS to the next function Was code F D2 IE 2 F a Y Figure 3 2 Menu Transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup and Function Code Data Changing Procedure Basic key operation This section gives a description of the basic key operation in Quick Setup following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 2 This example shows you how to change function code F01 data Frequency command source from the factory default Q keys on keypad F01 0
413. tomatically set See Table 5 3 function code P03 5 5 0 min for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 10 0 min for those with 30 kW or above 7 The motor constant is automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table 5 3 5 17 Drive 5 control E d 32 we Code Name Data setting range gel BE Default Refer to S5 Q 8 setting vit w o w page 5 PG PG r39 Motor 4 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series N Y1 Y2 0 YIYIY 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 2 Motor characteristics 2 Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors r40 Slip Compensation 4 0 Enable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above N Y 0 Y NIN E Operating conditions 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above 2 Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above 3 Disable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above r41 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 Y Y 0 20 Y N N Gain for Motor 4 r42 Motor Parameter Switching 4 0 Motor Switch to the 4th motor N Y 0 Y Y Y 5 81 Mode selection 1 Parameter Switch to particular r codes r43 Speed Control 4 Speed command filter 0
414. tor shows one tenth of the value When the count exceeds 65 530 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again Input watt hour Shows the input watt hour of the inverter Display range 001 to 9999 Input watt hour Displayed value x 100 kWh To reset the integrated input watt hour and its data set function code E51 to 0 000 When the input watt hour exceeds 999 900 kWh the counter will be reset to 0 Input watt hour data Shows the value expressed by input watt hour kWh x E51 whose data range is 0 000 to 9 999 Unit None Display range 001 to 9999 The data cannot exceed 9999 It will be fixed at 9 999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour data the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors resolution To reset the integrated input watt hour data set function code E51 to 0 000 LED Monitor shows Table 3 15 Display Items in Maintenance Information Continued Number of RS 485 communications errors COM port 1 Description Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in RS 485 communication COM port 1 connection to keypad after the power is turned ON Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 Content of RS 485 communications error COM port 1 Shows the latest error that has occurred in RS 485 communication COM port 1 in decimal For error c
415. torque disturbance control accuracy V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active Vector control without speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor Relative performance symbols Excellent O Good A Effective A Less effective Not effective 4 5 4 1 6 Function code basic settings lt 1 gt Driving a Fuji general purpose motor under the V f control F42 0 or 2 or dynamic torque vector control F42 1 requires configuring the following basic function codes Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 Select Fuji standard 8 or 6 series motors with the function code P99 Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values For the motor ratings check the ratings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them 2 For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Functi F faul Pea Function code data aciory det ult FRN__ _G1 2A 4A FRN___G1 4E 200 V class series 200 V class series 60 0 Hz or ratings 400 V ES 400 V EHS t on the nameplate of the B00 V clase series Dab class Scribe Rated voltage at base 220 V frequency 1 400 V class series 400 V class series 415 V 400 V
416. trol overload stop function speed control online tuning notch filter observer and then check that the motor vibration comes to a stop gt Disable the functions causing the vibration gt Readjust the output current fluctuation damping gain H80 gt Readijust the speed control systems d01 through d06 Check that the motor vibration is suppressed if you decrease the level of F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency or set F27 Motor sound Tone to 0 gt Decrease the carrier frequency F26 or set the tone to 0 F27 0 6 7 5 Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates Possible Causes 1 The specified carrier frequency is too low What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency and F27 Motor sound Tone gt Increase the carrier frequency F26 gt Change the setting of F27 to appropriate value 2 The surrounding temperature of the inverter was too high when automatic lowering of the carrier frequency was enabled by H98 Measure the temperature inside the panel where the inverter is mounted gt If it is over 40 C lower it by improving the ventilation gt Lower the temperature of the inverter by reducing the load For fans or pumps decrease the frequency limiter value F15 Note If you disable H98 an OA1 Oh3 or O u alarm may occur 3 Resonance with the load
417. uit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE Note To configure this kind of circuit use a highly reliable relay Recommended product Fuji control relay Model HH54PW po 5 a T 2 a lt Control circuit gt lt Control circuit gt 24 VDC 4 24 VDC g 1 i SOURCE i SOURCE X1 to X7 E X1 to X7 L FWD REV Photocoupler FWD REV Photocoupler CM CM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 14 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact C Tio m Using a programmable logic controller PLC to turn X1 to X7 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 15 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller PLC to turn control signal input X1 to X7 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power supply turns ON or OFF control signal X1 to X7 FWD or REV When using this type of circuit observe the following Connect the node of the external power supply which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter
418. uit capacity MASS Mass of the inverter in kilogram 30 kW or above SER No Product number 6X1234S0006Z Serial number of production lot Production month 1 to 9 January to September X Y or Z October November or December Production year Last digit of year If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product contact your Fuji Electric representative 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks Front cover Front cover SZ fixing screw TSR g Sub nameplate Control circuit f terminal block lie lt A RAU plate R Front cover Main circuit terminal block Main nameplate NN i a FRN11G1m 40 Cooling fans Internal air circulation fan OR mounting Keypad enclosure openable Control circuit Warning terminal block label Y Warning Alb plate es SB s Charging lamp Front cover Main nameplate Main circuit terminal block Front cover b FRN30G1m 40 Figure 1 2 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters Note A box W in the above figures replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above figures replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 3 Precautions for Using Inverters 1 3 1 Precautions in introducing inverters This section provides precautions in introducing inverters e g precautions for installation environment power supply lines wiring and connection to peripheral equipment
419. umber of startups A EE EEA a ee ae 6 2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting A WARNING If any of the protective functions has been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to OFF release the alarm If the alarm is released while any run commands are set to ON the inverter may supply the power to the motor running the motor Injury may occur Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Electric shock may occur Follow the procedure below to solve problems 1 First check that the inverter is correctly wired referring to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 5 Wiring of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals 2 Check whether an alarm code or the light alarm indication a is displayed on the LED monitor f neither an alarm code nor light alarm indication a appears
420. unction 0 None Auxiliary frequency command 1 o z z z lt Auxiliary frequency command 2 PID command 1 PID feedback amount Ratio setting Analog torque limit value A Analog torque limit value B 0 Analog input monitor lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt E64 Saving of Digital Reference Frequency Automatic saving when main power is turned OFF Saving by pressing S key l A Oa SS E65 Reference Loss Detection Continuous running frequency 0 Decelerate to stop 20 to 120 999 Disable 999 E78 E79 Torque Detection 1 Level Timer 0 to 300 100 0 01 to 600 00 s 10 00 E80 E81 Torque Detection 2 Low Torque Detection Level Timer 0 to 300 20 0 01 to 600 00 s 20 00 The shaded function codes HH are applicable to the quick setup 1 The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table 5 1 4 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table 5 3 function code P03 5 7 Code Name E98 E99 Terminal FWD Function Terminal REV Function Data setting range Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals FWD and REV as listed below 0 1000 Select multi frequency 0 to 1 steps SS1 1 1001 Select multi frequency 0 to 3 steps SS2 2 1002 Select mu
421. unction code HO3 2 and then perform auto tuning Function code Motor 1 selection Function code data 2 Motor characteristics 2 VG motors Factory default FRN__ _G1m 2A 4A FRN_ __G1M 4E 0 Motor characteristics 0 Motor 1 Rated capacity Same as that of the applied motor capacity Nominal applied motor capacity Maximum frequency 1 Acceleration time 1 Note Deceleration time 1 Note Note Machinery design values Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer than your machinery design values If the specified time is short the inverter may not run the motor properly Initializing the motor 1 parameters with the function code 4 9 200 V class series 60 0 Hz 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 200 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 6 00 s 6 00 s H03 2 automatically updates the data of function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 After that perform the auto tuning E Tuning procedure 1 Selection of tuning type Check the machinery conditions and perform the tuning while the motor is rotating under vector control P04 0 3 Adjust the acceleration and deceleration times F07 and F08 in view of the motor rotation And specify the rotation direction that matches the actual rotation direction of the machinery below P04 data Tune while the motor stops Motor p
422. up of the inverter to ensure safer operation specify small values to those function codes at first and gradually increase them while checking the actual operation The speed limiting function serves as an overspeed level barrier or as a speed limiter under torque control For details of the speed limiting function refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual lt Modification of motor control function code data gt Modifying the current function code data sometimes can solve an insufficient torque or overcurrent incident The table below lists the major function codes to be accessed For details see Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES and Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Function code Acceleration time 1 Modification key points If the current limiter is activated due to a short acceleration time and large drive current prolong the acceleration time Drive control w o PG w PG Deceleration time 1 If an overvoltage trip occurs due to a short deceleration time prolong the deceleration time Torque boost If the starting motor torque is deficient increase the torque boost If the motor with no load is overexcited decrease the torque boost Current limiter Mode selection If the stall prevention function is activated by the current limiter during acceleration or deceleration increase the operation level Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving For excessive slip compensation during driving de
423. ure a complete shutoff Be sure to use shielded wires for connecting terminals EN and PLC and ground the shielding layer Do not connect mix any other control signal wire within the same shielded core It is the responsibility of the machinery manufacturer to guarantee that a short circuiting or other fault does not occur in wiring of external safety components between terminals EN and PLC Fault examples e Terminals EN and PLC are short circuited due to the wiring being caught in the door of the control panel so that a current continues to flow in terminal EN although the safety component is OFF and therefore the safety function will may NOT operate e The wiring is in contact with any other wire so that a current continues to flow in terminal EN and therefore the safety function will may NOT operate 9 7 Other notes When configuring the product safety system with this safety stop function make a risk assessment of not only the external equipment and wiring connected to terminal EN but also the whole system including other equipment devices and wiring against the product safety system required by the machinery manufacturer under the manufacturer s responsibility in order to confirm that the whole system conforms to the product safety system required by the machinery manufacturer In addition as preventive maintenance the machinery manufacturer must perform periodical inspections to check that the product safety system p
424. uries and or substantial property damage Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times Application AWARNING The FRENIC MEGA is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Do not use it for single phase motors or for other purposes Fire or an accident could occur The FRENIC MEGA may not be used for a life support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety e Though the FRENIC MEGA is manufactured under strict quality control install safety devices for applications where serious accidents or property damages are foreseen in relation to the failure of it An accident could occur Installation A WARNING Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material Otherwise a fire could occur Do not place flammable object nearby Doing so could cause fire Inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above whose protective structure is IPOO involve a possibility that a human body may touch the live conductors of the main circuit terminal block Inverters to which an optional DC reactor is connected also involve the same Install such inverters in an inaccessible place Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur ACAUTION Do not support the inverter by its front cover during tra
425. use a Function code data Active ON Active OFF Terminal commands assigned Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps Select ACC DEC time 2 steps Select ACC DEC time 4 steps Enable 3 wire operation Coast to a stop BX Reset alarm RST Enable external alarm trip THR Ready for jogging JOG Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Select motor 2 M2 Enable DC braking DCBRK Select torque limiter level 2 1 TL2 TL1 Switch to commercial power 50 Hz SW50 Switch to commercial power 60 Hz Sw6o UP Increase output frequency UP DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN Enable data change with keypad WE KP Cancel PID control Hz PID Switch normal inverse operation Interlock Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus option Universal DI U DI Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM Force to stop STOP Pre excitation EXITE Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 5 52 Function code data Active ON Active OFF Terminal commands assigned Select local keypad operation Select motor 3 M3 Select motor 4 M4 Protect motor from dew condensation DWP Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz ISW50 Enab
426. utput value E45 E46 E47 LCD Monitor Item selection Language selection Contrast control 0 Running status rotational direction and operation guide 1 Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque Multi function keypad option Type TP G1 Type TP G1C Japanese 0 Chinese English 1 English German 2 Japanese French 3 Korean Spanish Italian Low to 10 High E48 LED Monitor Speed monitor item Output frequency Before slip compensation Output frequency After slip compensation Reference frequency Motor speed in r min Load shaft speed in r min Line speed in m min 7 Display speed in VEN S S S FR ERS E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication 0 01 to 200 00 30 00 E51 E54 Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data 0 000 Cancel reset 0 001 to 9999 0 010 Keypad Menu display mode 0 Function code data editing mode Menus 0 1 and 7 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 and 7 2 Full menu mode Frequency Detection 3 Level 0 0 to 500 0 Hz lt lt x lt E55 E56 Current Detection 3 Level Timer 0 00 Disable Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter rated current lt Y1 Y2 4 lt lt lt 0 01 to 600 00 s 10 00 E61 E62 E63 Terminal 12 Extended Function Terminal C1 Extended Function Terminal V2 Extended F
427. uts the light alarm signal L ALM to a digital output terminal to alert the peripheral equipment to the occurrence of a light alarm To use the L ALM it is necessary to assign the signal to any of the digital output terminals by setting any of function codes E20 through E24 and E27 to 98 Function codes H81 and H82 specify which alarms should be categorized as light alarm The available light alarm codes are check marked in the Light alarm object column in Table 6 1 To display the light alarm factor and escape from the light alarm state follow the instructions below Em Displaying the light alarm factor 1 Press the key to enter Programming mode 2 Check the light alarm factor in 5_ 36 Light alarm factor latest under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode The light alarm factor is displayed in alarm codes For details about the alarm codes see Table 6 1 Abnormal States Detectable Heavy alarm and Light alarm objects For details about the menu transition in Menu 5 Maintenance Information see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information It is possible to display the factors of most recent 3 light alarms in 5_ 37 Light alarm factor last to 5_ 39 Light alarm factor 8rd last m Switching the LED monitor from the light alarm to normal display If it is necessary to return the LED monitor to the normal display state showing the running status such as
428. vancing capacitor for power factor correction in the inverter s input primary or output Secondary circuit Mounting it in the input primary circuit takes no effect To correct the inverter power factor use an optional DC reactor DCR Mounting it in the output secondary circuit causes an overcurrent trip disabling operation An overvoltage trip that occurs when the inverter is stopped or running with a light load is assumed to be due to surge current generated by open close of phase advancing capacitors in the power system An optional DC AC reactor DCR ACR is recommended as a measure to be taken at the inverter side Input current to an inverter contains a harmonic component that may affect other motors and phase advancing capacitors on the same power supply line If the harmonic component causes any problems connect an optional DCR ACR to the inverter In some cases it is necessary to insert a reactor in series with the phase advancing capacitors 2 Power supply lines Application of a DC AC reactor Use an optional DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer is 500 kVA or more and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity or when there are thyristor driven loads If no DCR is used the percentage reactance of the power supply decreases and harmonic components and their peak levels increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of the inverter or decrease the capa
429. verse order of removal Figure 2 21 Removing a Keypad 2 29 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD in the case of remote keypad 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad As shown at the right the keypad 7 segment consists of a four digit LED monitor LED monitor six keys and five LED indicators NS The keypad allows you to run and stop LED indicators the motor monitor the running status UP key specify the function code data and _ RUN LED monitor I O signal states maintenance i i i Program information and alarm information Reset key 12 a Function STOP key peers E DOWN key When using a multi function keypad instead of a remote keypad read the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual USB port Note Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators Functions Four digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the followings according to the operation modes m In Running mode Running status information e g output frequency LED current and voltage Monitor When a light alarm occurs a is displayed m In Programming mode Menus function codes and their data m In Alarm mode Alarm code which identifies the alarm factor when the protective function is activated Program Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter m In Running mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming mode m In Pr
430. y 43 1043 Under PID control PID CTL yilyly 44 1044 Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control PID STP WY CY 45 1045 Low output torque detected U TL Woy YON 46 1046 Torque detected 1 TD1 YoY Y 47 1047 Torque detected 2 TD2 YJYJ Y Motor 1 selected SWM1 Yeo LN Motor 2 selected swm2 VY Y Motor 3 selected SWM3 YUN TY Motor 4 selected SWM4 TY Running forward FRUN Y YIY Running reverse RRUN NIY Y In remote operation RMT YNN Motor overheat detected by thermistor THM Yor yey Brake signal BRKS YIY Y Frequency speed detected 3 FDT3 MVE Y J Terminal C1 wire break C1OFF y yy i es ok and PG error detected _ oy ez Positioning completio N 84 1084 Maintenance timer Y Y 98 1098 Light alarm YY 99 1099 Alarm output for any alarm ALM YY 101 1101 Enable circuit failure detected DECF YY 102 1102 Enable input OFF EN OFF yY ly 105 1105 Braking transistor broken DBAL YY Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal E30 Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width 0 0 to 10 0 Hz Y Y 2 5 YEY CY E31 Frequency Detection 1 Level 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 71 CEET E32 Hysteresis width 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 1 0 YLYIY E34 Overload Early Warning Current 0 00 Disable Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter Y Y1 Y2 4 Yw Detection Level rated current E35 Timer

Instruction Manual - Industrial Electric Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents